advertisement
GX3000 series
Online Manual
English
Contents
Easy Understanding Network Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Performing/Changing Wired LAN Connection (Ethernet Cable) Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Performing Maintenance Functions from Your Computer (macOS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Cannot Proceed Beyond Printer Connection Screen (Cannot Find Printer Connected via USB). 384
Printer Cannot Be Used After Replacing Wireless Router or Changed Router Settings. . . . . . . . 389
Cannot Proceed Beyond Printer Connection Screen (Cannot Find Printer Connected via USB). . . . . 384
Using Online Manual
Operating Environment
Symbols Used in This Document
Touch-enabled Device Users (Windows)
Printing Online Manual
Trademarks and Licenses
Screenshots in This Manual
10
Symbols Used in This Document
Warning
Instructions that, if ignored, could result in death, serious personal injury, or property damage caused by incorrect operation of the equipment. These must be observed for safe operation.
Caution
Instructions that, if ignored, could result in personal injury or property damage caused by incorrect operation of the equipment. These must be observed for safe operation.
Important
Instructions including important information that must be observed to avoid damage and injury or improper use of the product. Be sure to read these instructions.
Note
Instructions including notes for operation and additional explanations.
Basics
Instructions explaining basic operations of your product.
Note
• Icons may vary depending on your product.
11
Touch-enabled Device Users (Windows)
For touch actions, you need to replace "right-click" in this document with the action set on the operating system. For example, if the action is set to "press and hold" on your operating system, replace "right-click" with "press and hold."
12
Trademarks and Licenses
Trademarks
Licenses
13
Trademarks
• Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
• Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• Microsoft Edge and Microsoft Excel are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• Internet Explorer is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• Microsoft Store is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
• Mac, Mac OS, macOS, OS X, AirPort, App Store, AirPrint, the AirPrint logo, Safari, Bonjour, iPad, iPad
Air, iPad mini, iPadOS, iPhone and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.
• Google Cloud Print, Google Chrome, Chrome OS, Chromebook, Android, Google Drive, Google Apps and Google Analytics are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc. Google Play and
Google Play Logo are trademarks of Google LLC.
• Adobe, Acrobat, Flash, Photoshop, Illustrator, Adobe RGB and Adobe RGB (1998) are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
• Adobe, Acrobat, Flash, Photoshop, Photoshop Elements, Lightroom, Adobe RGB and Adobe RGB
(1998) are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United
States and/or other countries.
• Amazon, Echo and Alexa are trademarks of Amazon.com, Inc. or its affiliates.
• Google, Google Home, and Android are trademarks of Google LLC.
• LINE is a registered trademark or trademark of LINE Corporation.
• LINE Clova is a registered trademark of LINE Corporation.
• Google Docs, and Google Drive are trademarks of Google LLC.
• App Store is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A. and licensed to Canon Inc.
• QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and in other countries.
• The Mopria® word mark and the Mopria® Logo are registered and/or unregistered trademarks of Mopria
Alliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
• Mozilla Firefox is a trademark or registered trademark of Mozilla Foundation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• Wi-Fi, WPA, WPA2 and WPA3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance.
• All other company names and products mentioned in this guide may be registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies.
14
Licenses
Copyright (c) 2003-2015 Apple Inc. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of Apple Inc. ("Apple") nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004 http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by
Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means
(i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this
License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files.
15
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License,
Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or
Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the
Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a
Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed.
any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:
1. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
2. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and
16
3. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such
NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative
Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with
Licensor regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this
License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof,
You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations,
You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other
Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any
17
such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
---- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) -----
Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of
CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission.
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES
WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR
PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
---- Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
18
---- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright c 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved.
Use is subject to license terms below.
This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun
Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
19
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2003-2012, Sparta, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network Center of Beijing University of Posts and
Telecommunications.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications, nor the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
20
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 7: Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003 [email protected]
Author: Bernhard Penz <[email protected]>
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its subsidiaries, brand or product names may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 8: Apple Inc. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2007 Apple Inc. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of Apple Inc. ("Apple") nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
21
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 9: ScienceLogic, LLC copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2009, ScienceLogic, LLC
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of ScienceLogic, LLC nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS
IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
MIT License
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
22
OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Copyright 2000 Computing Research Labs, New Mexico State University
Copyright 2001-2015 Francesco Zappa Nardelli
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COMPUTING
RESEARCH LAB OR NEW MEXICO STATE UNIVERSITY BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES
OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.
Written by Joel Sherrill <[email protected]>.
COPYRIGHT (c) 1989-2000.
On-Line Applications Research Corporation (OAR).
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose without fee is hereby granted, provided that this entire notice is included in all copies of any software which is or includes a copy or modification of this software.
THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY.
IN PARTICULAR, THE AUTHOR MAKES NO REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY KIND
CONCERNING THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
(1) Red Hat Incorporated
Copyright (c) 1994-2009 Red Hat, Inc. All rights reserved.
This copyrighted material is made available to anyone wishing to use, modify, copy, or redistribute it subject to the terms and conditions of the BSD License. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY expressed or implied, including the implied warranties of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. A copy of this license is available at http://www.opensource.org/licenses. Any Red Hat trademarks that are incorporated in the source code or documentation are not subject to the BSD License and may only be used or replicated with the express permission of Red Hat, Inc.
(2) University of California, Berkeley
Copyright (c) 1981-2000 The Regents of the University of California.
23
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS
IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The FreeType Project LICENSE
----------------------------
2006-Jan-27
Copyright 1996-2002, 2006 by
David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg
Introduction
============
The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive packages; some of them may contain, in addition to the FreeType font engine, various tools and contributions which rely on, or relate to, the FreeType Project.
This license applies to all files found in such packages, and which do not fall under their own explicit license. The license affects thus the FreeType font engine, the test programs, documentation and makefiles, at the very least.
This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all encourage inclusion and use of free software in commercial and freeware products alike. As a consequence, its main points are that: o We don't promise that this software works. However, we will be interested in any kind of bug reports.
(`as is' distribution) o You can use this software for whatever you want, in parts or full form, without having to pay us.
(`royalty-free' usage) o You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it, or only parts of it, in a program, you must acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that you have used the FreeType code. (`credits')
24
We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this software, with or without modifications, in commercial products.
We disclaim all warranties covering The FreeType Project and assume no liability related to The FreeType
Project.
Finally, many people asked us for a preferred form for a credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with this license. We thus encourage you to use the following text:
"""
Portions of this software are copyright © <year> The FreeType
Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
"""
Please replace <year> with the value from the FreeType version you actually use.
Legal Terms
===========
0. Definitions
--------------
Throughout this license, the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files originally distributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the
`FreeType Project', be they named as alpha, beta or final release.
`You' refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where `using' is a generic term including compiling the project's source code as well as linking it to form a `program' or `executable'.
This program is referred to as `a program using the FreeType engine'.
This license applies to all files distributed in the original FreeType Project, including all source code, binaries and documentation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its original, unmodified form as distributed in the original archive.
If you are unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by this license, you must contact us to verify this.
The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg.
All rights reserved except as specified below.
1. No Warranty
--------------
THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED `AS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY
TO USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT.
2. Redistribution
-----------------
This license grants a worldwide, royalty-free, perpetual and irrevocable right and license to use, execute, perform, compile, display, copy, create derivative works of, distribute and sublicense the FreeType Project
25
(in both source and object code forms) and derivative works thereof for any purpose; and to authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights granted herein, subject to the following conditions: o Redistribution of source code must retain this license file (`FTL.TXT') unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. The copyright notices of the unaltered, original files must be preserved in all copies of source files.
o Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that states that the software is based in part of the work of the FreeType Team, in the distribution documentation. We also encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your documentation, though this isn't mandatory.
These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the FreeType Project, not just the unmodified files. If you use our work, you must acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid to us.
3. Advertising
--------------
Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor you shall use the name of the other for commercial, advertising, or promotional purposes without specific prior written permission.
We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or more of the following phrases to refer to this software in your documentation or advertising materials: `FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine', `FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'.
As you have not signed this license, you are not required to accept it. However, as the FreeType Project is copyrighted material, only this license, or another one contracted with the authors, grants you the right to use, distribute, and modify it.
Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying the FreeType Project, you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms of this license.
4. Contacts
-----------
There are two mailing lists related to FreeType: o [email protected]
Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as future and wanted additions to the library and distribution.
If you are looking for support, start in this list if you haven't found anything to help you in the documentation.
Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc.
Our home page can be found at http://www.freetype.org
--- end of FTL.TXT ---
The TWAIN Toolkit is distributed as is. The developer and distributors of the TWAIN Toolkit expressly disclaim all implied, express or statutory warranties including, without limitation, the implied warranties of merchantability, noninfringement of third party rights and fitness for a particular purpose. Neither the
26
developers nor the distributors will be liable for damages, whether direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential, as a result of the reproduction, modification, distribution or other use of the TWAIN Toolkit.
JSON for Modern C++
Copyright (c) 2013-2017 Niels Lohmann
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Copyright (c) 2011 - 2015 ARM LIMITED
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- Neither the name of ARM nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS
IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright (c) 2014, Kenneth MacKay
All rights reserved.
27
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS
IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright (c) 2006, CRYPTOGAMS by <[email protected]> All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain copyright notices, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the CRYPTOGAMS nor the names of its copyright holder and contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
ALTERNATIVELY, provided that this notice is retained in full, this product may be distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public License (GPL), in which case the provisions of the GPL apply INSTEAD
OF those given above.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
ISC License
Copyright (c) 2013-2017
Frank Denis <j at pureftpd dot org>
28
Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH
REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Copyright (c) 2008 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Lennart Augustsson ([email protected]) at
Carlstedt Research & Technology.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright (c) 2000 Intel Corporation
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
29
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither name of Intel Corporation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Lua
Copyright © 1994–2014 Lua.org, PUC-Rio.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
LuaSocket
LuaSocket 2.0.2 license
Copyright © 2004-2007 Diego Nehab
30
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
LuneScript
Copyright (c) 2018 ifritJP
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
Copyright (c) 2002-2019, Jouni Malinen <[email protected]> and contributors
All Rights Reserved.
This software may be distributed, used, and modified under the terms of
BSD license:
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
31
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name(s) of the above-listed copyright holder(s) nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright (C) 2019, Broadcom Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
The following applies only to products supporting Wi-Fi.
(c) 2009-2013 by Jeff Mott. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation or other materials provided with the distribution.
32
* Neither the name CryptoJS nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS
IS," AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The following applies only to products supporting PIXUS Cloud Link, PIXMA Cloud Link, or MAXIFY Cloud
Link.
THE BASIC LIBRARY FUNCTIONS
---------------------------
Written by: Philip Hazel
Email local part: ph10
Email domain: cam.ac.uk
University of Cambridge Computing Service, Cambridge, England.
Copyright (c) 1997-2012 University of Cambridge
All rights reserved.
PCRE JUST-IN-TIME COMPILATION SUPPORT
-------------------------------------
Written by: Zoltan Herczeg
Email local part: hzmester
Emain domain: freemail.hu
Copyright(c) 2010-2012 Zoltan Herczeg
All rights reserved.
STACK-LESS JUST-IN-TIME COMPILER
--------------------------------
Written by: Zoltan Herczeg
Email local part: hzmester
Emain domain: freemail.hu
Copyright(c) 2009-2012 Zoltan Herczeg
All rights reserved.
THE C++ WRAPPER FUNCTIONS
-------------------------
33
Contributed by: Google Inc.
Copyright (c) 2007-2012, Google Inc.
All rights reserved.
THE "BSD" LICENCE
-----------------Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the University of Cambridge nor the name of Google
Inc. nor the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
34
Easy Understanding Network Connections
What is Wireless Connection
Connect the printer and devices (e.g. computer/smartphone/tablet) using a wireless router.
If you have a wireless router, we recommend you use one for wireless connection.
• Connection methods vary depending on the wireless router type.
• You can change network settings such as the network name (SSID) and security protocol on the printer.
• When the connection between a device and a wireless router is completed and (Wi-Fi icon) is displayed in the device's screen, you can connect the device to the printer using the wireless router.
What is Wireless Direct Connection
Connect the printer and devices (e.g. computer/smartphone/tablet) without using a wireless router.
• While you are using the printer with Wireless Direct, Internet connection from the printer becomes unavailable. In that case, web services for the printer cannot be used.
• If you connect a device connected to the Internet via a wireless router to the printer that is in the
Wireless Direct, the connection between the device and wireless router will be disabled. In that case, the connection of the device may switch to a mobile data connection automatically depending on your device. Transmission fees for connecting to the Internet using a mobile data connection apply.
• In the Wireless Direct, you can connect up to five devices at the same time. If you try to connect a sixth device while five devices are already connected, an error will appear. If an error appears, disconnect a device you do not use and configure settings again.
• Network settings such as the network name (SSID) and security protocol are specified automatically.
Connecting with Wireless Direct
What is Wired Connection
Connect the printer and hub/router using a LAN cable. To make a wired connection on a model that supports wired connection, prepare a LAN cable.
USB Connection (Reference)
Note
• You can connect the printer and computer using a USB cable (USB connection). Prepare a USB cable.
For details, see
Switching Printer's Connection to Network or Devices .
35
Network Connection Settings/Setup
Perform connection setup for the printer and computer/smartphone/tablet.
For more on setup procedure, see the web page.
Connecting with Wireless Direct
Connecting with Wireless Direct
Changing Network Settings
See below for changing connection settings for the printer and computer/smartphone/tablet.
• To change network connection method:
Switching Printer's Connection to Network or Devices
Changing the Connection Mode
• To add computer/smartphone/tablet to the printer:
Switching Printer's Connection to Network or Devices
Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
Wi-Fi Connection Assistant checks or diagnoses the settings of the printer and those of computer and restores the status of them if anything is wrong with network connection. Select either link below to download
Wi-Fi Connection Assistant.
Checking Printer Connection Status Using Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
• • Performing/Changing Network Settings (Windows)
For Windows, you can perform network settings using Wi-Fi Connection Assistant.
Wi-Fi Connection Assistant (Windows)
• • Diagnosing and Repairing Network Settings (Windows/macOS)
You can diagnose or repair network settings using Wi-Fi Connection Assistant.
◦ ◦ For Windows:
Wi-Fi Connection Assistant (Windows)
◦ ◦ For macOS:
Wi-Fi Connection Assistant (macOS)
Network Connection Tips
See below for tips on using the printer via network connection.
Network Connection Tips (Windows/macOS)
Handling Printer Configuration Using the Web Browser
Countermeasures against Unauthorized Access
Troubleshooting
for troubleshooting on network connection.
Notice/Restriction
See below for details.
• Restrictions on network settings:
36
• Notices when printing using web service:
Notice for Web Service Printing
37
Restrictions
When connecting another device while a device (such as a computer) is already connected to the printer, connect it using the same connection method as the connected device.
If you connect using a different connection method, the connection to the device in use will be disabled.
However, you can use a Wi-Fi connection and Wireless Direct at the same time.
For restrictions, see the following.
Connect via wireless router
• Make sure your device and the wireless router are connected. For details on checking these settings, see the manual supplied with the wireless router or contact its manufacturer.
As for a device already connected to the printer without using a wireless router, reconnect it via a wireless router.
• Configuration, router functions, setup procedures and security settings of wireless routers vary depending on the system environment. For details, see the manual for your wireless router or contact its manufacturer.
• Depending on your country or region, this printer does not support wireless networking standards using the 5 GHz band.
• If the current channel bandwidth setting on your device does not include 20 MHz, TKIP cannot be used for a security protocol. Change the setting to something that includes 20 MHz. For improved security, we recommend that you set to AES together with WPA2 or higher security.
The connection between your device and the wireless router will be temporarily disabled while the setting is changed. Do not proceed to the next screen of this guide until setup is complete.
• When connecting to Wi-Fi outdoors, do not connect to a 5 GHz network (SSID).
The 5 GHz band available for use with the printer includes the channels that are allowed for indoor use only, depending on your country or region.
For details on the 5 GHz network (SSID) of your wireless router, see the manual supplied with the wireless router, or contact its manufacturer.
• For office use, especially when connecting with IEEE802.1X/EAP (WPA/WPA2/WPA3 Enterprise), consult your network administrator.
• Note that if you connect to a network with no security protection, your personal information could be disclosed to a third party.
Wireless Direct
Important
• • If a device is connected to the Internet via a wireless router, and you then connect it to a printer in Wireless Direct mode, the existing connection between the device and wireless router will be disabled. In that case, the connection of the device may switch to a mobile data connection automatically depending on your device. When you connect to the Internet using a mobile data connection, charges may apply depending on your contract.
When you connect a device and the printer using Wireless Direct, the connection information will be saved to Wi-Fi settings. The device may be connected to the printer automatically even after disconnecting it or connecting it to another wireless router.
38
To prevent automatic connection to the printer in Wireless Direct mode, change the connection mode after using the printer, or set not to connect automatically in the Wi-Fi settings of the device.
For details on changing the settings of your device, see the manual supplied with the device or contact its manufacturer.
• If you connect a device and the printer using Wireless Direct, Internet connection may become unavailable depending on your environment. In that case, web services for the printer cannot be used.
• In Wireless Direct mode, you can connect up to five devices at the same time. If you try to connect a sixth device while five devices are already connected, an error will appear.
If an error appears, disconnect a device that does not use the printer, and then redo the settings.
• Devices connected to the printer using Wireless Direct cannot communicate with each other.
• When a device has been connected to the printer without using a wireless router and you want to set it up again using the same connection method, disconnect it first. Disable the connection between the device and printer in the Wi-Fi setting screen.
39
Network Connection Tips (Windows/macOS)
Detect Same Printer Name
Switching Printer's Connection to Network or Devices
Setting Up IEEE802.1X/EAP (WPA/WPA2/WPA3 Enterprise)
40
Detect Same Printer Name
When the printer is detected during setup, plural printers with the same name may appear on the results screen.
Select a printer with checking the printer settings against those on detection result screen.
• • For Windows:
Check the printer's MAC address or serial to select the correct printer from the results.
• • For macOS:
The printer names appear with the MAC address added at the end or as the printer name specified by
Bonjour.
Check identifiers such as the MAC address, the printer name specified by Bonjour, and the printer's serial number to select the printer from among those that appear.
Note
• Serial number may not appear on result screen.
To check the printer's MAC address and the serial number, print out the network settings information.
Note
• • Some models allow you to check the serial number on the LCD.
41
Switching Printer's Connection to Network or Devices
Check the following items when connecting a newly added computer to the LAN environment to the printer, changing the connection method from USB to LAN, or changing the wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) connection method.
Connects to Another Computer via LAN/Changes from USB to LAN Connection
Switching LAN Connection Method
Reconfiguration Method of Wi-Fi Connection
Connects to Another Computer via LAN/Changes from USB to LAN
Connection
To connect an additional computer to the printer via LAN, or to change from USB to LAN connection, refer to Setup Guide to setup.
Switching LAN Connection Method
If you want to switch the connection method to a USB connection when the printer is used with a LAN connection, refer to Setup Guide to setup.
Reconfiguration Method of Wi-Fi Connection
• • If you want to switch to Wireless Direct when using the printer with Wi-Fi connection:
Wireless Direct and wireless LAN connection (Wi-Fi) can be used together, but only at 2.4GHz.
Connecting with Wireless Direct
• • Switching to a Wi-Fi connection when using the printer Wireless Direct:
If you connect the printer to your computer or smartphone via a Wi-Fi router for the first time to print, or if you want to change the connection frequency between the printer and the Wi-Fi router, perform the setup.
◦ ◦ For Windows:
Refer to Setup Guide and redo setup.
◦ ◦ For macOS:
Refer to Setup Guide and redo setup.
42
Setting Up IEEE802.1X/EAP (WPA/WPA2/WPA3 Enterprise)
Overview
If you are using a switch/access point (authenticator) with IEEE802.1X/EAP, you can connect this printer to Wi-Fi.
Note
• • The information on this page is intended for network administrators.
Setup Flow
1.
Prepare the equipment.
2.
Configure settings for the authentication (Radius) server and authenticator.
Set up the authentication (Radius) server and authenticator in advance.
Note
(Authenticator), refer to the respective instruction manuals.
3.
Configure Remote UI.
Remote UI is used to configure printer security settings.
See below for an overview of Remote UI.
Configuration Changes / Display Printer Status Using Web Browser
This web page will guide you through the configuration using Wireless Direct.
Refer to the following to connect via Wireless Direct.
Connecting with Wireless Direct
Important that you can temporarily connect to the network in the respective mode.
• There is IEEE802.1X/EAP settings in the security item of the Remote UI menu.
4.
On Remote UI, select Security > IEEE802.1X/EAP settings .
5.
Select Authentication .
• Login name ( up to 96 characters )
43
The login name to connect to the authentication server.
Important
• If you select Verify Authentication Server Name , you must set the authentication server name.
• If you select Verify authentication server certificates , you must register the certificate authority (CA) certificate in advance.
6.
Select Authentication .
Select PEAP , EAP-TTLS or EAP-TLS .
7.
Set Authentication .
Set the data required for PEAP, EAP-TTLS, or EAP-TLS authentication.
You must have a certificate authority (CA) certificate registered to verify certificates sent from the authentication server (server certificates).
• PEAP:
Set the user name and password that will be used for client authentication.
Normally, select Verify authentication server certificates .
• EAP-TLS:
You must have a client authentication certificate registered.
Normally, select Verify authentication server certificates .
• EAP-TTLS:
Select MSCHAPv2 or PAP as the authentication protocol.
Set the user name and password that will be used for client authentication.
8.
Save your settings.
Select OK to save the IEEE802.1X/EAP settings.
9.
Register the certificate authority (CA) certificate.
Select CA certificate > Upload CA certificate and upload (register) the CA certificate (X.509 DER format).
A maximum of five certificates can be registered.
10.
Register key and certificate.
When EAP-TLS is selected:
Select Key and certificate settings > Upload key and certificate and upload (register) the client certificate (X.509 DER format).
44
Note
• If you choose PEAP or EAP-TTLS , you do not need to do this.
11.
Set up Weak encryption restriction .
Select Restrict .
12.
Set up Weak certificate restriction .
Select Restrict .
13.
Select Enable/disable IEEE802.1X/EAP to enable IEEE802.1X/EAP
Select OK and save the settings to enable IEEE802.1X/EAP.
Note
Note that the advanced IEEE802.1X/EAP settings are not available on the operation panel.
14.
Connect to IEEE802.1X/EAP switch (Authenticator) or IEEE802.1X/EAP access point.
When IEEE802.1X/EAP is enabled, it is possible to search for SSIDs of IEEE802.1X/EAP access points in Manual setup on the operation panel.
Select the SSID of the IEEE802.1X/EAP access point to connect.
If You Cannot Connect
If you are unable to connect to the IEEE802.1X/EAP switch (Authenticator) or access point, please redo the settings from step 3 above.
Important
• • Wireless Direct is disabled when you connect to an IEEE802.1X/EAP access point. When using the Remote UI, enable Wireless Direct from the operation panel settings and connect again using
Wireless Direct.
Note
• • Select Settings on HOME screen and select LAN settings > Wi-Fi > Advanced > IEEE802.1X/EAP settings > Latest authentication result to help troubleshoot.
turned on.
occurred. is displayed.
connect to the wireless router <Refer to manual> is displayed.
45
46
Wi-Fi Connection Assistant (Windows)
Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
Starting Up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
Diagnosing and Repairing Network Settings
Performing/Changing Network Settings
List of Models Which Does Not Support Diagnosis and Repair Function
List of Models Which Does Not Support IPv6 Configuration via USB Connection
Important
• Available functions and settings vary depending on your printer.
47
Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
Wi-Fi Connection Assistant allows you to diagnose or repair the network status, and to perform printer settings on network.
Use Wi-Fi Connection Assistant for:
• Searching printers on network and performing initial network setup for detected printers
• Performing initial network setup by connecting the printer and computer using a USB cable (Not available for some models)
• Changing printer network settings
• Diagnosing the settings of the printer and those of computer on which Wi-Fi Connection Assistant is installed if anything is wrong with connection. In addition, Wi-Fi Connection Assistant repairs the status of the printer and computer (Not available for some models).
Important
• • Depending on the printer you are using, an administrator password is already specified for the printer at the time of purchase. When you change the network settings, authentication by the administrator password is required.
For details:
Administrator Password
For improving security, we recommend to change the administrator password.
Change Administrator Password
• To use the printer over LAN, make sure you have the equipment necessary for the connection type, such as a wireless router or a LAN cable.
• When you install Wi-Fi Connection Assistant, disable block function of firewall.
• Do not change network settings using Wi-Fi Connection Assistant while printing is in progress.
48
Starting Up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
Start up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant as shown below.
In Windows 11, from ( Start button) on the taskbar, select All apps > Canon Utilities > Wi-Fi
Connection Assistant .
Note
• In Windows 10, select Start > ( All apps > ) > Canon Utilities > Wi-Fi Connection Assistant .
• In Windows 7, click Start and select All Programs , Canon Utilities , Wi-Fi Connection Assistant , and then Wi-Fi Connection Assistant .
When you start up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant, a message appears. Check the message and select Yes .
The screen below appears.
Select Diagnose and Repair or Printer Network Setup on the displayed screen.
• • If you select Diagnose and Repair :
Diagnosing and Repairing Network Settings
• • If you select Printer Network Setup :
Performing/Changing Network Settings
49
Diagnosing and Repairing Network Settings
Wi-Fi Connection Assistant diagnoses and repairs computer settings or connection between the computer and printer when a problem (e.g. cannot print from a printer on the network) occurs.
Important
• • Some models do not support diagnosis and repair function.
For details:
List of Models Which Does Not Support Diagnosis and Repair Function
Follow the procedure below.
1.
Start up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant.
2.
Check the displayed message and select Yes .
3.
Select Diagnose and Repair on the displayed screen.
Perform operations following the instructions on the screen.
Note
• This function checks the following items: whether the computer is connected to the router whether a web page on the Internet can be viewed whether the printer can be detected on the network whether the signal strength or communication level is sufficient (when using Wi-Fi) whether the printer port setting matches with the network setting
50
Performing/Changing Network Settings
Canon Wi-Fi Connection Assistant Screen
Performing Network Settings
51
Canon Wi-Fi Connection Assistant Screen
Items on Canon Wi-Fi Connection Assistant Screen
Menus on Canon Wi-Fi Connection Assistant Screen
Items on Canon Wi-Fi Connection Assistant Screen Toolbar
Items on Canon Wi-Fi Connection Assistant Screen
The screen below appears when you start up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant and select Printer Network
Setup . Detected printers are listed on the screen and the items below are shown.
A: Product Name
Displays the product name of detected printer. The icon below appears on the left if the printer cannot be used.
: Appears when the printer requires setup or has not been configured.
: Appears when the IP address is duplicated to another printer.
: Appears when you cannot communicate with the printer.
Note
• • If a printer you want to use is not detected, try to set the criteria for printer search.
Setting Criteria for Printer Search/Searching Specific Printer
• • Right-clicking a printer displays setting items or items to confirm.
B: Serial Number (Last 5 Digits)
Displays the last five digits of printer's serial number.
C: Status
Displays the printer status as shown below.
• • Available
Indicates the printer is available.
• • Setup Completed
52
Appears after performing network setup and clicking Set to close the window.
• • Requires Setup
Indicates the printer is required to perform Wi-Fi setup.
Performing/Changing Wi-Fi Settings
• • Not Set
Indicates the printer cannot be used on network, or IPv6 is disabled. Specify an IP address or enable IPv6 on Network Settings...
.
Performing/Changing Wi-Fi Settings
• • IP Address Overlap
Indicates the IP address is duplicated to another printer.
• • Unknown
Indicates the printer recognized as Available in the past cannot be used currently.
Note
• • If USB is selected from the pulldown menu on the toolbar, nothing is displayed.
D: IP Address
Displays the printer IP address. Nothing is displayed if the printer status is Requires Setup .
Note
• If USB is selected from the pulldown menu on the toolbar, "-" is displayed.
E: Location
Displays the printer location if it is registered. Nothing is displayed if the printer status is Requires
Setup .
Note
• If USB is selected from the pulldown menu on the toolbar, nothing is displayed.
F: Connection Method
Displays printer connection method (wired LAN, Wi-Fi, or USB).
Note
• If USB is selected from the pulldown menu on the toolbar, USB is displayed.
• If the printer supports both of the LAN connection methods, the printer is recognized as two printers and they are displayed separately. (The same numbers are displayed on Serial Number
(Last 5 Digits) .)
• If the printer does not support wired LAN, wired LAN is not displayed.
• If you are using Wi-Fi Connection Assistant on the computer which does not support Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi is not displayed.
G: Setting Method
Displays printer setting method.
• • Auto
53
Appears if the printer is used by IP address specified automatically.
• • Manual
Appears if the printer is used by IP address specified manually.
Note
• If USB is selected from the pulldown menu on the toolbar, "-" is displayed.
H: MAC Address
Displays the MAC address of the detected printer.
Note
• If USB is selected from the pulldown menu on the toolbar, "-" is displayed.
I: Device Name
Displays the printer device name if it is registered.
Note
• If USB is selected from the pulldown menu on the toolbar, nothing is displayed.
• The printer with Requires Setup displayed on Status is not displayed.
J: IPv6
On appears when an IPv6 address is assigned for the printer.
Note
• • If USB is selected from the pulldown menu on the toolbar, "-" is displayed.
K: Displays the printer status and operation guides.
Selecting a printer from the printer list displays its current status and what to do next.
Menus on Canon Wi-Fi Connection Assistant Screen
This section describes menus on Canon Wi-Fi Connection Assistant screen.
A: Printer Settings menu
Printer Settings Menu
B: View menu
View Menu
C: Option menu
Option Menu
54
D: Help menu
Help Menu
Items on Canon Wi-Fi Connection Assistant Screen Toolbar
This section describes items on Canon Wi-Fi Connection Assistant Screen toolbar.
A: Perform wired or Wi-Fi setup.
Note
• This item has the same function as Network Settings...
in the Printer Settings menu.
B: Redetects printers.
Note
• This item has the same function as Update in the View menu.
C: Stops detecting printers.
Note
• This item has the same function as Cancel in the View menu.
D: Switches the printer list. (IPv4, IPv6, or USB printers)
Note
• This item has the same function as Switch View in the View menu.
• You can also display the USB connected printer list. (Not available for some models.) In this case, select USB .
E: Displays this guide.
Note
• This item has the same function as Online Manual in the Help menu.
55
Performing Network Settings
Performing/Changing Wired LAN Connection (Ethernet Cable) Settings
Performing/Changing Wi-Fi Settings
Assigning Printer Information
56
Performing/Changing Wired LAN Connection (Ethernet Cable)
Settings
Follow the procedure below to perform/change wired LAN settings.
Note
• For some models, you can perform network setup for a USB connected printer using Wi-Fi Connection
Assistant. Select USB on Switch View under the View menu to display printers for which you can perform setup.
1.
Start up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant.
2.
Check the displayed message and select Yes .
3.
Select Printer Network Setup on the displayed screen.
Detected printers are listed.
4.
Select printer to perform/change settings from printer list.
Select the printer with Wired LAN displayed on Connection Method and Available displayed on Status to perform settings.
You can perform settings for a printer with Available not displayed on Status via USB connection.
To perform setup for a USB connected printer, select USB from the pulldown menu on the toolbar and select the printer to perform/change settings.
5.
Select Network Settings...
on Printer Settings menu.
The Confirm Printer Password screen appears.
For more on the password, refer to Administrator Password.
Note
• Clicking the icon allows you to perform/change settings.
• If you select a USB connected printer on step 4, the screen below appears after the Confirm
Printer Password screen appears
Select Wired LAN and click OK .
6.
Enter password and click OK .
The Network Settings screen appears.
57
7.
Perform/change settings.
You can switch the screen between IPv4 and IPv6. Click the tab to switch the protocol.
A: Use IPv4 address
Always selected. (displayed in a gray out state)
B: Get IP address automatically
Select this option to use an IP address automatically assigned by a DHCP server. DHCP server functionality must be enabled on your router.
C: Use next IP address
Select this option if no DHCP server functionality is available in your setup where you use the printer, or you want to use a fixed IP address.
Enter the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
Note on the printer you are using.
For details, see List of Models Which Does Not Support IPv6 Configuration via USB
58
A: Use IPv6 address
Select when you use the printer with IPv6 environment.
B: Use Stateless Address:
Select when you use an IP address assigned automatically. Use a router compatible with
IPv6.
Note
• This setting item is not available depending on the printer you are using.
C: Use Manual Address:
Select this option if no DHCP server functionality is available in your setup where you use the printer, or you want to use a fixed IP address.
Enter the IP address and IP address prefix length.
Note
• This setting item is not available depending on the printer you are using.
D: Use DHCPv6:
Select when you obtain an IP address using DHCPv6.
Note
• This setting item is not available depending on the printer you are using.
8.
Click Set .
59
Performing/Changing Wi-Fi Settings
Follow the procedure below to perform/change Wi-Fi settings.
Important
• Enable Easy wireless connect (Cableless setup) before performing printer setup. (Not required if you change the IP address.) For details, search for "NR049" on your printer's online manual and see the page shown.
• If you plan to use a printer over Wi-Fi, make sure you perform security settings for the Wi-Fi network.
Note
• For some models, you can perform network setup for a USB connected printer using Wi-Fi Connection
Assistant. Select USB on Switch View under the View menu to display printers.
1.
Start up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant.
2.
Check the displayed message and select Yes .
3.
Select Printer Network Setup on the displayed screen.
Detected printers are listed.
4.
Select printer to perform/change settings from printer list.
Select the printer with Wi-Fi displayed on Connection Method and Available or Requires Setup displayed on Status to perform settings.
You can perform settings for a printer with Available or Requires Setup not displayed on Status via
USB connection.
To perform setup for a USB connected printer, select USB from the pulldown menu on the toolbar and select the printer to perform/change settings.
5.
Select Network Settings...
on Printer Settings menu.
The Confirm Printer Password screen appears.
For more on the password, refer to Administrator Password.
Note
• Clicking the icon allows you to perform/change settings.
LAN, the screen below appears after the Confirm Printer Password screen appears
60
Select Wi-Fi and click OK .
6.
Enter password and click OK .
The Network Settings screen appears.
7.
Perform/change settings.
You can switch the screen between IPv4 and IPv6. Click the tab to switch the protocol.
A: Network Type:
Select the Wi-Fi mode.
◦ Infrastructure
Connects the printer to the Wi-Fi with a wireless router.
◦ Direct
Connects the printer to wireless communication devices (smartphone or tablet) without a wireless router.
Note
• If Wi-Fi is enabled on the computer and if you select a USB connected printer on step
4, you can select Direct depending on the printer you are using.
• If Direct is selected, all items are displayed in a gray out status and you cannot perform any settings.
In addition, you cannot connect to Internet from your computer depending on your operating environment.
B: Network Name (SSID):
The network name (SSID) of the Wi-Fi currently used is displayed.
61
The network name (SSID) for Wireless Direct appears while in Wireless Direct.
C: Search...
The Detected Wireless Routers screen is displayed to select a wireless router to connect to. For a wireless router already connected to the computer, Available is displayed on
Communication Status .
If you select a wireless router with Not Connected on Communication Status from the list, clicking Set displays the WPA/WPA2 or WEP setting screen for a wireless router.
If WEP Details Screen Appears
If WPA/WPA2 Details Screen Appears
D: Encryption Type:
Displays the encryption method used over the Wi-Fi.
Note
• The setting items below are available only when Infrastructure is selected for Network
Type: .
If Direct is selected, all items are displayed in a gray out status and you cannot perform any settings.
A: Use IPv4 address
Always selected. (displayed in a gray out state)
B: Get IP address automatically
Select this option to use an IP address automatically assigned by a DHCP server. DHCP server functionality must be enabled on your wireless router.
C: Use next IP address
Select this option if no DHCP server functionality is available in your setup where you use the printer, or you want to use a fixed IP address.
62
Enter the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
Note on the printer you are using.
For details, see List of Models Which Does Not Support IPv6 Configuration via USB
• The setting items below are available only when Infrastructure is selected for Network
Type: .
If Direct is selected, all items are displayed in a gray out status and you cannot perform any settings.
A: Use IPv6 address
Select when you use the printer with IPv6 environment.
B: Use Stateless Address:
Select when you use an IP address assigned automatically. Use a router compatible with
IPv6.
Note
• This setting item is not available depending on the printer you are using.
C: Use Manual Address:
Select this option if no DHCP server functionality is available in your setup where you use the printer, or you want to use a fixed IP address.
Enter the IP address and IP address prefix length.
Note
• This setting item is not available depending on the printer you are using.
63
D: Use DHCPv6:
Select when you obtain an IP address using DHCPv6.
Note
• This setting item is not available depending on the printer you are using.
8.
Click Set .
64
Assigning Printer Information
Follow the procedure below to assign/change printer location name or device name.
The names appear on Device Name: and Location: on the Canon Wi-Fi Connection Assistant screen.
Note
• If USB is selected from the pulldown menu on the toolbar, this setting item is not available.
1.
Start up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant.
2.
Check the displayed message and select Yes .
3.
Select Printer Network Setup on the displayed screen.
Detected printers are listed.
4.
Select printer to assign location name and device name.
Select the printer with Available displayed on Status .
5.
Select Detailed Printer Settings...
on Printer Settings menu.
The Confirm Printer Password screen appears.
For more on the password, refer to Administrator Password.
6.
Enter password and click OK .
The Detailed Printer Settings screen appears.
7.
Perform/change settings.
The setting items below are available.
A: Device Name:
Assigns the device name.
B: Location:
Assigns the location name.
8.
Click Set .
65
List of Models Which Does Not Support Diagnosis and Repair
Function
The following models does not support "Diagnose and Repair" function of Wi-Fi Connection Assistant.
• G4000 series
• PRO-500 series
• PRO-1000 series
• MB2100 series
• MB2700 series
• MB5100 series
• MB5400 series
• iB4100 series
• PRO-520
• PRO-540
• PRO-540S
• PRO-560
• PRO-560S
• PRO-2000
• PRO-4000
• PRO-4000S
• PRO-6000
• PRO-6000S
• TS9000 series
• TS8000 series
• TS6000 series
• TS5000 series
• MG3000 series
• E470 series
66
List of Models Which Does Not Support IPv6 Configuration via
USB Connection
For the following models, you can perform settings only for IPv4 using Wi-Fi Connection Assistant. (You cannot perform settings for IPv6.)
• iB4100 series
• MG3000 series
• E470 series
• G4000 series
• TS5000 series
• TS6000 series
• TS8000 series
• TS9000 series
• TR8500 series
• TR7500 series
• TS9100 series
• TS8100 series
• TS6100 series
• TS5100 series
• TS3100 series
• E3100 series
• TS300 series
• E300 series
• TR8580 series
• TS9180 series
• TS8180 series
• TS6180 series
• TR8530 series
• TR7530 series
• TS8130 series
• TS6130 series
• XK70 series
• XK50 series
• G4010 series
• G3010 series
• TR4500 series
• E4200 series
• TS6200 series
• TS6280 series
• TS6230 series
• TS8200 series
• XK80 series
• TS8280 series
• TS8230 series
• TS9500 series
• TS9580 series
67
• TR9530 series
• TS3300 series
• E3300 series
68
Wi-Fi Connection Assistant (macOS)
Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
Starting Up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
Diagnosing and Repairing Network Settings
List of Models Which Does Not Support Diagnosis and Repair Function
Important
• Available functions and settings vary depending on your printer.
69
Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
If anything is wrong with connection, Wi-Fi Connection Assistant diagnoses the settings of the printer and those of computer on which it is installed. In addition, Wi-Fi Connection Assistant restores the status of the printer and computer.
Important
• To use the printer over LAN, make sure you have the equipment necessary for the connection type, such as a wireless router or a LAN cable.
• When you install Wi-Fi Connection Assistant, disable block function of firewall.
70
Starting Up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
Start up Launchpad , select Canon Utilities , and then select Wi-Fi Connection Assistant.
When you start up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant, the screen below appears.
Enter the password specified for your computer and select Install Helper . Wi-Fi Connection Assistant starts diagnosis and repair of network.
Diagnosing and Repairing Network Settings
71
Diagnosing and Repairing Network Settings
Wi-Fi Connection Assistant diagnoses and repairs computer settings or connection between the computer and printer when a problem (e.g. cannot print from a printer on the network) occurs.
Important
• • Some models do not support diagnosis and repair function.
For details:
List of Models Which Does Not Support Diagnosis and Repair Function
Wi-Fi Connection Assistant starts checking the computer settings when it starts up. Perform operations following the instructions on the screen.
Note
• This function checks the following items: whether the computer is connected to the router whether the printer can be detected on the network whether the signal strength or communication level is sufficient (when using Wi-Fi) whether the printer port setting matches with the network setting
72
List of Models Which Does Not Support Diagnosis and Repair
Function
The following models does not support "Diagnose and Repair" function of Wi-Fi Connection Assistant.
• G4000 series
• PRO-500 series
• PRO-1000 series
• MB2100 series
• MB2700 series
• MB5100 series
• MB5400 series
• iB4000 series
• PRO-520
• PRO-540
• PRO-560
• PRO-540S
• PRO-560S
• PRO-2000
• PRO-4000
• PRO-6000
• PRO-4000S
• PRO-6000S
• TS9000 series
• TS8000 series
• TS6000 series
• TS5000 series
• MG3000 series
• E470 series
73
Handling Paper, Originals, Ink Tanks, etc.
Loading Paper
Loading Originals
Refilling Ink Tanks
74
Loading Paper
Paper Sources
Loading Photo Paper / Plain Paper in Rear Tray
Loading Plain Paper in Cassette
Loading Envelopes in Rear Tray
Loading Paperboard in Rear Flat Tray
75
Paper Sources
The printer has three paper sources for feeding paper, the rear tray, cassette, and rear flat tray. With the plain paper loaded in a cassette, you can also load paper on the rear tray or rear flat tray to make prints.
Rear tray
You can load all supported paper such as photo paper and plain paper on the rear tray.
Loading Photo Paper / Plain Paper in Rear Tray
Loading Envelopes in Rear Tray
76
Cassette
You can load A4, B5, A5, Letter-sized or Executive plain paper in the cassette.
Loading Plain Paper in Cassette
Rear Flat Tray
The rear flat tray is located at the rear of a printer.
You can load A4, B5, letter-sized paperboard in the cassette.
Loading Paperboard in Rear Flat Tray
Note
• • For details on paper that can be used in this printer:
77
• • Your model used may differ from a product series name when you gain access to this manual from a QR code. Select a product name from the link below when you want to refer to the manual of your model.
78
Loading Photo Paper / Plain Paper in Rear Tray
You can load photo paper or plain paper.
You can also load envelopes on the rear tray.
Loading Envelopes in Rear Tray
1.
Prepare paper.
Align the edges of paper. If paper is curled, flatten it.
Note cause paper jams.
paper becomes completely flat.
For more details on handling curled paper, see Check 3
in Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is
Scratched/Ink Blots/Paper Curl
.
time as it is. If you roll up this paper to flatten, this may cause cracks on the surface of the paper and reduce the print quality.
2.
Open the paper support (A).
3.
Slide right paper guide (B) to open both paper guides.
79
4.
Load paper stack in portrait orientation WITH THE PRINT SIDE FACING UP.
After loading the paper, the paper setting confirmation screen for the rear tray appears on the LCD.
Important cause paper jams.
Note long-length paper. Depending on the weight of the paper, the leading edge may rise and printing
80
may be shifted. Make sure that the leading edge of the paper does not rise, such as by holding the part that protrudes from the rear tray.
5.
Move the right paper guide and adjust the guides to both edges of the paper stack.
Do not slide the paper guides too tightly against the paper. The paper may not be fed properly.
Note
81
6.
If page size and media type on LCD match size and type of paper loaded in rear tray, select
OK .
If not, select Change to change the settings in accordance with the size and type of the loaded paper.
Note
• See Check paper replacement when you want to hide the screen for confirming the setting of
paper.
7.
Pull out a paper output tray (F).
82
Note
• • There are various types of paper, such as paper with a special surface coating for printing photos at optimal quality and paper suitable for documents. Each media type has specific preset settings (how ink is used and sprayed, distance from nozzles, etc.), that allow you to print to that type with optimal image quality. The wrong paper settings may cause poor printout color quality or scratches on the printed surface. If you notice blurring or uneven colors, increase the print quality setting and try printing again.
• • To prevent incorrect printing, this printer has a function that detects whether the settings for the paper loaded on the rear tray matches the paper settings. Before printing, make print settings in accordance with the paper settings. When this function is enabled, an error message is displayed if these settings do not match to prevent incorrect printing. When this error message is displayed, check and correct the paper settings.
• • When printing on long-length paper, support the output paper with your hands or use the printer in a place where the paper does not fall. If the paper falls, the printed side may become dirty or scratched.
Also, when supporting the paper with hands, be sure not to pull the paper forcefully while printing.
83
Loading Plain Paper in Cassette
You can load A4, B5, A5, Letter-sized or Executive plain paper in the cassette.
1.
Prepare paper.
Align the edges of paper. If paper is curled, flatten it.
Note cause paper jams.
paper becomes completely flat.
For more details on handling curled paper, see Check 3
in Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is
Scratched/Ink Blots/Paper Curl
.
2.
Pull out the cassette (A) from the printer.
3.
Slide paper guides (B) in front and (C) on right to open guides.
4.
Load paper stack in portrait orientation WITH THE PRINT SIDE FACING DOWN, and place it in center of cassette.
84
Important cause paper jams.
Note
If the paper stack is in contact with the protrusion (F), the paper may not be fed properly.
85
5.
Move the front paper guide and adjust the guide to edge of the paper stack.
Align paper guide with where it clicks into place.
6.
Move the right paper guide and adjust the guides to edges of the paper stack.
Do not slide the paper guide too tightly against the paper. The paper may not be fed properly.
Note
86
7.
Insert cassette into printer.
Push the cassette into the printer until it stops.
8.
Pull out a paper output tray (H).
87
Note
• • To prevent incorrect printing, this printer has a function that detects whether the settings for the paper loaded in the cassette matches the paper settings. Before printing, make print settings in accordance with the paper settings. When this function is enabled, an error message is displayed if these settings do not match to prevent incorrect printing. When this error message is displayed, check and correct the paper settings.
88
Loading Envelopes in Rear Tray
You can load envelopes on the rear tray.
The address is automatically rotated and printed according to the envelope's direction by specifying with the printer driver properly.
Important
• • Do not use the following envelopes. They could jam in the printer or cause the printer to malfunction.
Envelopes with an embossed or treated surface
Envelopes with a double flap
Envelopes whose gummed flaps are already moistened and adhesive
1.
Prepare envelopes.
direction.
The figures above show a side view of the leading edge of the envelope.
Important that no curl or puff exceeds 0.12 in. (3 mm).
2.
Open the paper support (A).
89
3.
Slide right paper guide (B) to open both paper guides.
4.
Load envelopes in portrait orientation WITH THE PRINT SIDE FACING UP.
Up to 10 envelopes can be loaded at once.
Fold flap of the envelope and load the envelope in portrait orientation with the address side facing up.
After loading the envelopes, the paper setting confirmation screen for the rear tray appears on the LCD.
5.
Move the right paper guide and adjust the guides to both edges of the envelopes.
Do not slide the paper guides too tightly against the envelopes. The envelopes may not be fed properly.
90
Note
6.
If page size and media type shown on LCD match size and type of envelopes loaded in rear tray, select OK .
If not, select Change to change the settings in accordance with the size and type of the loaded envelopes.
Note
• See Check paper replacement when you want to hide the screen for confirming the setting of
paper.
91
7.
Pull out a paper output tray (D).
Note
• • To prevent incorrect printing, this printer has a function that detects whether the settings for the paper loaded on the rear tray matches the paper settings. Before printing, make print settings in accordance with the paper settings. When this function is enabled, an error message is displayed if these settings do not match to prevent incorrect printing. When this error message is displayed, check and correct the paper settings.
92
Loading Paperboard in Rear Flat Tray
Load A4, B5, and letter-sized paperboard on the rear flat tray.
Note
• • See
Supported Media Types for the weight of paper that can be used in the rear flat tray.
1.
Prepare paper.
If paper is curled, flatten it.
Note paper becomes completely flat.
For more details on handling curled paper, see Check 3
in Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is
Scratched/Ink Blots/Paper Curl
.
2.
Open rear flat tray (A).
3.
Pull out the paper support (B) and slide the left paper guide (C).
4.
Load paper in portrait orientation on the tray WITH THE PRINT SIDE FACING UP.
93
Load only one sheet of paper, making sure that the front edge of the paper is still visible. Do not insert paper into the printer.
Important cause paper jams.
5.
Move the left paper guide and adjust the guides to both edges of the paper.
Do not slide the paper guides too tightly against the paper. The paper may not be fed properly.
6.
Push the paper into the printer until the line (F) on the paper support is visible.
94
Note
7.
Pull out a paper output tray (G).
95
Loading Originals
Loading Originals on Platen
Loading Based on Use
Supported Originals
How to Detach / Attach the Document Cover
96
Loading Originals on Platen
1.
Open the document cover (A).
2.
Load original WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING DOWN on platen.
Important following may cause the scanner to malfunction or the platen glass to break.
Do not place any objects weighing 4.4 lb (2.0 kg) or more on the platen glass.
Do not put any pressure of 4.4 lb (2.0 kg) or more on the platen glass, such as pressing down the original.
97
3.
Close the document cover gently.
Important
• • After loading the original on the platen, be sure to close the document cover before starting to copy or scan.
98
Loading Based on Use
Load the original in the correct position according to the function to use. If you do not load the original correctly, it may not be scanned properly.
Originals Function
Magazines, Newspapers, and Documents
Copying
Scanning by specifying a standard size (A4, Letter, etc.)
If you scan using the operation panel, select Document or Photo for document type in Scan and specify a standard size (A4, Letter, etc.) for Scan size to scan originals.
Photos, Postcards, Business Cards, and Disc (BD/DVD/CD)
Scanning only one original
If you scan using the operation panel, follow the operation below.
• Select Photo for document type in
Scan and specify Auto scan for
Scan size to scan originals.
Scanning two or more originals
If you scan using the operation panel, follow the operation below.
• Select Photo for document type in
Scan and specify Auto multi scan for Scan size to scan two or more originals.
How to Load
Loading the Original to Be Aligned with the alignment mark
Loading Only One Original in Center of Platen
Loading Two or More Originals on
Loading the Original to Be Aligned with the alignment mark
Place the original WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING DOWN on the platen and align it with the alignment mark . Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.
Important
• • The printer cannot scan the striped area (A) (0.04 in. (1 mm) from the edges of the platen glass).
99
Loading Only One Original in Center of Platen
Place the original WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING DOWN, with 0.40 in. (1 cm) or more space between the edges (diagonally striped area) of the platen. Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.
Loading Two or More Originals on Platen
Place the originals WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING DOWN. Allow 0.40 in. (1 cm) or more space between the edges (diagonally striped area) of the platen and the originals, and between the originals.
Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.
You can place up to 12 items.
B: More than 0.40 in. (1 cm)
100
Note
• • The Skew Correction function automatically compensates for the originals placed at an angle of up to approximately 10 degrees. Slanted photos with a long edge of 7.1 in. (180 mm) or more cannot be corrected.
• • Non-rectangular or irregular shaped photos (such as cut out photos) may not be scanned properly.
101
Supported Originals
Types of originals
Item Details
Text document, magazine, or newspaper
Printed photo, postcard, business card, or disc (BD/DVD/CD, etc.)
Size (width x height) Max. 8.5 x 11.7 in. (216 x 297 mm)
Note
• • When loading a thick original such as a book on the platen, you can load it by removing the document cover from the printer.
How to Detach / Attach the Document Cover
102
How to Detach / Attach the Document Cover
Detaching the document cover:
Hold up the document cover in portrait orientation and then tip it back.
Attaching the document cover:
Fit both hinges (A) of the document cover into the holder (B) and insert both hinges of the document cover vertically.
103
104
Refilling Ink Tanks
Refilling Ink Tanks
Checking Ink Level
Ink Tips
105
Refilling Ink Tanks
When remaining ink cautions or errors occur, the message will appear on the LCD to inform you of the error.
In this state, the printer cannot print. Check the remaining ink level with the ink tank indicator on the front of the printer. If the ink level is near the lower limit line (A), refill the ink tank.
Note
•
.
•
• For precautionary notes on handling ink bottles, see Notes on ink bottles
.
Refilling Procedure
When you refill ink tanks, follow the steps below.
Important
• • Please ensure the printer remains flat after initial setup and is NOT turned upside down or on its side, as ink in the printer may leak.
1.
Check that printer is turned on.
2.
Open the scanning unit / cover (B).
106
Important
3.
Open the tank cap (C) of the ink tank to be refilled.
D: Yellow
E: Magenta
F: Cyan
G: Black
Important opening it.
4.
Hold the ink bottle upright and gently twist the bottle cap (H) to remove.
Important
107
5.
Refill the ink tank.
Aligning the ink bottle's tip with the ink tank's inlet (I), slowly stand the bottle upside down, and push the bottle into the inlet.
The ink tank is refilled. Support the bottle with your hand so that it does not fall.
Important
6.
Once ink reaches the upper limit line, remove the ink bottle from the inlet.
Hold up the ink bottle slightly and remove the bottle from the inlet while slowly tilting it.
Important
108
7.
Close the tank cap of the ink tank.
Make sure the tank cap is completely inserted.
8.
Close the scanning unit / cover.
To close the scanning unit / cover, lift it up slightly and then lower it gently.
Notes on ink bottles
Important
• • Keep out of reach of children.
• • Do not drink ink.
109
• • If ink is accidentally licked or swallowed, rinse out your mouth or drink one or two glasses of water and obtain medical advice immediately. If ink gets into your eyes, flush them with water right away, and obtain medical advice immediately.
• • If ink gets on your skin, wash the area with soap and water immediately. If irritation to your skin persists, obtain medical advice immediately.
• • When you store ink bottles, close bottle caps completely and place bottles in standing position. If the ink bottles are laid down, ink may leak.
• • When refilling ink tanks, take sufficient care to prevent ink from spattering onto surroundings.
• • Ink may stain clothes or other belongings permanently. Washing may not remove ink stains.
• • Do not use ink bottles and ink contained therein except to refill tanks of printers specified by Canon.
• • Do not leave ink bottles in areas exposed to high temperature, such as near fire or a heater or in a car. Bottles may warp and cause ink leakage or ink may become poor quality.
• • Do not subject ink bottles to impacts. Ink bottles may be damaged or bottle caps may come off by such impact, and ink may leak.
• • Do not transfer ink to other containers. This may result in accidental ingestion, inappropriate use, or poor ink quality.
• • Do not mix ink with water or other ink. This may damage the printer.
• • Once an ink bottle has been opened, do not leave it with bottle cap off. Ink will dry out, possibly preventing proper operation of the printer when an ink tank is refilled using this bottle.
• • To obtain optimum print quality, we recommend to refill the ink tank with ink up to the upper limit line at least once a year.
Note
• • Color ink may be consumed even when printing a black-and-white document or when black-andwhite printing is specified. Every ink is also consumed in the standard cleaning and deep cleaning of the print head, which may be necessary to maintain the performance of the printer.
When ink runs low, promptly refill it.
110
Checking Ink Level
Check ink level with the ink tank indicator on the front of the printer.
When ink reaches the upper limit line (A), ink is full.
When ink is near the lower limit line (B), ink is running low. Refill the ink tank.
Note
• • To check the remaining ink level, visually inspect the remaining ink in the ink tank.
Note
• • If a remaining ink error occurs, the error message appears on the LCD.
• • To ensure you receive premium print quality and to help protect your print head, a certain amount of ink remains in the ink tank when the printer indicates to refill the ink tank. The estimated page yields of the ink bottle do not include this amount.
• • Ink flows from the ink tanks to the inside of the printer. Ink may seem to run out fast due to this procedure when you start using the printer or after transporting it.
111
Ink Tips
How is ink used for various purposes other than printing?
Ink may be used for purposes other than printing.
During initial setup, some of the ink from the bundled ink bottles is used to fill the print head's nozzles to ensure the printer is print-ready.
Therefore, the page yield of the initial bundled set of ink bottles is lower than that of the subsequent sets of bottles.
To keep printer's performance, Canon printer performs cleaning automatically according to its condition.
When the printer performs cleaning, a small amount of ink is consumed. In this case, all colors of ink may be consumed.
[Cleaning function]
The cleaning function helps the printer to suck air bubbles or ink itself from the nozzle and thus prevents print quality degradation or nozzle clogging.
Important
• • The used ink is ejected into the maintenance cartridge. When the maintenance cartridge becomes full, replacement is necessary. If a message is displayed indicating that the maintenance cartridge is nearly full, replace the maintenance cartridge as soon as possible.
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
Does black-and-white printing use color ink?
Black-and-white printing may use ink other than black ink depending on the type of printing paper or the settings of the printer driver. So, color ink is consumed even when printing in black-and-white.
Similarly, color inks are also consumed along with black ink during print head cleaning when Black is specified for cleaning.
112
If Printing Is Faint or Uneven
Maintenance Procedure
Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern
Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern
Cleaning the Print Head
Deep Print Head Cleaning
Aligning the Print Head
Aligning the Print Head Manually
113
Maintenance Procedure
If print results are blurred, colors are not printed correctly, or print results are unsatisfactory (e.g. misaligned printed ruled lines), perform the maintenance procedure below.
Important
• • Do not rinse or wipe the print head. This can cause trouble with the print head.
Note
• • Check if ink remains in the ink tanks.
• • For Windows, increasing the print quality in the printer driver settings may improve the print result.
Set Media Type, Quality, etc. (Media/Quality Tab)
When the Print Results Are Blurred or Uneven:
Step 1
Print the nozzle check pattern.
From the printer
Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern
From the computer
Printing a Nozzle Check Pattern
Printing a Nozzle Check Pattern
Step 2
Examine the nozzle check pattern
.
If there are missing lines or horizontal streaks in the pattern:
Step 3
Clean the print head.
From the printer
From the computer
Cleaning the Print Heads
After cleaning the print head, print and examine the nozzle check pattern: Step 1
114
If the problem is not resolved after performing from step 1 to step 3 twice:
Step 4
Clean the print head deeply.
From the printer
From the computer
Cleaning the Print Heads
After deep print head cleaning, print and examine the nozzle check pattern: Step 1
When you have performed the procedure until step 4 and the problem has not been resolved, turn off the power and clean the print head deeply again after 24 hours.
If the problem is still not resolved, replace ink in print head.
Important consume ink, so replace ink in print head only when necessary.
Replace Ink in Print Head
If the symptom still persists, the print head may be defective. Contact Canon to request a repair.
When the Print Results Are Not Even such as the Ruled Lines Are
Misaligned:
Step
Align the print head.
From the printer
From the computer
Adjusting Print Head Position Automatically
115
Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern
Print the nozzle check pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzle.
Note
•
whose ink is low.
You need to prepare: a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper
1.
Check that printer is turned on.
2.
Load a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper in the cassette.
Loading Plain Paper in Cassette
3.
Select Maintenance on HOME screen.
4.
Select Nozzle Check .
The confirmation screen will appear.
5.
Select Yes .
6.
Press the OK button.
The nozzle check pattern will be printed and the confirmation screen will appear on the LCD.
7.
Select Next .
8.
Examine the nozzle check pattern
.
116
Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern
Examine the nozzle check pattern, and clean the print head if necessary.
1.
Check if there are missing lines in the pattern C or horizontal streaks in the pattern D.
A: No missing lines/No horizontal streaks
B: Lines are missing/Horizontal streaks are present
2.
Select the pattern that is closer to the printed nozzle check pattern on the confirmation screen.
117
For A (no missing lines or no horizontal streaks) in both the pattern C and pattern D:
The cleaning is not required. Select All A , confirm the message, then select OK .
The screen will return to the maintenance screen.
For B (lines are missing or horizontal streaks are present) in the pattern C or pattern D, or in both patterns:
The cleaning is required. Select Also B , then select Yes on the cleaning confirmation screen.
The printer starts cleaning the print head.
If the pattern C or any color in the pattern D is not printed:
(Example: Magenta pattern is not printed)
The cleaning is required. Select Also B , then select Yes on the cleaning confirmation screen.
The printer starts cleaning the print head.
118
Cleaning the Print Head
Clean the print head if lines are missing or if horizontal streaks are present in the printed nozzle check pattern. Cleaning unclogs the nozzles and restores the print head condition. Cleaning the print head consumes ink, so clean the print head only when necessary.
Important
• • When performing the print head cleaning, check the free space in the maintenance cartridge. If there
space in the maintenance cartridge, a message is displayed and the cleaning cannot be performed.
You need to prepare: a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper
1.
Check that printer is turned on.
2.
Load a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper in the cassette.
Loading Plain Paper in Cassette
3.
Select Maintenance on HOME screen.
4.
Select Cleaning .
The confirmation screen will appear.
5.
Select Yes .
The printer starts cleaning the print head.
Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the cleaning of the print head. This takes about 2 minutes.
The pattern print confirmation screen will appear.
6.
Select Yes .
7.
Press the OK button.
The nozzle check pattern will be printed.
8.
Select Next .
119
9.
Examine the nozzle check pattern
.
Note
•
• If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the print head twice, clean the print head deeply
.
120
Deep Print Head Cleaning
If print quality does not improve by the standard cleaning of the print head, clean the print head deeply.
Cleaning the print head deeply consumes more ink than the standard cleaning of the print head, so clean the print head deeply only when necessary.
Important
• • When performing the print head deep cleaning, check the free space in the maintenance cartridge. If there is not enough free space,
replace with the new maintenance cartridge
. In the case of shortage of free space in the maintenance cartridge, a message is displayed and the cleaning cannot be performed.
You need to prepare: a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper
1.
Check that printer is turned on.
2.
Load a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper in the cassette.
Loading Plain Paper in Cassette
3.
Select Maintenance on HOME screen.
4.
Select Deep Cleaning .
The confirmation screen will appear.
5.
Select Yes .
The printer starts cleaning the print head deeply.
Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the deep cleaning of the print head. This takes about 3 to 4 minutes.
The pattern print confirmation screen will appear.
6.
Select Yes .
7.
Press the OK button.
The nozzle check pattern will be printed.
8.
When the completion message appears, select OK .
121
9.
Examine the nozzle check pattern
.
If the problem is not resolved, turn off the power and clean the print head deeply again after 24 hours.
122
Aligning the Print Head
If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory, adjust the print head position.
Note
• • If the remaining ink level is low, the print head alignment sheet will not be printed correctly.
If the remaining ink level is low, refill ink tanks
.
• • If ink runs out as the print head alignment sheet is printed, an error message appears on the LCD.
You need to prepare: a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper
1.
Check that printer is turned on.
2.
Load a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper in cassette.
Loading Plain Paper in Cassette
3.
Select Maintenance on HOME screen.
4.
Select Print Head Alignment - Auto .
The confirmation screen will appear.
Note
• To print and check the current head position adjustment values, select Print the head alignment value .
5.
Select Yes .
6.
Press the OK button.
The print head alignment sheet is printed, and the print head is aligned automatically.
This takes about 1 to 2 minutes.
Note
123
7.
When the completion message appears, select OK .
Note
• • If the print results are still not satisfactory after adjusting the print head position as described above,
adjust the print head position manually .
For Windows:
You can also align the print head manually from a computer.
Adjusting Print Head Position Manually
124
Aligning the Print Head Manually
Try aligning the print head manually after automatic print head alignment if printing results are not as expected, as when printed ruled lines are misaligned.
You need to prepare: two sheets of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper
1.
Check that printer is turned on.
2.
Load two sheets of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper in cassette.
Loading Plain Paper in Cassette
3.
Select Maintenance on HOME screen.
4.
Select Print Head Alignment - Manual .
The confirmation screen will appear.
Note
• To print and check the current head position alignment values, select Print the head alignment value .
5.
Select Yes .
6.
Press the OK button.
The print head alignment pattern will be printed.
7.
When Did the patterns print correctly?
appears, make sure pattern was printed correctly, and if so, select Yes .
8.
Select OK .
The input screen for head position alignment values is displayed.
125
9.
Examine the first print head position adjustment pattern, select the number of a pattern in which stripes are least noticeable in column A, and press the OK button.
Note
Subtle vertical stripes
Noticeable vertical stripes
Subtle horizontal stripes
126
Noticeable horizontal stripes
10.
Repeat these steps until you have finished entering pattern numbers for columns B to N.
11.
Check message and press the OK button.
The second set of patterns is printed.
12.
Examine the second print head position adjustment pattern, select the number of a pattern in which stripes are least noticeable in column O, and press the OK button.
13.
Repeat these steps until you have finished entering pattern numbers for columns P to U.
14.
When completion message appears, select OK .
127
Performing Maintenance Functions from Your Computer
(macOS)
Opening Remote UI for Maintenance
Cleaning the Print Heads
Adjusting Print Head Position
128
Opening Remote UI for Maintenance
You can perform maintenance of printer and change the settings from a Remote UI.
The following is the procedure to open a Remote UI.
1.
Open System Preferences , and select Printers & Scanners
2.
Select your model from the printer list, and click Options & Supplies...
3.
Click Show Printer Webpage...
in General tab
Remote UI starts.
Note
• The password may have to be entered after Remote UI starts. In such a case, enter the password and click OK . In case you do not know the password, see "Passwords and cookies."
Related Topics
Printing a Nozzle Check Pattern
Changing the Printer Operation Mode
Reducing the Printer Noise
129
Cleaning the Print Heads
The print head Cleaning and Deep Cleaning functions allow you to clear up clogged print head nozzles.
Perform print head Cleaning if printing results are not satisfactory or if a specific color fails to print, even though there is enough ink.
Before performing any operation, confirm that the maintenance cartridge has enough available space
.
Cleaning
1.
Select Utilities
Remote UI
2.
Click Cleaning
Before performing Cleaning, check that the printer power is on.
Check the following. Then, if necessary, perform Cleaning.
•
3.
Perform Cleaning
Click Yes .
Print head Cleaning starts.
4.
Complete Cleaning
Next, the message for Nozzle Check pattern printing is displayed.
5.
Check the results
To check whether the print quality has improved, click Yes . To cancel the check process, click No .
If cleaning the head once does not resolve the print head problem, clean it once more.
Important
• Cleaning consumes a small amount of ink.
Cleaning the print head frequently will rapidly deplete your printer's ink supply. Perform Cleaning only when necessary.
Deep Cleaning
Deep Cleaning is more thorough than Cleaning. Perform Deep Cleaning when two Cleaning attempts do not resolve the print head problem.
1.
Select Utilities
Remote UI
2.
Click Deep Cleaning
Before performing Deep Cleaning, check that the printer power is on.
Check the following. Then, if necessary, perform Deep Cleaning.
130
•
3.
Perform Deep Cleaning
Click Yes .
Print head Deep Cleaning starts.
4.
Complete Deep Cleaning
Next, the message for Nozzle Check pattern printing is displayed.
5.
Check the results
To check whether the print quality has improved, click Yes . To cancel the check process, click No .
Important
• Deep Cleaning consumes a larger amount of ink than Cleaning .
Cleaning the print head frequently will rapidly deplete your printer's ink supply. Perform Deep
Cleaning only when necessary.
Related Topic
Printing a Nozzle Check Pattern
131
Adjusting Print Head Position
Any error in the print head installation position can cause color and line shifts. Adjusting the print head position improves print results.
Print Head Alignment - Auto
1.
Select Utilities
Remote UI
2.
Click Print Head Alignment - Auto
A message appears.
3.
Load paper in printer
Load one sheet of A4 size or Letter size plain paper into the cassette.
4.
Run head position adjustment
Check that the printer power is on, and then click Yes .
Head alignment starts. Proceed with the operations in accordance with the messages on the screen.
Important
• Do not open the scanning unit / cover while printing is in progress; otherwise, printing will stop.
Note
• You can print and check the current settings by clicking on Print the head alignment value .
132
Cleaning
Cleaning Exterior Surfaces
Cleaning Platen and Document Cover
Cleaning Paper Feed Rollers
Cleaning Inside the Printer (Bottom Plate Cleaning)
Cleaning Cassette Pads
133
Cleaning Paper Feed Rollers
If a paper feed roller is dirty or paper powder is attached to it, paper may not be fed properly. In this case, perform Roller Cleaning. Cleaning will cause wear on rollers, so perform this only when necessary.
You need to prepare: three sheets of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper
1.
Check that printer is turned on.
2.
Select Maintenance on HOME screen.
3.
Select Roller cleaning .
The confirmation screen will appear.
4.
Select Yes .
5.
Select the paper source to use for cleaning.
6.
Follow the message to remove any paper from the paper source.
If you clean the paper feed roller of cassette, remove any paper from the cassette, then push it back.
7.
Press the OK button.
The paper feed rollers will rotate as they are cleaned without paper.
8.
Make sure that the paper feed roller has stopped rotating, then follow the message to load the three sheets of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper in the paper feed point where the paper feed roller is being cleaned.
Loading Photo Paper / Plain Paper in Rear Tray
Loading Plain Paper in Cassette
9.
Press the OK button.
The printer starts cleaning. The cleaning will be complete when the paper is ejected.
10.
When the completion message appears, select OK .
If the problem is still not resolved with the operation described above, follow the operation below.
134
well wrung out damp cloth.
Do not touch the roller with your fingers. Paper feeding performance may be degraded.
If the problem is not resolved after cleaning, contact Canon to request a repair.
135
Cleaning Inside the Printer (Bottom Plate Cleaning)
Remove stains from the inside of the printer. If the inside of the printer becomes dirty, printed paper may get dirty, so we recommend performing cleaning regularly.
You need to prepare: a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper*
* Be sure to use a new piece of paper.
1.
Check that printer is turned on.
2.
Select Maintenance on HOME screen.
3.
Select Bottom plate cleaning .
The confirmation screen will appear.
4.
Select Yes .
5.
Follow the message to remove any paper from the rear tray, then press the OK button.
6.
Fold a single sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper in half widthwise, unfold the paper, then press the OK button.
7.
Load only this sheet of paper on the rear tray with the open side facing you.
136
8.
Pull out a paper output tray (A).
9.
Press the OK button.
The paper cleans the inside of the printer as it feeds through the printer.
Check the folded parts of the ejected paper. If they are smudged with ink, perform Bottom Plate Cleaning again.
10.
When the completion message appears, select OK .
Note
If the problem is not resolved after performing cleaning again, the protrusions inside the printer may be stained. Wipe off any ink from the protrusions using a cotton swab or the like.
137
Important
• • Be sure to turn off the power and unplug the power cord before cleaning the printer.
138
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
In case of cautions or errors concerning the maintenance cartridge, an error message will appear on the
LCD to inform you of the error. Take appropriate action as prompted by the message.
Important
• • If a message is displayed indicating that the maintenance cartridge is nearly full, replace the maintenance cartridge as soon as possible. If the maintenance cartridge becomes full, an error message is displayed and the printer stops working until the cartridge is replaced with a new one.
• • Do not touch the terminal (A) of the maintenance cartridge.
• • Do not turn off the printer during replacement of the maintenance cartridge.
Note
• • Use a maintenance cartridge with the model number below.
Maintenance Cartridge MC-G03
1.
Prepare a new maintenance cartridge.
Remove the maintenance cartridge and the attached plastic bag from the package.
2.
Open the scanning unit / cover (B).
Check the position of the maintenance cartridge (C).
139
Important
3.
Slide the maintenance cartridge until the with the mark on the printer.
mark on the maintenance cartridge is aligned
4.
Lift the maintenance cartridge and remove it.
Important
Do not place the removed maintenance cartridge on a desk or other surface, as there may be ink on the bottom of the cartridge.
140
and seal the bag by tying the opening tightly to prevent the ink from leaking.
5.
Insert a new maintenance cartridge.
6.
Slide the maintenance cartridge until the with the mark on the printer.
mark on the maintenance cartridge is aligned
7.
Close the scanning unit / cover.
To close the scanning unit / cover, lift it up slightly and then lower it gently.
141
142
Checking Maintenance Cartridge Status on LCD
1.
Check that printer is turned on.
2.
Select Printer details on HOME screen.
3.
Select M'ntenance cart info .
A symbol appears in the area A if there is any information about the used space of the maintenance cartridge.
The maintenance cartridge is almost full. Replace the maintenance cartridge as soon as possible.
Note
• • The above screen shows estimated used space.
• • To replace the maintenance cartridge, select Replace .
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
• • You can check the model number of a maintenance cartridge if you select View model no.
.
143
Overview
Safety
Handling Precautions
Canceling Print Jobs
Legal Restrictions on Scanning/Copying
When Repairing, Lending, or Disposing of the Printer
Main Components and Their Use
Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols
Changing Settings
Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer (Windows)
Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer (macOS)
Changing Settings from Operation Panel
Specifications
144
Safety
Safety Precautions
Regulatory Information
WEEE
145
Safety Precautions
Safety Precautions
• • This manual contains important notices and safety precautions about your printer.
Do not use the printer in ways other than described in the accompanying manuals, as this may result in fire, electric shock or other unexpected accidents.
Safety standard marks and declarations are only valid for the supported voltages and frequencies in the applicable countries or regions.
Warning
• • Users with cardiac pacemakers:
This product emits a low-level magnetic flux. If you feel abnormalities, please move away from the product and consult your doctor.
• • Do not use the printer in the following cases:
Stop use immediately, unplug the printer and call your local service representative to request repair.
Metal objects or liquids are spilt inside the printer.
The printer emits smoke, strange odors, or makes unusual noises.
The power cord or plug overheat or are broken, bent or damaged in any way.
• Failure to adhere to the following may result in fire, electric shock, or injury:
Do not place product close to the flammable solvents such as alcohol or thinner.
Do not open or modify the printer.
Use only the power cord/cables that came with your printer. Do not use these cables with other devices.
Do not plug in to voltages or frequencies other than those specified.
Plug the power cord into the socket completely.
Do not plug in or unplug the power cord with wet hands.
Do not damage the power cord or other cables by twisting, bundling, tying, pulling or excessively bending them.
Do not place heavy objects on the power cord.
Do not connect multiple power cords to a single electrical outlet. Do not use multiple extension cords.
Do not leave the printer plugged in during lightning storms.
Always unplug the power cord and cables when cleaning. Do not use flammable sprays or liquids such as alcohol or thinners for cleaning.
Unplug the power cord once a month to check that it is not overheating, rusted, bent, scratched, split, or otherwise damaged.
Caution
• Do not put your hands inside the printer while printing.
• Do not touch the metal parts of the print head immediately after printing.
• Do not touch moving parts indicated by the sticker shown here. Some models may not have these parts.
146
Moving parts
Keep body parts away from moving parts. Keep body parts out of the motion path.
• Ink bottles
Keep out of reach of children.
Do not drink ink.
If ink is accidentally licked or swallowed, rinse out your mouth or drink one or two glasses of water and obtain medical advice immediately.
If ink gets into your eyes, flush them with water right away, and obtain medical advice immediately.
If ink gets on your skin, wash the area with soap and water immediately. If irritation to your skin persists, obtain medical advice immediately.
When you store ink bottles, close bottle caps completely and place bottles in standing position. If the ink bottles are laid down, ink may leak.
When refilling ink tanks, take sufficient care to prevent ink from spattering onto surroundings.
Ink may stain clothes or other belongings permanently. Washing may not remove ink stains.
Do not leave ink bottles in areas exposed to high temperature, such as near fire or a heater or in a car. Bottles may warp and cause ink leakage or ink may become poor quality.
Do not subject ink bottles to impacts. Ink bottles may be damaged or bottle caps may come off by such impact, and ink may leak.
Do not transfer ink to other containers. This may result in accidental ingestion, inappropriate use, or poor ink quality.
• Moving the printer
Hold the printer by its sides and carry it with both hands.
147
General Notices
Choosing a Location
Refer to "
" in the Online manual for details on operating environment.
• Do not install the printer in a location that is unstable or subject to excessive vibration.
• Do not install the printer in locations that get very hot (direct sunlight, or close to a heating source), very humid or dusty locations, or outdoors.
• Do not place the printer on a thick rug or carpet.
• Do not place the printer flush against a wall.
Power Supply
• Keep the area around the power outlet clear at all times so you can easily unplug the power cord if necessary.
• Never remove the plug by pulling on the cord.
General Notices
• Do not tilt the printer, stand it on end, or turn it upside down. This may cause ink to leak.
• Do not place anything on top of the printer. Be especially careful to avoid metal objects such as paper clips and staples, and containers holding flammable liquids such as alcohol or thinner.
• Be sure to observe the following when loading the original on the platen. Failure to observe the following may cause the scanner to malfunction or the platen glass to break.
◦ Do not place any objects weighing 4.4 lb (2.0 kg) or more on the platen glass.
◦ Do not put any pressure of 4.4 lb (2.0 kg) or more on the platen glass, such as pressing down the original.
• Modifying or dismantling the print head or ink bottles, such as by putting holes in them, could cause the ink to leak out and cause a malfunction. We recommend that you do not modify or dismantle them.
148
• Do not put the print head or ink bottles into a fire.
149
Regulatory Information
Users in the U.S.A.
FCC Notice (U.S.A. Only)
For 120V, 60Hz model
Model Number: K10553 (Contains FCC Approved WLAN Module K30387)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Use of a shielded cable is required to comply with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate equipment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
The equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits for at uncontrolled equipment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance at least 20cm between the radiator and persons body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles) and must not be colocated or operated with any other antenna or transmitter.
Canon U.S.A., Inc.
One Canon Park
Melville, New York 11747
1-800-652-2666
150
Interference
Do not use the printer around medical equipment or other electronic devices. Signals from the printer may interfere with the correct operation of these devices.
151
WEEE
Only for the United Kingdom
These symbols indicate that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the UK Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Regulations and the UK Batteries and Accumulators
Regulations. If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, in accordance with the
UK Batteries and Accumulators Regulations, this indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd =
Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a concentration above an applicable threshold specified in the UK Batteries and Accumulators Regulations. This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources. For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, waste authority, approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit www.canoneurope.com/sustainability/approach/.
Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)
These symbols indicate that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the WEEE Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation implementing those Directives. If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive, this indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd =
Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a concentration above an applicable threshold specified in the Battery Directive. This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE.
Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources. For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, waste authority, approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit www.canoneurope.com/weee, or www.canon-europe.com/battery.
152
Nur für Europäische Union und EWR (Norwegen, Island und
Liechtenstein)
Diese Symbole weisen darauf hin, dass dieses Produkt gemäß WEEE-Richtlinie (2012/19/EU; Richtlinie
über Elektro- und Elektronik-Altgeräte), Batterien-Richtlinie (2006/66/EG) und nationalen Gesetzen zur Umsetzung dieser Richtlinien nicht über den Hausmüll entsorgt werden darf. Falls sich unter dem oben abgebildeten Symbol ein chemisches Symbol befindet, bedeutet dies gemäß der Batterien-
Richtlinie, dass in dieser Batterie oder diesem Akkumulator ein Schwermetall (Hg = Quecksilber, Cd =
Cadmium, Pb = Blei) in einer Konzentration vorhanden ist, die über einem in der Batterien-Richtlinie angegebenen Grenzwert liegt. Dieses Produkt muss bei einer dafür vorgesehenen Sammelstelle abgegeben werden. Dies kann z. B. durch Rückgabe beim Kauf eines neuen ähnlichen Produkts oder durch Abgabe bei einer autorisierten Sammelstelle für die Wiederaufbereitung von Elektro- und
Elektronik-Altgeräten sowie Batterien und Akkumulatoren geschehen. Der unsachgemäße Umgang mit Altgeräten kann aufgrund potenziell gefährlicher Stoffe, die generell mit Elektro- und Elektronik-
Altgeräten in Verbindung stehen, negative Auswirkungen auf die Umwelt und die menschliche Gesundheit haben. Durch Ihre Mitarbeit bei der umweltgerechten Entsorgung dieses Produkts tragen Sie zu einer effektiven Nutzung natürlicher Ressourcen bei. Um weitere Informationen über die Wiederverwertung dieses Produkts zu erhalten, wenden Sie sich an Ihre Stadtverwaltung, den öffentlich-rechtlichen
Entsorgungsträger, eine autorisierte Stelle für die Entsorgung von Elektro- und Elektronik-Altgeräten oder Ihr örtliches Entsorgungsunternehmen oder besuchen Sie www.canon-europe.com/weee, oder www.canon-europe.com/battery.
Zusatzinformationen für Deutschland:
Dieses Produkt kann durch Rückgabe an den Händler unter den in der Verordnung des Elektro- und
Elektronikgerätegesetzes beschriebenen Bedingungen abgegeben werden.
Als Endbenutzer und Besitzer von Elektro- oder Elektronikgeräten sind Sie verpflichtet:
• diese einer vom unsortierten Siedlungsabfall getrennten Erfassung zuzuführen,
• Altbatterien und Altakkumulatoren, die nicht von Altgerät umschlossen sind, sowie Lampen, die zerstörungsfrei aus dem Altgerät entnommen werden können, vor der Abgabe an einer
Erfassungsstelle vom Altgerät zerstörungsfrei zu trennen,
• personenbezogener Daten auf den Altgeräten vor der Entsorgung zu löschen.
Die Bedeutung von dem Symbol der durchgestrichenen Abfalltonne auf Rädern finden Sie oben in dieser
Beschreibung.
Die Vertreiber von Elektro- oder Elektronikgeräten haben die Pflicht zur unentgeltlichen Rücknahme von Altgeräten. Die Vertreiber haben die Endnutzer über die von ihnen geschaffenen Möglichkeiten der
Rückgabe von Altgeräten zu informieren.
153
Union Européenne, Norvège, Islande et Liechtenstein uniquement.
Ces symboles indiquent que ce produit ne doit pas être mis au rebut avec les ordures ménagères, comme le spécifient la Directive européenne DEEE (2012/19/UE), la Directive européenne relative à l'élimination des piles et des accumulateurs usagés (2006/66/CE) et les lois en vigueur dans votre pays appliquant ces directives. Si un symbole de toxicité chimique est imprimé sous le symbole illustré ci-dessus conformément à la Directive relative aux piles et aux accumulateurs, il indique la présence d'un métal lourd (Hg = mercure, Cd = cadmium, Pb = plomb) dans la pile ou l'accumulateur à une concentration supérieure au seuil applicable spécifié par la Directive. Ce produit doit être confié au distributeur à chaque fois que vous achetez un produit neuf similaire, ou à un point de collecte mis en place par les collectivités locales pour le recyclage des Déchets des Équipements Électriques et Électroniques (DEEE).
Le traitement inapproprié de ce type de déchet risque d'avoir des répercussions sur l'environnement et la santé humaine, du fait de la présence de substances potentiellement dangereuses généralement associées aux équipements électriques et électroniques. Votre entière coopération dans le cadre de la mise au rebut correcte de ce produit favorisera une meilleure utilisation des ressources naturelles.
Pour plus d'informations sur le recyclage de ce produit, contactez vos services municipaux, votre écoorganisme ou les autorités locales compétentes, ou consultez le site www.canon-europe.com/weee, ou www.canon-europe.com/battery.
Uitsluitend bestemd voor de Europese Unie en EER (Noorwegen,
IJsland en Liechtenstein)
Met deze symbolen wordt aangegeven dat dit product in overeenstemming met de AEEA-richtlijn
(2012/19/EU), de richtlijn 2006/66/EG betreffende batterijen en accu's en/of de plaatselijk geldende wetgeving waarin deze richtlijnen zijn geïmplementeerd, niet bij het normale huisvuil mag worden weggegooid. Indien onder het hierboven getoonde symbool een chemisch symbool gedrukt staat, geeft dit in overeenstemming met de richtlijn betreffende batterijen en accu's aan dat deze batterij of accu een zwaar metaal bevat (Hg = kwik, Cd = cadmium, Pb = lood) waarvan de concentratie de toepasselijke drempelwaarde in overeenstemming met de genoemde richtlijn overschrijdt. Dit product dient te worden ingeleverd bij een hiervoor aangewezen inzamelpunt, bijv. door dit in te leveren bij een hiertoe erkend verkooppunt bij aankoop van een gelijksoortig product, of bij een officiële inzameldienst voor de recycling van elektrische en elektronische apparatuur (EEA) en batterijen en accu's. Door de potentieel gevaarlijke stoffen die gewoonlijk gepaard gaan met EEA, kan onjuiste verwerking van dit type afval mogelijk nadelige gevolgen hebben voor het milieu en de menselijke gezondheid. Uw medewerking bij het op juiste wijze weggooien van dit product draagt bij tot effectief gebruik van natuurlijke hulpbronnen. Voor verdere informatie over recycling van dit product kunt u contact opnemen met uw plaatselijke gemeente, afvaldienst, officiële dienst voor klein chemisch afval of afvalstortplaats, of kunt u terecht op www.canoneurope.com/weee, of www.canon-europe.com/battery.
154
Sólo para la Unión Europea y el Área Económica Europea (Noruega,
Islandia y Liechtenstein)
Estos iconos indican que este producto no debe desecharse con los residuos domésticos de acuerdo con la Directiva sobre RAEE (2012/19/UE) y la Directiva sobre Pilas y Acumuladores (2006/66/CE) y/o la legislación nacional. Si aparece un símbolo químico bajo este icono, de acuerdo con la Directiva sobre
Pilas y Acumuladores, significa que la pila o el acumulador contiene metales pesados (Hg = Mercurio,
Cd = Cadmio, Pb = Plomo) en una concentración superior al límite especificado en dicha directiva.
Este producto deberá entregarse en un punto de recogida designado, por ejemplo, entregándolo en el lugar de venta al adquirir un producto nuevo similar o en un centro autorizado para la recogida de residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos (RAEE), baterías y acumuladores. La gestión incorrecta de este tipo de residuos puede afectar al medio ambiente y a la salud humana debido a las sustancias potencialmente nocivas que suelen contener estos aparatos. Su cooperación en la correcta eliminación de este producto contribuirá al correcto aprovechamiento de los recursos naturales. Los usuarios tienen derecho a devolver pilas, acumuladores o baterías usados sin coste alguno. El precio de venta de pilas, acumuladores y baterías incluye el coste de la gestión medioambiental de su desecho, y no es necesario mostrar la cuantía de dicho coste en la información y la factura suministradas a los usuarios finales. Si desea más información sobre el reciclado de este producto, póngase en contacto con su municipio, el servicio o el organismo encargado de la gestión de residuos domésticos o visite www.canon-europe.com/ weee, o www.canon-europe.com/battery.
Només per a la Unió Europea i a l’Espai Econòmic Europeu (Noruega,
Islàndia i Liechtenstein)
Aquests símbols indican que aquest producte no s’ha de llençar amb les escombraries de la llar, d’acord amb la RAEE (2012/19/UE), la Directiva relativa a piles i acumuladors (2006/66/CE) i la legislació nacional que implementi aquestes directives. Si al costat d’aquest símbol hi apareix imprès un símbol químic, segons especifica la Directiva relativa a piles i acumuladors, significa que la bateria o l’acumulador conté un metall pesant (Hg = mercuri, Cd = cadmi, Pb = plom) en una concentració superior al límit aplicable especificat en la Directiva. Aquest producte s’hauria de lliurar en un dels punts de recollida designats, com per exemple, intercanviant un per un en comprar un producte similar o lliurant-lo en un lloc de recollida autoritzat per al reciclatge de residus d’aparells elèctrics i electrònics (RAEE) i piles i acumuladors. La manipulació inadequada d’aquest tipus de residus podria tenir un impacte negatiu en l’entorn i en la salut humana, a causa de les substàncies potencialment perilloses que normalment estan associades a l'RAEE. La vostra cooperació a l’hora de rebutjar correctament aquest producte contribuirà a la utilització efectiva dels recursos naturals. Els usuaris tenen dret a retornar les bateries o els acumuladors usats sense cap càrrec. El preu de venda de les bateries i els acumuladors inclou el cost de la gestió ambiental dels residus i no es necessari mostrar l’import d’aquest cost en aquest fullet o en la factura que es lliuri a l’usuari final. Per a més informació sobre el reciclatge d’aquest producte, contacteu
155
amb l’oficina municipal, les autoritats encarregades dels residus, el pla de residus homologat o el servei de recollida d’escombraries domèstiques de la vostra localitat o visiteu www.canon-europe.com/weee, o www.canon-europe.com/battery.
Solo per Unione Europea e SEE (Norvegia, Islanda e Liechtenstein)
Questi simboli indicano che il prodotto non può essere smaltito con i rifiuti domestici, ai sensi della
Direttiva RAEE (2012/19/UE), della Direttiva sulle Batterie (2006/66/CE) e/o delle leggi nazionali che attuano tali Direttive. Se sotto il simbolo indicato sopra è riportato un simbolo chimico, in osservanza della Direttiva sulle batterie, tale simbolo indica la presenza di un metallo pesante (Hg = Mercurio, Cd
= Cadmio, Pb = Piombo) nella batteria o nell'accumulatore con un livello di concentrazione superiore a una soglia applicabile specificata nella Direttiva sulle batterie. Il prodotto deve essere conferito a un punto di raccolta designato, ad esempio il rivenditore in caso di acquisto di un nuovo prodotto simile oppure un centro di raccolta autorizzato per il riciclaggio di rifiuti di apparecchiature elettriche ed elettroniche (RAEE) nonché di batterie e accumulatori. Un trattamento improprio di questo tipo di rifiuti può avere conseguenze negative sull'ambiente e sulla salute umana a causa delle sostanze potenzialmente nocive solitamente contenute in tali rifiuti. La collaborazione dell'utente per il corretto smaltimento di questo prodotto contribuirà a un utilizzo efficace delle risorse naturali ed eviterà di incorrere in sanzioni amministrative ai sensi dell'art. 255 e successivi del Decreto Legislativo n. 152/06.
Per ulteriori informazioni sul riciclaggio di questo prodotto, contattare le autorità locali, l'ente responsabile della raccolta dei rifiuti, un rivenditore autorizzato o il servizio di raccolta dei rifiuti domestici, oppure visitare il sito www.canon-europe.com/weee, o www.canon-europe.com/battery.
Apenas para a União Europeia e AEE (Noruega, Islândia e
Liechtenstein)
Estes símbolos indicam que este produto não deve ser eliminado juntamente com o seu lixo doméstico, segundo a Diretiva REEE de 2012/19/UE, a Diretiva de Baterias (2006/66/CE) e/ou a sua legislação nacional que transponha estas Diretivas. Se houver um símbolo químico impresso como mostrado abaixo, de acordo com a Diretiva de Baterias, isto indica que um metal pesado (Hg = Mercúrio, Cd =
Cádmio, Pb = Chumbo) está presente nesta pilha ou acumulador, numa concentração acima de um limite aplicável especificado na Diretiva. Este produto deve ser entregue num ponto de recolha designado, por exemplo num local autorizado de troca quando compra um equipamento novo idêntico, ou num local de recolha autorizado para reciclar equipamento elétrico e eletrónico (EEE) em fim de vida, bem como pilhas e baterias. O tratamento inadequado deste tipo de resíduos pode ter um impacto negativo no ambiente e na saúde humana, devido a substâncias potencialmente perigosas que estão associadas com equipamentos do tipo EEE. A sua cooperação no tratamento correto deste produto irá contribuir para a utilização mais eficaz dos recursos naturais. Para obter mais informações acerca de como reciclar este produto, por favor contacte as suas autoridades locais responsáveis pela matéria, serviço
156
de recolha aprovado para pilhas e baterias ou serviço de recolha de resíduos sólidos domésticos da sua municipalidade, ou visite www.canon-europe.com/weee, ou www.canon-europe.com/battery.
Gælder kun i Europæiske Union og EØS (Norge, Island og
Liechtenstein)
Disse symboler betyder, at produktet ikke må bortskaffes sammen med dagrenovation i henhold til
WEEE-direktivet (2012/19/EU), batteridirektivet (2006/66/EF) og/eller den lokale lovgivning, som disse direktiver er gennemført i. Hvis der i overensstemmelse med batteridirektivet er trykt et kemisk symbol under det symbol, der er vist ovenfor, betyder det, at batteriet eller akkumulatoren indeholder tungmetaller
(Hg = kviksølv, Cd = cadmium, Pb = bly) i en koncentration, som ligger over de grænseværdier, der er beskrevet i batteridirektivet. Produktet skal afleveres på et godkendt indsamlingssted, f.eks. i overensstemmelse med en godkendt én-til-én-procedure, når du indkøber et nyt tilsvarende produkt, eller på et godkendt indsamlingssted for elektronikaffald samt for batterier og akkumulatorer. Forkert håndtering af denne type affald kan medføre negative konsekvenser for miljøet og menneskers helbred på grund af de potentielt sundhedsskadelige stoffer, der generelt kan forefindes i elektrisk og elektronisk udstyr. Når du foretager korrekt bortskaffelse af produktet, bidrager du til effektiv brug af naturressourcerne. Kontakt din kommune, den lokale affaldsmyndighed, det lokale affaldsanlæg, eller besøg www.canon-europe.com/weee, eller www.canon-europe.com/battery for at få flere oplysninger om genbrug af dette produkt.
Μόνο για την Ευρωπαϊκή Ένωση και τον ΕΟΧ (Νορβηγία, Ισλανδία και
Λιχτενστάιν)
Αυτά τα σύμβολα υποδεικνύουν ότι αυτό το προϊόν δεν πρέπει να απορρίπτεται μαζί με τα οικιακά
απορρίμματα, σύμφωνα με την Οδηγία για τα Απόβλητα Ηλεκτρικού και Ηλεκτρονικού Εξοπλισμού
(ΑΗΗΕ) (2012/19/ΕΕ), την Οδηγία για τις Ηλεκτρικές Στήλες (2006/66/ΕΚ) ή/και την εθνική νομοθεσία
που εφαρμόζει τις Οδηγίες εκείνες. Εάν κάποιο χημικό σύμβολο είναι τυπωμένο κάτω από το σύμβολο
που φαίνεται παραπάνω, σύμφωνα με την Οδηγία για τις Ηλεκτρικές Στήλες, υποδηλώνει ότι κάποιο βαρύ
μέταλλο (Hg = Υδράργυρος, Cd = Κάδμιο, Pb = Μόλυβδος) υπάρχει στην μπαταρία ή τον συσσωρευτή σε
συγκέντρωση μεγαλύτερη από το ισχύον επίπεδο που καθορίζεται στην Οδηγία για τις Ηλεκτρικές Στήλες.
Αυτό το προϊόν πρέπει να παραδίδεται σε καθορισμένο σημείο συλλογής, π.χ. σε μια εξουσιοδοτημένη
βάση ανταλλαγής όταν αγοράζετε ένα νέο παρόμοιο προϊόν ή σε μια εξουσιοδοτημένη θέση συλλογής για
την ανακύκλωση των αποβλήτων ηλεκτρικού και ηλεκτρονικού εξοπλισμού (ΗΗE) και των ηλεκτρικών
στηλών και συσσωρευτών. Ο ακατάλληλος χειρισμός αυτού του τύπου αποβλήτων μπορεί να έχει
αρνητικό αντίκτυπο στο περιβάλλον και την υγεία του ανθρώπου, λόγω δυνητικά επικίνδυνων ουσιών
που γενικά συνδέονται με τον ΗΗΕ. Η συνεργασία σας για τη σωστή απόρριψη αυτού του προϊόντος θα
συμβάλει στην αποτελεσματική χρήση των φυσικών πόρων. Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες σχετικά με
ανακύκλωση αυτού του προϊόντος, επικοινωνήστε με το τοπικό γραφείο της πόλης σας, την υπηρεσία
157
απορριμμάτων, το εγκεκριμένο σχήμα ή την υπηρεσία απόρριψης οικιακών αποβλήτων ή επισκεφθείτε τη
διεύθυνση www.canon-europe.com/weee ή www.canon-europe.com/battery.
Gjelder kun den europeiske union og EØS (Norge, Island og
Liechtenstein)
Disse symbolene indikerer at dette produktet ikke skal kastes sammen med husholdningsavfall, i henhold til WEEE-direktivet (2012/19/EU), batteridirektivet (2006/66/EF) og/eller nasjonal lov som har implementert disse direktivene. Hvis et kjemisk symbol vises under symbolet vist ovenfor, i samsvar med batteridirektivet, indikerer dette at et tungmetall (Hg = kvikksølv, Cd = kadmium, Pb = bly) finnes i batteriet eller akkumulatoren i en konsentrasjon over en gjeldende øvre grense som er spesifisert i batteridirektivet. Produktet må leveres til et dertil egnet innsamlingspunkt, det vil si på en autorisert en-til-en-basis når en kjøper et nytt lignende produkt, eller til et autorisert innsamlingssted for resirkulering av avfall fra elektrisk og elektronisk utstyr (EE-utstyr) og batterier og akkumulatorer. Feil håndtering av denne typen avfall kan være miljø- og helseskadelig på grunn av potensielt skadelige stoffer som ofte brukes i EE-utstyr. Din innsats for korrekt avhending av produktet vil bidra til effektiv bruk av naturressurser. Du kan få mer informasjon om resirkulering av dette produktet ved å kontakte lokale myndigheter, avfallsadministrasjonen, et godkjent program eller husholdningens renovasjonsselskap, eller gå til www.canon-europe.com/weee, eller www.canon-europe.com/battery.
Vain Euroopan unionin sekä ETA:n (Norja, Islanti ja Liechtenstein) alueelle.
Nämä tunnukset osoittavat, että sähkö- ja elektroniikkalaiteromua koskeva direktiivi (SER-direktiivi,
2012/19/EU), paristoista ja akuista annettu direktiivi (2006/66/EY) sekä kansallinen lainsäädäntö kieltävät tuotteen hävittämisen talousjätteen mukana. Jos yllä olevan symbolin alapuolelle on paristodirektiivin mukaisesti painettu kemiallisen aineen tunnus, kyseinen paristo tai akku sisältää raskasmetalleja (Hg
= elohopea, Cd = kadmium, Pb = lyijy) enemmän kuin paristodirektiivin salliman määrän. Tuote on vietävä asianmukaiseen keräyspisteeseen, esimerkiksi kodinkoneliikkeeseen uutta vastaavaa tuotetta ostettaessa tai viralliseen sähkö- ja elektroniikkalaiteromun tai paristojen ja akkujen keräyspisteeseen.
Sähkö- ja elektroniikkalaiteromun virheellinen käsittely voi vahingoittaa ympäristöä ja ihmisten terveyttä, koska laitteet saattavat sisältää ympäristölle ja terveydelle haitallisia aineita. Tuotteen asianmukainen hävittäminen säästää myös luonnonvaroja. Jos haluat lisätietoja tämän tuotteen kierrätyksestä, ota yhteys kunnan jätehuoltoviranomaisiin tai käyttämääsi jätehuoltoyhtiöön tai käy osoitteessa www.canoneurope.com/weee, tai www.canon-europe.com/battery.
158
Endast för Europeiska unionen och EES (Norge, Island och
Liechtenstein)
De här symbolerna visar att produkten inte får sorteras och slängas som hushållsavfall enligt WEEEdirektivet (2012/19/EU), batteridirektivet (2006/66/EG) och/eller nationell lagstiftning som implementerar dessa direktiv. Om en kemisk symbol förekommer under ovanstående symbol innebär detta enligt
Batteridirektivet att en tungmetall (Hg = Kvicksilver, Cd = Kadmium, Pb = Bly) förekommer i batteriet eller ackumulatorn med en koncentration som överstiger tillämplig gräns som anges i Batteridirektivet.
Produkten ska lämnas in på en avsedd insamlingsplats, t.ex. på en återvinningsstation auktoriserad att hantera elektrisk och elektronisk utrustning (EE-utrustning) samt batterier och ackumulatorer eller hos handlare som är auktoriserade att byta in varor då nya, motsvarande köps (en mot en). Olämplig hantering av avfall av den här typen kan ha negativ inverkan på miljön och människors hälsa på grund av de potentiellt farliga ämnen som kan återfinnas i elektrisk och elektronisk utrustning. Din medverkan till en korrekt avfallshantering av produkten bidrar till effektiv användning av naturresurserna. Om du vill ha mer information om var du kan lämna in den här produkten, kontakta ditt lokala kommunkontor, berörd myndighet eller företag för avfallshantering eller se www.canon-europe.com/weee, eller www.canoneurope.com/battery.
Pouze Evropská unie a EHP (Norsko, Island a Lichtenštejnsko)
Tento symbol znamená, že podle směrnice OEEZ (2012/19/EU), směrnice o bateriích (2006/66/ES) a/ nebo podle vnitrostátních právních prováděcích předpisů k těmto směrnicím nemá být tento výrobek likvidován s odpadem z domácností. Je-li v souladu s požadavky směrnice o bateriích vytištěna pod výše uvedeným symbolem chemická značka, udává, že tato baterie nebo akumulátor obsahuje těžké kovy (Hg
= rtuť, Cd = kadmium, Pb = olovo) v koncentraci vyšší, než je příslušná hodnota předepsaná směrnicí.
Tento výrobek má být vrácen do určeného sběrného místa, např. v rámci autorizovaného systému odběru jednoho výrobku za jeden nově prodaný podobný výrobek, nebo do autorizovaného sběrného místa pro recyklaci odpadních elektrických a elektronických zařízení (OEEZ), baterií a akumulátorů.
Nevhodné nakládání s tímto druhem odpadu by mohlo mít negativní dopad na životní prostředí a lidské zdraví, protože elektrická a elektronická zařízení zpravidla obsahují potenciálně nebezpečné látky. Vaše spolupráce na správné likvidaci tohoto výrobku napomůže efektivnímu využívání přírodních zdrojů. Chcete-li získat podrobné informace týkající se recyklace tohoto výrobku, obraťte se prosím na místní úřad, orgán pro nakládání s odpady, schválený systém nakládání s odpady či společnost zajišťující likvidaci domovního odpadu, nebo navštivte webové stránky www.canon-europe.com/weee nebo www.canon-europe.com/battery.
159
Csak az Európai Unió és az EGT (Norvégia, Izland és Liechtenstein) országaiban
Ezek a szimbólumok azt jelzik, hogy a termék hulladékkezelése a háztartási hulladéktól különválasztva, az elektromos és elektronikus berendezések hulladékairól (WEEE) szóló (2012/19/EU) irányelvnek és az elemekről és akkumulátorokról, valamint a hulladék elemekről és akkumulátorokról szóló (2006/66/EK) irányelvnek megfelelően és/vagy ezen irányelveknek megfelelő helyi előírások szerint történik.
Amennyiben a fent feltüntetett szimbólum alatt egy vegyjel is szerepel, az elemekről és akkumulátorokról szóló irányelvben foglaltak értelmében ez azt jelzi, hogy az elem vagy az akkumulátor az irányelvben meghatározott határértéknél nagyobb mennyiségben tartalmaz nehézfémet (Hg = higany, Cd = kadmium,
Pb = ólom). E terméket az arra kijelölt gyűjtőhelyre kell juttatni – pl. hasonló termék vásárlásakor a régi becserélésére vonatkozó hivatalos program keretében, vagy az elektromos és elektronikus berendezések (EEE) hulladékainak gyűjtésére, valamint a hulladék elemek és hulladék akkumulátorok gyűjtésére kijelölt hivatalos gyűjtőhelyre. Az ilyen jellegű hulladékok nem előírásszerű kezelése az elektromos és elektronikus berendezésekhez (EEE) általánosan kapcsolható potenciálisan veszélyes anyagok révén hatással lehet a környezetre és az egészségre. E termék megfelelő leselejtezésével
Ön is hozzájárul a természeti források hatékony használatához. A termék újrahasznosítását illetően informálódjon a helyi polgármesteri hivatalnál, a helyi közterület-fenntartó vállalatnál, a hivatalos hulladéklerakó telephelyen vagy a háztartási hulladék begyűjtését végző szolgáltatónál, illetve látogasson el a www.canon-europe.com/weee, vagy www.canon-europe.com/battery internetes oldalra.
Tylko dla krajów Unii Europejskiej oraz EOG (Norwegia, Islandia i
Liechtenstein)
Te symbole oznaczają, że produktu nie należy wyrzucać razem z odpadami gospodarstwa domowego, zgodnie z dyrektywą WEEE w sprawie zużytego sprzętu elektrycznego i elektronicznego (2012/19/UE) lub dyrektywą w sprawie baterii (2006/66/WE) bądź przepisami krajowymi wdrażającymi te dyrektywy.
Jeśli pod powyższym symbolem znajduje się symbol chemiczny, zgodnie z dyrektywą w sprawie baterii oznacza to, że bateria lub akumulator zawiera metal ciężki (Hg = rtęć, Cd = kadm, Pb
= ołów) w stężeniu przekraczającym odpowiedni poziom określony w dyrektywie w sprawie baterii.
Użytkownicy baterii i akumulatorów mają obowiązek korzystać z dostępnego programu zwrotu, recyklingu i utylizacji baterii oraz akumulatorów. Niewłaściwe postępowanie z tego typu odpadami może mieć wpływ na środowisko i zdrowie ludzi ze względu na substancje potencjalnie niebezpieczne, związane ze zużytym sprzętem elektrycznym i elektronicznym. Państwa współpraca w zakresie właściwej utylizacji tego produktu przyczyni się do efektywnego wykorzystania zasobów naturalnych. W celu uzyskania informacji o sposobie recyklingu tego produktu prosimy o kontakt z właściwym urzędem miejskim lub zakładem gospodarki komunalnej bądź zapraszamy na stronę www.canon-europe.com/weee, lub www.canon-europe.com/battery.
160
Platí len pre štáty Európskej únie a EHP (Nórsko, Island a
Lichtenštajnsko)
Tieto symboly označujú, že podľa Smernice o odpade z elektrických a elektronických zariadení (OEEZ)
2012/19/EÚ, Smernice o batériách (2006/66/ES) a podľa platnej legislatívy Slovenskej republiky sa tento produkt nesmie likvidovať spolu s komunálnym odpadom. Ak je chemická značka vytlačená pod vyššie uvedeným symbolom, znamená to, že táto batéria alebo akumulátor obsahuje ťažký kov (Hg = ortuť,
Cd = kadmium, Pb = olovo) v koncentrácii vyššej, ako je príslušná povolená hodnota stanovená v
Smernici o batériách. Produkt je potrebné odovzdať do určenej zberne, napr. prostredníctvom výmeny za kúpu nového podobného produktu, alebo na autorizované zberné miesto, ktoré spracúva odpad z elektrických a elektronických zariadení (EEZ), batérií a akumulátorov. Nesprávna manipulácia s takýmto typom odpadu môže mať negatívny vplyv na životné prostredie a ľudské zdravie, pretože elektrické a elektronické zariadenia obsahujú potenciálne nebezpečné látky. Spoluprácou na správnej likvidácii tohto produktu prispejete k účinnému využívaniu prírodných zdrojov. Ďalšie informácie o recyklácii tohto produktu získate od miestneho úradu, úradu životného prostredia, zo schváleného plánu OEEZ alebo od spoločnosti, ktorá zaisťuje likvidáciu komunálneho odpadu. Viac informácií nájdete aj na webovej stránke: www.canon-europe.com/weee, alebo www.canon-europe.com/battery.
Üksnes Euroopa Liit ja EMP (Norra, Island ja Liechtenstein)
Antud sümbolid viitavad sellele, et vastavalt elektri- ja elektroonikaseadmete jäätmeid käsitlevale direktiivile (2012/19/EL), patareisid ja akusid ning patarei- ja akujäätmeid käsitlevale direktiivile
(2006/66/EÜ) ja/või nimetatud direktiive rakendavatele riiklikele õigusaktidele ei või seda toodet koos olmejäätmetega ära visata. Kui keemiline sümbol on trükitud eespool toodud sümboli alla, siis tähendab see, et antud patareis või akus leiduva raskemetalli (Hg = elavhõbe, Cd = kaadmium, Pb = plii) kontsentratsioonitase on kõrgem kui patareisid ja akusid ning patarei- ja akujäätmeid käsitlevas direktiivis sätestatud piirmäär. Antud tootest tekkinud jäätmed tuleb anda vastavasse kogumispunkti, nt müügipunkti, mis on volitatud üks ühe vastu vahetama, kui ostate uue sarnase toote, või vastavasse elektri- ja lektroonikaseadmete jäätmete ning patareide ja akude ümbertöötlemiseks mõeldud kogumispunkti. Antud liiki jäätmete vale käitlemine võib kahjustada keskkonda ja inimeste tervist elektrija elektroonikajäätmetes tavaliselt leiduvate potentsiaalselt ohtlike ainete tõttu. Antud tootest tekkinud jäätmete nõuetekohase kõrvaldamisega aitate kasutada loodusvarasid efektiivselt. Täiendava teabe saamiseks elektri- ja elektroonikaseadmetest tekkinud jäätmete ning patarei- ja akujäätmete tagastamise ja ümbertöötlemise kohta võtke ühendust kohaliku omavalitsusega, asjakohase valitsusasutusega, asjakohase tootjavastutusorganisatsiooniga või olmejäätmete käitlejaga. Lisateavet leitate ka Internetileheküljelt www.canon-europe.com/weee või www.canon-europe.com/battery.
161
Tikai Eiropas Savienībai un EEZ (Norvēģijai, Islandei un Lihtenšteinai)
Šie simboli norāda, ka atbilstoši ES Direktīvai (2012/19/ES) par elektrisko un elektronisko iekārtu atkritumiem (EEIA), Direktīvai (2006/66/EK) par baterijām un akumulatoriem, un akumulatoru atkritumiem, ar ko atceļ Direktīvu 91/157/EEK, un vietējiem tiesību aktiem šo izstrādājumu nedrīkst izmest kopā ar sadzīves atkritumiem. Ja zem iepriekš norādītā simbola ir uzdrukāts ķīmiskais simbols, saskaņā ar direktīvu par baterijām un akumulatoriem tas nozīmē, ka šīs baterijas vai akumulatori satur smagos metālus (Hg = dzīvsudrabs, Cd = kadmijs, Pb = svins) un to koncentrācijas līmenis pārsniedz direktīvā par baterijām un akumulatoriem minēto piemērojamo slieksni. Šis izstrādājums ir jānodod piemērotā savākšanas vietā, piemēram, apstiprinātā veikalā, kur iegādājaties līdzīgu jaunu produktu un atstājat veco, vai apstiprinātā vietā izlietotu elektrisko un elektronisko iekārtu un bateriju un akumulatoru pārstrādei. Nepareiza šāda veida atkritumu apsaimniekošana var apdraudēt vidi un cilvēka veselību tādu iespējami bīstamu vielu dēļ, kas parasti ir elektriskajās un elektroniskajās iekārtās. Jūsu atbalsts pareizā šāda veida atkritumu apsaimniekošanā sekmēs efektīvu dabas resursu izmantošanu. Lai saņemtu pilnīgāku informāciju par šāda veida izstrādājumu nodošanu otrreizējai pārstrādei, sazinieties ar vietējo pašvaldību, atkritumu savākšanas atbildīgo dienestu, pilnvaroto organizāciju vai iestādi, kas veic sadzīves atkritumu apsaimniekošanu, vai apmeklējiet tīmekļa vietni www.canon-europe.com/weee, vai www.canoneurope.com/battery.
Tik Europos Sąjungai ir EEE (Norvegijai, Islandijai ir Lichtenšteinui)
Šie simboliai reiškia, kad šio gaminio negalima išmesti į buitines atliekas, kaip reikalaujama WEEE
Direktyvoje (2012/19/ES) ir Baterijų direktyvoje (2006/66/EB) ir (ar) jūsų šalies nacionaliniuose įstatymuose, kuriais šios Direktyvos yra įgyvendinamos. Jeigu cheminio ženklo simbolis yra nurodytas žemiau šio ženklo, tai reiškia, kad vadovaujantis Baterijų direktyvą, baterijų ar akumuliatorių sudėtyje yra sunkiųjų metalų (Hg = gyvsidabrio, Cd = kadmio, Pb = švino), kurių koncentracija viršija Baterijų direktyvoje nurodytas leistinas ribas. Šį gaminį reikia pristatyti į specialųjį surinkimo punktą, pavyzdžiui, mainais, kai jūs perkate naują panašų gaminį, arba į specialiąją surinkimo vietą, kurioje perdirbamos elektrinės ir elektroninės įrangos atliekos bei naudotos baterijos ir akumuliatoriai. Dėl netinkamo šio tipo atliekų tvarkymo gali nukentėti aplinka ir iškilti grėsmė žmogaus sveikatai dėl galimai kenksmingų medžiagų, iš esmės susijusių su elektrine ir elektronine įranga. Bendradarbiaudami ir teisingai utilizuodami šiuos gaminius, jūs padėsite efektyviai naudoti gamtinius išteklius. Daugiau informacijos apie gaminio perdirbimą jums gali suteikti vietinis biuras, atliekų tvarkymo bendrovė, sertifikuoti organai ar buitinių atliekų surinkimo įmonės. Taip pat siūloma apsilankyti interneto svetainėje www.canoneurope.com/weee, arba www.canon-europe.com/battery.
162
Samo za Evropsko unijo in EGP (Norveška, Islandija in Lihtenštajn)
Ti simboli pomenijo, da tega izdelka skladno z Direktivo OEEO (2012/19/EU), Direktivo 2006/66/ES in/ali nacionalno zakonodajo, ki uvaja ti direktivi, ne smete odlagati z nesortiranimi gospodinjskimi odpadki.
Če je pod zgoraj prikazanim simbolom natisnjen kemijski simbol, to v skladu z Direktivo pomeni, da je v tej bateriji ali akumulatorju prisotna težka kovina (Hg = živo srebro, Cd = kadmij, Pb = svinec), in sicer v koncentraciji, ki je nad relevantno mejno vrednostjo, določeno v Direktivi. Ta izdelek je potrebno odnesti na izbrano zbirno mesto, t. j. pooblaščeno trgovino, kjer ob nakupu novega (podobnega) izdelka vrnete starega, ali na pooblaščeno zbirno mesto za ponovno uporabo odpadne električne in elektronske opreme (EEO) ter baterij in akumulatorjev. Neustrezno ravnanje s to vrsto odpadkov lahko negativno vpliva na okolje in človeško zdravje zaradi potencialno nevarnih snovi, ki so pogosto povezane z EEO.
Vaše sodelovanje pri pravilnem odlaganju tega izdelka predstavlja pomemben prispevek k smotrni izrabi naravnih virov. Za več informacij o ponovni uporabi tega izdelka se obrnite na lokalen mestni urad, pristojno službo za odpadke, predstavnika pooblaščenega programa za obdelavo odpadkov ali na lokalno komunalo. Lahko pa tudi obiščete našo spletno stran www.canon-europe.com/weee, ali www.canoneurope.com/battery.
Само за Европейския съюз и ЕИП (Норвегия, Исландия и
Лихтенщайн)
Тези символи показват, че този продукт не трябва да се изхвърля заедно с битовите отпадъци съгласно Директивата за ИУЕЕО (2012/19/ЕC), Директивата за батерии (2006/66/ЕО) и/или Вашето национално законодателство, прилагащо тези Директиви. Ако под показания горе символ е отпечатан символ за химически елемент, съгласно разпоредбите на Директивата за батерии, този втори символ означава наличието на тежък метал (Hg = живак, Cd = кадмий, Pb = олово) в батерията или акумулатора в концентрация над указаната граница за съответния елемент в
Директивата. Този продукт трябва да бъде предаден в предназначен за целта пункт за събиране, например на база размяна, когато купувате нов подобен продукт, или в одобрен събирателен пункт за рециклиране на излязло от употреба електрическо и електронно оборудване (ИУЕЕО), батерии и акумулатори. Неправилното третиране на този тип отпадъци може да доведе до евентуални отрицателни последствия за околната среда и човешкото здраве поради потенциално опасните вещества, които обикновено са свързани с ЕЕО. В същото време Вашето съдействие за правилното изхвърляне на този продукт ще допринесе за ефективното използване на природните ресурси. За повече информация относно това къде можете да предадете за рециклиране на този продукт, моля свържете се с Вашите местни власти, с органа, отговорен за отпадъците, с одобрената система за ИУЕЕО или с Вашата местна служба за битови отпадъци, или посетете www.canon-europe.com/weee, или www.canon-europe.com/battery.
163
Doar pentru Uniunea Europeană şi EEA (Norvegia, Islanda şi
Liechtenstein)
Aceste simboluri indică faptul că acest produs nu trebuie aruncat împreună cu deşeurile menajere, în conformitate cu Directiva DEEE (2012/19/UE), Directiva referitoare la baterii (2006/66/CE) şi/sau legile dvs. naţionale ce implementează aceste Directive. Dacă un simbol chimic este imprimat sub simbolul de mai sus, în conformitate cu Directiva referitoare la baterii, acest simbol indică prezenţa în baterie sau acumulator a unui metal greu (Hg = Mercur, Cd = Cadmiu, Pb = Plumb) într-o concentraţie mai mare decât pragul admis specificat în Directiva referitoare la baterii. Acest produs trebuie înmânat punctului de colectare adecvat, ex: printr-un schimb autorizat unu la unu atunci când cumpăraţi un produs nou similar sau la un loc de colectare autorizat pentru reciclarea reziduurilor de echipament electric şi electronic
(EEE) şi baterii şi acumulatori. Administrarea neadecvată a acestui tip de deşeuri, ar putea avea un impact asupra mediului şi asupra sănătăţii umane datorită substanţelor cu potenţial de risc care sunt în general asociate cu EEE. Cooperarea dvs. în direcţia reciclării corecte a acestui produs va contribui la o utilizare eficientă a resurselor naturale. Pentru mai multe informaţii despre reciclarea acestui produs, vă rugăm să contactaţi biroul dvs. local, autorităţile responsabile cu deşeurile, schema aprobată sau serviciul dvs. responsabil cu deşeurile menajere sau vizitaţi-ne la www.canon-europe.com/weee, sau www.canon-europe.com/battery.
Samo za Europsku uniju i EEA (Norveška, Island i Lihtenštajn)
Oznaka pokazuje da se ovaj proizvod ne smije odlagati s komunalnim i ostalim vrstama otpada, u skladu s direktivom WEEE (2012/19/EC), Direktivom o baterijama (2006/66/EC) i Pravilnikom o gospodarenju otpadnim baterijama i akumulatorima te Pravilnikom o gospodarenju otpadnim električnim i elektroničkim uređajima i opremom. Ako je ispod prethodno prikazane oznake otisnut kemijski simbol, u skladu s
Direktivom o baterijama, to znači da se u ovoj bateriji ili akumulatoru nalazi teški metal (Hg = živa, Cd
= kadmij, Pb = olovo) i da je njegova koncentracija iznad razine propisane u Direktivi o baterijama. Ovaj bi proizvod trebalo predati ovlašenom skupljaču EE otpada ili prodavatelju koji je dužan preuzeti otpadni proizvod po sistemu jedan za jedan, ukoliko isti odgovara vrsti te je obavljao primarne funkcije kao i isporučena EE oprema. Otpadne baterije i akumulatori predaju se ovlaštenom skupljaču otpadnih baterija ili akumulatora ili prodavatelju bez naknade i obveze kupnje za krajnjeg korisnika. Neodgovarajuće rukovanje ovom vrstom otpada može utjecati na okoliš i ljudsko zdravlje zbog potencijalno opasnih supstanci koje se najčešće nalaze na takvim mjestima. Vaša suradnja u pravilnom zbrinjavanju ovog proizvoda pridonijet će djelotvornom iskorištavanju prirodnih resursa. Dodatne informacije o recikliranju ovog proizvoda zatražite od svog lokalnog gradskog ureda, službe za zbrinjavanje otpada, odobrenog programa ili komunalne službe za uklanjanje otpada ili pak na stranicama www.canon-europe.com/weee ili www.canon-europe.com/battery.
164
Korisnici u Srbiji
Ovaj simbol označava da ovaj proizvod ne sme da se odlaže sa ostalim kućnim otpadom, u skladu sa
WEEE Direktivom (2012/19/EU), Direktivom o baterijama (2006/66/EC) i nacionalnim zakonima. Ukoliko je ispod gore navedenog simbola odštampan hemijski simbol, u skladu sa Direktivom o baterijama, ovaj simbol označava da su u ovoj bateriji ili akumulatoru prisutni teški metali (Hg – živa, Cd – kadmijum, Pb olovo) u koncentracijama koje premašuju prihvatljivi prag naveden u Direktivi o baterijama. Ovaj proizvod treba predati određenom centru za prikupljanje, npr. po principu „jedan-za-jedan“ kada kupujete sličan novi proizvod, ili ovlašćenom centru za prikupljanje za reciklažu istrošene električne i elektronske opreme
(EEE), baterija i akumulatora. Nepravilno rukovanje ovom vrstom otpada može imati negativne posledice po životnu sredinu i ljudsko zdravlje usled potencijalno opasnih materijala koji se uglavnom vezuju za
EEE. Vaša saradnja na ispravnom odlaganju ovog proizvoda će doprineti efikasnom korišćenju prirodnih resursa. Više informacija o tome kako možete da reciklirate ovaj proizvod potražite od lokalnih gradskih vlasti, komunalne službe, odobrenog plana reciklaže ili servisa za odlaganje kućnog otpada, ili posetite stranicu www.canon-europe.com/weee, ili www.canon-europe.com/battery.
165
Handling Precautions
Canceling Print Jobs
Legal Restrictions on Scanning/Copying
Printer Handling Precautions
Transporting Your Printer
When Repairing, Lending, or Disposing of the Printer
Keeping Print Quality High
166
Legal Restrictions on Scanning/Copying
Scanning, printing, copying, or modifying copies of the following may be punishable under law.
This list is non-exhaustive. When in doubt, check with a local legal representative.
• • Paper money
• • Money orders
• • Certificates of deposit
• • Postage stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
• • Identification badges or insignia
• • Selective service or draft papers
• • Checks or drafts issued by governmental agencies
• • Motor vehicle licenses and certificates of title
• • Traveler's checks
• • Food stamps
• • Passports
• • Immigration papers
• • Internal revenue stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
• • Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness
• • Stock certificates
• • Copyrighted works or works of art, without the owner's consent
167
Printer Handling Precautions
Do not place any object on the document cover!
Do not place any object on the document cover. It will fall into the rear tray when the document cover is opened and cause the printer to malfunction. Also, place the printer where objects will not fall on it.
168
Transporting Your Printer
When relocating the printer for changing your living place, make sure of the following.
Important
• • You cannot take ink out of ink tanks.
• • Check if the tank cap is completely inserted.
• • Prepare for transporting the printer with the print head attached. This allows the printer to automatically cap the print head, thus preventing it from drying.
• • Do not remove the print head. Ink may leak.
• • If ink stains the inside of the printer, wipe them using a soft cloth dampened with water.
• • When transporting the printer, pack the printer in a plastic bag so that ink does not leak.
• • Pack the printer in a sturdy box so that it is placed with its bottom facing down, using sufficient protective material to ensure safe transport.
• • Do not tilt the printer. Ink may leak.
• • When a shipping agent is handling transport of the printer, have its box marked "THIS SIDE UP" to keep the printer with its bottom facing down. Mark also with "FRAGILE" or "HANDLE WITH CARE".
• • Please handle with care and ensure the box remains flat and NOT turned upside down or on its side, as the printer may be damaged and ink in the printer may leak.
1.
Select Maintenance on HOME screen.
2.
Select Transport mode .
3.
Confirm the message, then select Yes .
The mode is shifted to the transfer mode.
When it is completed, the power is turned off automatically.
4.
Check that ON
unplug power cord
.
169
Important
• Do not unplug the printer while the ON lamp is lit or flashing, as it may cause malfunction or damage to the printer, making the printer unable to print.
5.
Retract paper output tray.
6.
Close paper support.
7.
Unplug the printer cable from the computer and from the printer, then unplug the power cord from the printer.
8.
Use adhesive tape to secure all the covers on the printer to keep them from opening during transportation. Then pack the printer in the plastic bag.
Close and seal the opening of the bag with an object such as tape so as not to leak ink.
9.
Attach the protective material to the printer when packing the printer in the box.
Important carrying, the cassette may come off from the printer.
170
171
When Repairing, Lending, or Disposing of the Printer
If you have entered personal data, passwords and/or other security settings on the printer, such information may be stored in the printer.
To keep your personal information safe, please be sure to reset all printer settings when sending the printer for repair, lending or transferring the printer to another person, or disposing of the printer.
172
Keeping Print Quality High
The key to printing with the optimal printing quality is to prevent the print head from drying or clogging.
Always observe the following rules for optimal printing quality.
Note
• • Depending on the type of paper, ink may blur if you trace the printed area with a highlight pen or paint-stick, or bleed if water or sweat comes in contact with the printed area.
Never unplug the power cord until the power is turned off!
If you press the ON button to turn off the power, the printer caps the print head (nozzles) automatically to prevent from drying. If you unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before the ON lamp is turned off, the print head will not be capped properly and this will cause drying or clogging.
When unplugging the power cord , check that the
ON lamp is not lit.
Print periodically!
Just as the tip of a felt pen becomes dry and unusable if it has not been used for a long time, even if it is capped, the print head too, may become dried or clogged if the printer has not been used for a long time.
We recommend you to use the printer at least once a month.
173
Main Components and Their Use
Main Components
Power Supply
LCD and Operation Panel
Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols
174
Main Components
Front View
Rear View
Inside View
Operation Panel
175
Front View
A: Paper Support
Open to load paper in the rear tray.
B: Rear Tray
Two or more sheets of the same size and type of paper can be loaded at the same time, and fed automatically one sheet at a time.
Loading Photo Paper / Plain Paper in Rear Tray
Loading Envelopes in Rear Tray
C: Paper Guides
Align with both sides of the paper stack.
D: Cassette
Load A4, B5, A5, Letter-sized or Executive plain paper into the cassette, and insert it into the printer.
Loading Plain Paper in Cassette
E: Paper Guides
Align with right/left/front sides of the paper stack.
F: Paper Output Tray
Printed paper is ejected. Pull out it before printing.
176
G: Document Cover
Open to load an original on the platen.
H: Platen
Load an original here.
I: Operation Panel
Use to change the settings of the printer or to operate it.
177
Rear View
A: USB Port
Plug in the USB cable to connect the printer with a computer.
B: Power Cord Connector
Plug in the supplied power cord.
C: Transport Unit Cover
Detach when removing jammed paper.
D: Transport Unit
Open when removing jammed paper.
E: Rear Flat Tray
Load A4, B5, and letter-sized paperboard on this tray.
F: Paper Support
Pull out the rear flat tray toward you when loading paper on a rear flat tray.
178
G: Paper Guides
Align with both sides of the paper stack.
Important
• • Do not touch the metal casing.
• • Do not plug in or unplug the USB cable while the printer is printing or scanning with the computer. This can cause trouble.
179
Inside View
A: Scanning Unit / Cover
Scans originals. Open to refill ink tanks and to remove jammed paper.
B: Tank Caps
Open to refill ink tanks.
C: Ink Tanks
The black ink tank is on the left, and the color ink tanks (cyan, magenta, and yellow) are on the right.
If any ink levels are low, refill the low tanks.
D: Upper Limit Line
Indicates the maximum capacity of the ink.
E: Single Dot
Indicates the amount of ink required when replacing ink in print head.
F: Lower Limit Line
Indicates the lower limit of the sufficient amount of ink to print. Refill the ink tank before the amount of ink is below this line.
G: Ink Valve Lever
Operate when transporting a printer.
Repairing Your Printer
H: Maintenance Cartridge
Absorbs ink used for cleaning.
180
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
I: Print Head Holder
The print head is pre-installed.
181
Operation Panel
A: ON button
Turns the power on or off. Before turning on the power, make sure that the document cover is closed.
Turning the Printer On and Off
B: ON lamp
Lights after flashing when the power is turned on.
C: QR button
A QR code is displayed when you press the button while the QR button lights. You can then gain access to the Online Manual that describes operative functions.
Cost of connecting to Internet is to be born by the customer. Depending on your smartphone or tablet, you may not be able to scan a QR code.
D: HOME button
Used to display the HOME screen.
E: LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
Displays messages, menu items, and operating status.
F: OK button
Finalizes your selection of items. Also used to resolve errors.
G: Black button
Starts black & white copying, scanning, etc.
H: Color button
Starts color copying, scanning, etc.
I: Stop button
Cancels operation when print, copy, or scan job is in progress.
J: Alarm lamp
Lights or flashes when an error occurs.
182
K: buttons
Used to select a menu or setting item. These buttons are also used for entering characters.
L: Back button
Returns to the previous screen.
M: Wireless connect button
When you hold down the button, the button lights. The printer is then put into the standby mode for easy connection in a PC and smartphone.
Easy Wireless Connect
183
Power Supply
Checking that Power Is On
Turning the Printer On and Off
Unplugging the Printer
184
Checking that Power Is On
The ON lamp is lit when the printer is turned on.
Even if the LCD is off, if the ON lamp is lit, the printer is on.
Note
• • It may take a while for the printer to start printing immediately after you turn on the printer.
• • The LCD will turn off if the printer is not operated for about 5 minutes. To restore the display, press any button or perform the print operation.
185
Turning the Printer On and Off
Turning on the printer
Press the ON button to turn on the printer.
The ON lamp flashes and then remains lit.
Note
• • It may take a while for the printer to start printing immediately after you turn on the printer.
• • If an error message is displayed on the LCD, see
.
• • You can set the printer to automatically turn on when a print or scan operation is performed from a computer connected by USB cable or wireless network. This feature is set to off by default.
From the printer
From the computer
For Windows:
For macOS:
Turning off the printer
Press the ON button to turn off the printer.
When the ON lamp stops flashing, the printer is turned off.
186
Important
• • When you
after turning off the printer, be sure to confirm that the ON lamp is off.
Note
• • You can set the printer to automatically turn off when no operations are performed or no print jobs are sent to the printer for a certain interval. This feature is set to on by default.
187
Unplugging the Printer
To unplug the power cord, follow the procedure below.
Important
• • When you unplug the power cord, press the ON button, then confirm that the ON lamp is off.
Unplugging the power cord while the ON lamp is lit or flashing may cause drying or clogging of the print head and print quality may be reduced.
1.
Press the ON button to turn the printer off.
2.
Confirm that the ON lamp is off.
3.
Unplug the power cord.
The specification of the power cord differs depending on the country or region of use.
188
LCD and Operation Panel
The HOME screen on the LCD appears when the printer is turned on.
Basic Operation of the Operation Panel
HOME Screen
A: Network
Displays the current network status.
The icon differs depending on the network of use or the network status.
Wi-Fi is enabled and the printer is connected to the wireless router.
Note
• • Depending on the signal state, the icon will change.
problems.
(Signal strength: 81 % or more): You can use the printer over Wi-Fi without any
(Signal strength: 51 % or more): The problem such as the printer cannot print may occur according to the network status. We recommend placing the printer near the wireless router.
(Signal strength: 50 % or less): The problem such as the printer cannot print may occur. Place the printer near the wireless router.
Wi-Fi is enabled but the printer is not connected to the wireless router.
Wireless Direct is enabled.
Network is disabled.
189
B: Maintenance cartridge information
A symbol appears if there is any information about the used space of the maintenance cartridge.
The maintenance cartridge is almost full. Replace the maintenance cartridge as soon as possible.
Checking Maintenance Cartridge Status on LCD
C: Basic menu
Select each item when you want to use the basic functions of a printer, maintain a printer, or change each setting.
Changing Settings from Operation Panel
Basic Operation of the Operation Panel
To determine a menu or setting items, select an button and press the OK button.
Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols
190
Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols
The buttons on the operation panel allow you to enter (or change) characters, numbers, or symbols.
Adjust the setting to the position, to be changed, using the button and specify it by pressing the
button.
After entry is completed, press the OK button for determination.
If a keyboard is displayed, select the button and press the OK button for entry.
Switch the character entry mode.
Switch the upper-/lower-case letters or symbols on a keyboard.
Delete the characters entered just before.
Insert a blank (space).
Determine the contents of entered data.
Note
• • Only the input modes or characters available for input appear in their respective screens.
• • You can switch the layout of a keyboard.
191
Changing Settings
Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer (Windows)
Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer (macOS)
Changing Settings from Operation Panel
Handling Printer Configuration Using the Web Browser
192
Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer (Windows)
Changing the Print Options
Managing the Printer Power
Changing the Printer Operation Mode
193
Changing the Print Options
You can change the detailed printer driver settings for print data that is sent from an application software.
Check this check box if part of the image data is cut off, the paper source during printing differs from the driver settings, or printing fails.
1.
printer driver setup window
2.
Click Print Options...
on the Page Setup tab
The Print Options dialog box opens.
3.
Change the individual settings
If necessary, change the setting of each item, and then click OK .
The Page Setup tab is displayed again.
194
Managing the Printer Power
This function allows you to manage the printer power from the Canon IJ Printer Assistant Tool.
Power Off
The Power Off function turns off the printer. When you use this function, you will not be able to turn the printer on from the Canon IJ Printer Assistant Tool.
1.
Open Canon IJ Printer Assistant Tool
2.
Perform power off
Click Power Off . When the confirmation message appears, click OK .
The printer power switches off.
Auto Power
Auto Power allows you to set Auto Power On and Auto Power Off .
The Auto Power On function automatically turns on the printer when data is received.
The Auto Power Off function automatically turns off the printer when there are no operations from the printer driver or the printer for a specified period of time.
1.
Open the Canon IJ Printer Assistant Tool
2.
Check that the printer is on and then click Auto Power
The Auto Power Settings dialog box will open.
Note
• If the printer is off or if communication between the printer and the computer is disabled, an error message may appear because the computer cannot collect the printer status.
If this happens, click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer.
3.
If necessary, complete the following settings:
Auto Power On
Select the auto-power on setting.
Select Disable to prevent the auto-power on feature from functioning.
Check that the printer is on, and then click OK to change the printer settings.
Select Enable to turn the printer on automatically when print data is sent to it.
Auto Power Off
Specify the time from the list. When this time lapses without any operations from the printer driver or the printer, the printer is turned off automatically.
195
4.
Apply the settings
Click OK . When the confirmation message appears, click OK .
The setting is enabled after this. When you want to disable this function, select Disable from the list according to the same procedure.
Note
• When the printer is turned off, the Canon IJ Status Monitor message varies depending on the Auto
Power On setting.
When the setting is Enable , "Printer is standing by" is displayed. When the setting is Disable ,
"Printer is offline" is displayed.
196
Changing the Printer Operation Mode
If necessary, switch between various modes of printer operation.
If you want to change printer settings, open one of the following two Custom Settings Tab, and configure settings.
•
Custom Settings in the Maintenance Tab
•
Custom Settings in Canon IJ Printer Assistant Tool
For functions related to print settings, go to Custom Settings in the Maintenance Tab. For other settings, go to Custom Settings in Canon IJ Printer Assistant Tool.
Custom Settings in the Maintenance Tab
1.
Open the Maintenance Tab
2.
Check that the printer power is on, and click Custom Settings
The
Custom Settings dialog box opens.
Note
• If the printer is off or if communication between the printer and the computer is disabled, an error message may appear because the computer cannot collect the printer status.
If this happens, click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer.
3.
Configure settings
If necessary, switch between various modes of printer operation.
4.
Apply the settings
Click OK and when the confirmation message appears, click OK .
The printer operates with the modified settings hereafter.
Custom Settings in Canon IJ Printer Assistant Tool
1.
Open the Canon IJ Printer Assistant Tool
2.
Check that the printer is on and then click Custom Settings
The Custom Settings dialog box opens.
Note
• If the printer is off or if communication between the printer and the computer is disabled, an error message may appear because the computer cannot collect the printer status.
If this happens, click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer.
3.
Configure settings
197
If necessary, switch between various modes of printer operation.
4.
Apply the settings
Click OK and when the confirmation message appears, click OK .
The printer operates with the modified settings hereafter.
198
Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer (macOS)
Managing the Printer Power
Changing the Printer Operation Mode
199
Managing the Printer Power
Printer power supply is operated from Remote UI.
Power control settings
Power control settings allow you to set Auto power off and Auto power on.
Auto power off is the function wherein the printer automatically turns itself off, when data is not sent or the printer remains inactive for a certain period.
The Auto power on function automatically turns on the printer when data is received.
1.
Selecting Printer settings
Remote UI
2.
Click Power control settings
3.
Select Use auto power control , and then click OK
4.
Check the displayed message and click OK
5.
Complete the following settings:
Auto power off
Specify the time from the list. Printer automatically turns itself off, when data is not sent within the specified time or the printer has remained inactive.
Auto power on
When you check this check box, the printer automatically turns itself on when data is sent.
6.
Apply the settings
Click OK .
The printer will operate with the changed settings hereafter.
200
Changing the Printer Operation Mode
If necessary, switch between various modes of printer operation.
1.
Check whether the printer is on and select Printer settings from
Remote UI
2.
If necessary, complete the following settings:
Print settings - Prevent paper abrasion
The printer can increase the gap between the print head and the paper during high-density printing to prevent paper abrasion.
Check this check box to prevent paper abrasion.
Custom settings - Detect paper setting mismatch
If the check box is deselected, at the time of printing from PC, you can continue to print without the message display even if the paper settings set in the Print dialog differs from the paper information registered to the printer.
Ink drying wait time
You can set the length of the printer rest time until printing of the next page begins. The wait time becomes longer as the value set in the list increases, and shorter as the value decreases.
If the paper gets stained because the next page is ejected before the ink on the printed page dries, increase the ink drying wait time.
3.
Apply the settings
Click OK .
The printer operates with the modified settings hereafter.
201
Changing Settings from Operation Panel
Changing Settings from Operation Panel
Setting Items on Operation Panel
Print settings
LAN settings
Other device settings
Language selection
Firmware update
Admin pwd. settings
Reset settings
Feed settings
Web service setup
ECO settings
Quiet setting
System information
Job management
Checking the Total Number of Uses of Printer
202
Changing Settings from Operation Panel
This section describes the procedure to change the settings, taking the steps to specify prevent abrasion as an example.
1.
Check that printer is turned on.
2.
Select Settings on the HOME screen.
3.
Select Device settings .
4.
Select a setting item to adjust.
The setting screen for the selected item is displayed.
5.
Select a setting item.
6.
Select a setting to specify.
For more on setting items on the operation panel:
Setting Items on Operation Panel
203
Setting Items on Operation Panel
Note
• • The administrator password may be required to change the settings of some setting items.
Items for Printer
Items for Paper/Printing
Items for Maintenance/Management
Checking the Total Number of Uses of Printer
204
Print settings
Select this setting item from Device settings in Settings .
• • Prevent paper abrasion
Use this setting only if the print surface becomes smudged.
Important
• • Be sure to set this back to OFF after printing since it may result in lower printing speed or lower print quality.
• • Adjust horiz. print position
Adjusts the print position when the left/right margins are not aligned.
You can adjust the left/right margins in increments of 0.004 in. (0.1 mm) between -0.12 in. (-3 mm) and
+0.12 in. (+3 mm) centered on the horizontal center of the paper.
Important
• • When using A4/Letter sized paper, the amount of adjustment that can be made is limited. You cannot make adjustments greater than this limit.
• • Print target for plain paper
Select Text only or Text and photos for plain paper printing.
Note
• • As print results, if you are conscious of unevenness or textures of granularity, select Text and photos .
205
LAN settings
Select this setting item from Settings .
Important
• • The administrator password may be required to change the settings.
To print the network settings, select Print details and select Yes .
Important
• • The network settings printout contains important information about your network. Handle it with care.
Wi-Fi
• • 2.4GHz/5GHz Switch
Select a frequency.
• • Wi-Fi setting list
The network settings information of the printer appears when it is connected by Wi-Fi. (Some setting items are not displayed depending on the printer settings.)
Items
Connection
Network name (SSID)
Frequency
Wi-Fi security
Signal strength (%)
IPv4 address
IPv4 subnet mask
IPv4 default gateway
IPv6 link-local address
MAC address (Wi-Fi)
Printer name
Bonjour service name
Setting
Enabled (connected)/Enabled (disconnected)/Disable
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
2.4 GHz/5 GHz
Inactive/WPA-PSK(TKIP)/WPA-PSK(AES)/WPA2-PSK(TKIP)/WPA2-
PSK(AES)/WPA3-SAE(AES)
XXX
XXX. XXX. XXX. XXX
XXX. XXX. XXX. XXX
XXX. XXX. XXX. XXX
XXXX: XXXX: XXXX: XXXX:
XXXX: XXXX: XXXX: XXXX
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
206
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
("XX" represents alphanumeric characters.)
• • Advanced mode
Enables/disables Wi-Fi.
• • Wi-Fi setup
Selects the setup method for Wi-Fi connection.
◦ ◦ Easy wireless connect
Select if you specify the settings of the access point information to the printer directly from a device (e.g. smartphone, or tablet) without operating the wireless router. Follow the on-screen instructions of the connecting device for the setup procedure.
◦ ◦ Manual connect
Select when you perform settings for Wi-Fi manually using the operation panel of the printer.
◦ ◦ WPS (Push button method)
Select when you perform settings for Wi-Fi using a wireless router supporting a Wi-Fi Protected
Setup (WPS) push button method. Follow the on-screen instructions during setup.
◦ ◦ Other connection types
▪ ▪ WPS (PIN code method)
Select when you perform settings for Wi-Fi using a wireless router supporting a Wi-Fi
Protected Setup (WPS) PIN code method. Follow the on-screen instructions during setup.
• • Advanced
For details on each setting item:
Wireless Direct
• • Wireless Direct setting list
The network settings information of the printer appears when it is connected by the wireless direct.
(Some setting items are not displayed depending on the printer settings.)
Items
Connection
Network name(SSID)
Password
Frequency
Wi-Fi security
No. of devices connected now
Setting
Enable/Disable
DIRECT-XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXX
2.4 GHz/5 GHz
WPA2-PSK(AES)
XX/XX
207
IPv4 address
IPv4 subnet mask
IPv4 default gateway
IPv6 link-local address
MAC address (Wi-Fi)
Printer name
Bonjour service name
XXX. XXX. XXX. XXX
XXX. XXX. XXX. XXX
XXX. XXX. XXX. XXX
XXXX: XXXX: XXXX: XXXX:
XXXX: XXXX: XXXX: XXXX
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
("XX" represents alphanumeric characters.)
• • Connect to smartphone
Enables to connect the smartphone to the printer by reading the QR code displayed on the LCD with the smartphone, or also by manually obtaining the network name and password.
• • Advanced mode
Enables/disables Wireless Direct.
• • Change network name (SSID)
Changes the identifier (SSID/the printer's name displayed on a Wi-Fi Direct compatible device) for
Wireless Direct.
• • Change password
Changes the password for Wireless Direct.
• • Confirm connection request
Selecting ON displays the confirmation screen when a Wi-Fi Direct compatible device is connecting the printer.
• • Advanced
For details on each setting item:
Advanced
• • Set printer name
Specifies the printer name. You can use up to 15 characters for the name.
Note
• • You cannot use the same printer name as that already used for other LAN connected devices.
• • You cannot use a hyphen for the initial or last character of the printer name.
• • TCP/IP settings
208
Performs IPv4 or IPv6 setting.
• • WSD setting
Setting items when you use WSD (one of the network protocols supported in Windows).
◦ ◦ Enable/disable WSD
Selects whether WSD is enabled or disabled.
Note
• • When this setting is enabled, the printer icon is displayed on the Network Explorer in
Windows.
◦ ◦ Optimize inbound WSD
Selecting Enable allows you to receive the WSD printing data faster.
◦ ◦ WSD scan from this device
Selecting Enable allows you to transfer the scanned data to the computer using WSD. To transfer the scanned data, press Color button.
Note
• • When you forward the scanned data to the computer searched using WSD, you cannot select the document type.
◦ ◦ Timeout setting
Specifies the timeout length.
• • Bonjour settings
Setting items when you use Bonjour.
◦ ◦ Enable/disable Bonjour
Selecting Enable allows you to use Bonjour to perform the network settings.
◦ ◦ Service name
Specifies the Bonjour service name. You can use up to 48 characters for the name.
Note
• • You cannot use the same service name as that already used for other LAN connected devices.
• • LPR protocol setting
Enables/disables the LPR setting.
• • RAW protocol
Enables/disables RAW printing.
• • LLMNR
Enables/disables LLMNR (Link-Local Multicast Name Resolution). Selecting Enable allows the printer to detect printer's IP address from the printer name without a DNS server.
• • IPP settings
209
Selecting Enable allows you to print via the network with the IPP protocol.
• • Wi-Fi DRX setting
Selecting Enable allows you to activate discontinuous reception when using Wi-Fi (discontinuous reception).
Note
• • Depending on the Wi-Fi router used, discontinuous reception may not be activated even though
Enable is selected.
• • Discontinuous reception is enabled only while the printer is on standby. (The LCD is in the screen saver mode.)
• • IEEE802.1X/EAP settings
Setting item when you use IEEE802.1X/EAP (WPA/WPA2 Enterprise).
◦ ◦ Enable/disable IEEE802.1X/EAP
Enables/disables IEEE802.1X/EAP.
◦ ◦ Search for EAP router
Searches switch/access point of IEEE802.1X/EAP and display it.
◦ ◦ Latest authentication result
Displays the latest authentication result of IEEE802.1X/EAP setting.
• • IPsec settings
Selecting Enable allows you to specify the IPsec security.
210
Other device settings
Select this setting item from Device settings in Settings .
Important
• • The administrator password may be required to change the settings.
• • Date/time settings
Sets the current date and time.
• • Date display format
Selects the date display format.
• • Time zone
Specifies the time zone according to a country or region you live in.
Specifying the time zone to the printer allows you to display the correct time an e-mail was sent from the main unit on your mail software.
• • Daylight saving time settings
Sets daylight saving time (summer time).
• • Key repeat
Selecting ON lets you quickly display candidate numbers or characters by holding down the button during character entry.
• • Original removal reminder
Selects whether the printer will display the reminder screen in case you forget to remove the original from the platen after scanning.
Important
• • Depending on the type of original or the state of the document cover, forgetting to remove the original may not be detected.
• • Keyboard layout
Select the keyboard layout from the following three types.
◦ ◦ QWERTY
◦ ◦ QWERTZ
◦ ◦ AZERTY
• • Ink level monitor
◦ ◦ Reset ink lev. count
Resets the remaining ink count.
211
Important
• • After refilling the ink to the upper limit line of the ink tank, reset the remaining ink count.
• • If the remaining ink count is reset when the ink tank is not full, the remaining ink level cannot be detected properly.
• • Force ink tank selection
You can specify the ink to use.
◦ ◦ All ink tanks
Use both color ink and black ink.
◦ ◦ Black only
Use only black ink.
Note
• • When any of the inks reached the lower limit line, printing and copying are disabled.
• • Fixed print quality
Specifies print quality when printing on plain paper.
• • Screen lock settings
Lock the screen to prevent the panel operation by someone other than the administrator.
212
Language selection
Select this setting item from Device settings in Settings .
Changes the language for the messages and menus on the LCD.
Important
• • The administrator password may be required to change the settings.
Japanese / English / German / French / Italian / Spanish / Portuguese / Dutch / Danish / Norwegian /
Swedish / Finnish / Russian / Ukrainian / Polish / Czech / Slovene / Hungarian / Slovak / Croatian /
Romanian / Bulgarian / Turkish / Greek / Estonian / Latvian / Lithuanian / Simplified Chinese / Korean /
Traditional Chinese / Indonesian / Vietnamese
213
Firmware update
Select this setting item from Device settings in Settings .
You can update the firmware of the printer, check the firmware version, or perform settings of a notification screen, a DNS server and a proxy server.
Important
• • The administrator password may be required to change the settings.
• • When you use this function, make sure the printer is connected to the Internet.
• • Do not turn off the power of a printer while firmware is being updated.
• • Install update
Performs the firmware update of the printer. If you select Yes , the firmware update starts. Follow the on-screen instructions to perform update.
• • Check current version
You can check the current firmware version.
• • Update notification setting
You can set the printer to display the firmware update information on the LCD when the firmware update is available.
When Idle/Power off is selected, the printer informs you of the update during idle and the update information also appears when you press the ON button.
• • Auto update settings
Select ON to automatically update the firmware to the latest version.
• • DNS server setup
Performs settings for a DNS server. Select Auto setup or Manual setup . If you select Manual setup , follow the display on the LCD to perform settings.
• • Proxy server setup
Performs settings for a proxy server. Follow the display on the LCD to perform settings.
214
Admin pwd. settings
The administrator password can be set or canceled.
Important
• • The administrator password of the printer is set by default. It is set in the serial number of the printer which consists of 9 characters (the first 4 characters are alphabet and the latter 5 characters are number) and is indicated on the seal on the device.
• • The administrator password may be required to change the settings.
1.
Check that printer is turned on.
2.
Select Settings on the HOME screen.
3.
Select Device settings .
4.
Select Admin pwd. settings .
5.
If the authentication screen for an administrator password is displayed, enter a password, then select OK .
When the administrator password is not set, the registration confirmation message is displayed. Select
Yes . The message is displayed again. Then, select OK and proceed to step 7.
6.
Select Change admin pwd.
.
When you do not set the administrator password, select Remove admin pwd.
. Select Yes in the displayed screen. The message is displayed again. Then, select OK .
7.
Select the effective range of the administrator password.
Remote UI and tools
To change the setting using the remote UI or a certain software, the administrator password needs to be entered.
LCD, RMT UI, tools
To change the setting using the operation panel of this printer, remote UI or a certain software, the administrator password needs to be entered.
8.
Enter the administrator password.
Enter the password using 4 to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Important combination of alphanumeric characters and symbols.
215
9.
Enter the administrator password again.
The administrator password is available.
216
Reset settings
Select this setting item from Device settings in Settings .
You can set the settings back to the default.
Important
• • The administrator password may be required to change the settings.
• • Web service setup only
Sets the Web service settings back to the default.
• • LAN settings only
Sets the LAN settings back to the default.
• • Settings only
Returns the settings such as the paper size, media type, or other setting items back to the default.
• • Reset all
Sets all settings you made to the printer back to the default. The administrator password specified by
Remote UI or Wi-Fi Connection Assistant reverts to the default setting.
Note
• • You cannot set the following setting items back to the default:
The language displayed on the LCD
The current position of the print head
The cumulative usage count of copy, scan, etc. registered in Print usage statistics .
CSR (Certificate Signing Request) for encryption method (SSL/TLS) setting
217
Feed settings
Select this setting item from Settings .
Note
• • By registering the paper size and the media type, the message can be displayed before printing starts when the paper size or the media type of the loaded paper differs from the paper settings.
• • Rear tray paper settings
Registers the paper size and the media type you load on the rear tray.
• • Cassette paper settings
Registers the paper size you load in the cassette.
• • Check paper replacement
If you select Enable , the printer detects the paper replacement. A screen for confirming the setting of paper is displayed.
Note
• • A screen for confirming the setting of paper is not displayed if you select Disable . Set the size and type of paper properly in Rear tray paper settings or Cassette paper settings when making prints.
• • For AirPrint of iOS/iPadOS, paper may be printed based on the paper size set during paper loading.
It is recommended to set to Enable when making prints using an AirPrint function.
• • Detect paper setting mismatch
If you select Enable , the printer detects whether the paper size and the media type are identical with those registered in Feed settings . If printing starts with the settings that do not match, an error message is displayed on the LCD.
Note
• • When Disable is selected, the settings in Feed settings is disabled.
218
Web service setup
Select this item from Settings .
Important
• • The administrator password may be required to change the settings.
• • Web service registration/Web service cancellation
Registers/Deletes Web service usage to use the printer device information to/from PIXMA/MAXIFY
Cloud Link.
• • Web service connection setup
The following setting items are available.
◦ ◦ IJ Cloud Printing Center setup
Registers/Deletes the printer to/from Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center and sets the history saving.
◦ ◦ Check Web service setup
Make sure whether the printer is registered to Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.
• • Issue registration code
In order to link the web service and printer, obtain the registration code from the service origin.
• • DNS server setup
Performs settings for a DNS server. Select Auto setup or Manual setup . If you select Manual setup , follow the display on the LCD to perform settings.
• • Proxy server setup
Performs settings for a proxy server. Follow the display on the LCD to perform settings.
219
ECO settings
This setting allows you to use automatic duplex printing as a default to save paper and to turn on/off the printer automatically to save electricity.
Important
• • The administrator password may be required to change the settings.
Using Power Saving Function
Follow the procedure below to use power saving function.
1.
Check that printer is turned on.
2.
Select Settings on the HOME screen.
3.
Select ECO settings .
4.
Select PwrControl settings .
5.
Select Auto pwr control ON .
6.
Specify settings as necessary.
A: Specify the length of time to turn the printer off automatically when no operation is made or no printing data is sent to the printer.
B: Selecting ON enables the printer to turn on automatically when a scanning command from a computer or printing data is sent to the printer.
Note
• Selecting Use scheduling allows you to set time and day to turn on/off the power automatically.
• Selecting Power control OFF disables all settings of the power control and scheduling.
220
Using Duplex Printing
Follow the procedure below to use duplex printing.
1.
Check that printer is turned on.
2.
Select Settings on the HOME screen.
3.
Select ECO settings .
4.
Select Two-sided print settings .
5.
Specify settings as necessary.
C: Select two-sided copying as a default.
D: Select two-sided printing of template forms on the printer as a default.
221
Quiet setting
Enables this function on the printer if you want to reduce the operating noise, such as when printing at night.
In addition, you can specify the time range to reduce the operating noise.
Important
• • The administrator password may be required to change the settings.
Follow the procedure below to perform setting.
1.
Check that printer is turned on.
2.
Select Settings on the HOME screen.
3.
Select Quiet setting .
4.
Select ON .
5.
Select Yes or No .
• When Yes is selected:
Specify the start time and press the OK button.
Similarly, specify the end time and press the OK button.
You can reduce the operating noise during the specified time.
• When No is selected:
You can reduce the operating noise while printing is in progress.
Important
• • Operating speed is reduced compared to when OFF is selected.
• • This function may not be so effective depending on the printer's setting. Furthermore, certain noise, such as when the printer is preparing for printing, is not reduced.
222
System information
Select this setting item from Printer details .
• • Current version
Displays the current firmware version.
• • Printer name
Displays the printer name currently specified.
• • Serial number
Displays the printer serial number.
• • Printed page count
Displays the printed sheet count in increments of 50 sheets. (Ex: In case of 25 sheets, [1-50] is displayed.)
• • MAC address (Wi-Fi)
Displays the MAC address for Wi-Fi.
• • Root cert. thumbprint (SHA-1)
Shows the root certification thumbprint (SHA-1) of the printer.
• • Root certificate thumbprint: SHA-256
Shows the root certification thumbprint (SHA-256) of the printer.
223
Job management
Select this item from Printer details .
Important
• • The administrator password may be required to change the settings.
• • Print job history
Prints the job history of Print / Copy / Communication log .
• • Restrict job hist.
This is the menu for the developer.
224
Checking the Total Number of Uses of Printer
The total number of uses of printer can be printed and checked.
1.
Check that printer is turned on.
2.
Load A4 or Letter-sized plain paper.
3.
Select Printer details on HOME screen.
4.
Select Print usage statistics .
5.
Select Yes .
6.
Press the OK button.
The total number of uses of printer is printed.
225
Specifications
General Specifications
Interface
Operating environment
Storage environment
Power supply
Power consumption
USB port:
Hi-Speed USB *
Network port:
Wi-Fi: IEEE802.11n / IEEE802.11g / IEEE802.11b / IEEE802.11a /
IEEE802.11ac
* A computer that complies with Hi-Speed USB standard is required. Since the
Hi-Speed USB interface is fully upwardly compatible with USB 1.1, it can be used at USB 1.1.
USB and the network can be used at the same time.
Temperature: 41 to 95 °F (5 to 35 °C)
Humidity: 10 to 90 % RH (no condensation)
* The performance of the printer may be reduced under certain temperature and humidity conditions.
Recommended conditions:
Temperature: 59 to 86 °F (15 to 30 °C)
Humidity: 10 to 80 % RH (no condensation)
* For the temperature and humidity conditions of papers such as photo paper, refer to the paper's packaging or the supplied instructions.
Temperature: 32 to 104 °F (0 to 40 °C)
Humidity: 5 to 95 % RH (no condensation)
AC 100-240 V, 50/60 Hz
(The supplied power cord is only for the country or region you purchased.)
Printing (Copy): 18 W or less *1
Standby (minimum): 0.8 W or less *1*2
Standby (all ports connected): 1.4 W or less
OFF: 0.1 W or less
*1 USB connection to a PC
*2 The wait time for standby cannot be changed.
External dimensions (W x D x H) Approx. 15.8 x 16.4 x 8.6 in. (Approx. 399 x 417 x 216 mm)
* With the Cassette and trays retracted.
Weight Approx. 18.2 lb (Approx. 8.3 kg)
* With the Print Head installed.
226
Scan Specifications
Scanner driver
Maximum scanning size
Optical resolution (horizontal x vertical)
Gradation (Input / Output)
Windows: TWAIN 1.9 Specification, WIA
A4/Letter, 8.5 x 11.7 in. (216 x 297 mm)
1200 x 2400 dpi *
* Optical Resolution represents the maximum sampling rate based on ISO
14473.
Gray: 16 bit/8 bit
Color: RGB each 16 bit/8 bit
Network Specifications
Communication protocol
Wi-Fi
SNMP, HTTP, TCP/IP (IPv4/IPv6)
Supported Standards: IEEE802.11n / IEEE802.11g / IEEE802.11b /
IEEE802.11a / IEEE802.11ac
Frequency bandwidth: 2.4 GHz / 5 GHz
* A frequency band that can be used varies depending on country or region.
Communication distance: Indoors 164 feet/50 m
* Effective range varies depending on the installation environment and location.
Security:
WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES)
WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES)
WPA3-SAE (AES)
WPA-EAP (AES) *
WPA2-EAP (AES) *
WPA3-EAP (AES) *
* Compatible with IEEE802.1X (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP)
Setup:
WPS (Push button configuration/PIN code method)
Easy wireless connect
Minimum System Requirements
Conform to the operating system's requirements when higher than those given here.
Windows
Operating System Windows 11, Windows 10, Windows 8.1, Windows 7 SP1
Note: Operation can only be guaranteed on a PC with pre-installed operating system.
227
Amount of hard disk space required for installing the driver
Printer driver and IJ Printer Assistant Tool support the following OS:
Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1, Windows Server 2012 R2, Windows Server
2016, Windows Server 2019 and Windows Server 2022
1.5 GB or more
The necessary amount of hard disk space may be changed without notice.
macOS
Operating System macOS Mojave 10.14.6 - macOS Monterey 12
Other Supported OS iOS/iPadOS, Android, Chrome OS
Some functions may not be available with the supported OS.
Refer to the Canon web site for details.
Information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
228
Information about Paper
Supported Media Types
Unsupported Media Types
Handling Paper
Print Area
229
Supported Media Types
For best results, choose paper designed for how you are printing. A variety of paper for documents as well as photos or illustrations is available from Canon. Use genuine Canon paper to print important photos, when possible.
Media Types
Genuine Canon paper
Note
• • For warnings on use of the non-printable side, see each product's usage information.
• • Page sizes and media types differ depending on the country or region where the paper is sold. For details on page sizes and media types, access the Canon website.
• • Genuine Canon paper is not available in some countries or regions. Note that in the United States,
Canon paper is not sold by model number. Instead, purchase paper by name.
Paper for printing documents:
• • Canon Red Label Superior <WOP111>
• • Canon Océ Office Colour Paper <SAT213>
• • High Resolution Paper <HR-101N>
Paper for printing photos:
• • Glossy Photo Paper "Everyday Use" <GP-501/GP-508>
• • Photo Paper Glossy <GP-701>
• • Photo Paper Plus Glossy II <PP-201/PP-208/PP-301>
• • Photo Paper Pro Luster <LU-101>
• • Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss <SG-201>
• • Matte Photo Paper <MP-101>
Paper for making original goods:
• • Photo Stickers (16 stickers per sheet) <PS-108>
• • Photo Stickers (Free Cutting) <PS-208>
• • Photo Stickers (Variety Pack) <PS-808>
• • Restickable Photo Paper <RP-101>
• • Removable Photo Stickers <PS-308R>
• • Magnetic Photo Paper <MG-101/PS-508>
• • Light Fabric Iron-on Transfers <LF-101>
230
• • Double sided Matte Paper <MP-101D>
Paper other than genuine Canon paper
• • Plain Paper (including recycled paper)
• • Envelopes
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type) (Windows)
Page Sizes
You can use the following page sizes.
Note
• • Page sizes and media types the printer supports differ depending on the OS you are using.
Standard sizes:
• • Letter
• • Legal
• • Executive
• • A6
• • A5
• • A4
• • B5
• • B-Oficio
• • M-Oficio
• • Foolscap
• • Legal(India)
• • KG/4"x6"(10x15)
• • 5"x7"(13x18cm)
• • 7"x10"(18x25cm)
• • 8"x10"(20x25cm)
• • L(89x127mm)
• • 2L(127x178mm)
• • Square 5"
• • Hagaki
• • Hagaki 2
• • Envelope Com 10
• • Envelope DL
231
• • Nagagata 3
• • Nagagata 4
• • Yougata 4
• • Yougata 6
• • Envelope C5
• • Envelope Monarch
• • Card 2.17"x3.58"
Special sizes
• • Minimum size: 2.17 x 3.58 in. (55.0 x 91.0 mm)
• • Maximum size: 8.50 x 47.24 in. (216.0 x 1200.0 mm) *
* When Height of Page Size is set to a value exceeding 26.61 in. (676 mm), Media Type is set to Plain
Paper .
Paper Weight
You can use paper in the following weight range.
• • Rear Tray/Cassette
Plain paper: From 17 to 28 lb (64 to 105 g /m 2 )
• • Rear Flat Tray
Plain paper: From 80 to 139 lb (300 to 523 g /m 2 )
232
Paper Load Limit
This section shows the paper load limits of the rear tray, the cassette, and the paper output tray.
Paper Load Limits of Rear Tray and Cassette
Paper Load Limit of Paper Output Tray
Note
• • Page sizes and media types differ depending on the country or region where the paper is sold. For details on page sizes and media types, access the Canon website.
Paper Load Limits of Rear Tray and Cassette
Genuine Canon Paper
Paper for printing documents:
Media Name <Model No.>
Canon Red Label Superior <WOP111>
Canon Océ Office Colour Paper <SAT213>
High Resolution Paper <HR-101N>
Rear Tray
Approx. 100 sheets
Approx. 80 sheets
Approx. 80 sheets
Cassette
Approx. 250 sheets
Approx. 200 sheets
N/A
Paper for printing photos:
Media Name <Model No.>
Glossy Photo Paper "Everyday Use" <GP-501/
Photo Paper Glossy <GP-701> *2
Photo Paper Plus Glossy II <PP-201/PP-208/PP-301> *2
Photo Paper Pro Luster <LU-101>
Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss <SG-201>
Matte Photo Paper <MP-101>
Rear Tray
A4, Letter, 5"x7"(13x18cm), 8"x10"(20x25cm),
2L(127x178mm): 10 sheets
KG/4"x6"(10x15), L(89x127mm), Square 5", Hagaki:
20 sheets
Paper for making original goods:
Media Name <Model No.>
Photo Stickers (16 stickers per sheet) <PS-108>
Photo Stickers (Free Cutting) <PS-208>
Photo Stickers (Variety Pack) <PS-808>
Restickable Photo Paper <RP-101>
Removable Photo Stickers <PS-308R>
Magnetic Photo Paper <MG-101/PS-508>
Light Fabric Iron-on Transfers <LF-101>
Double sided Matte Paper <MP-101D>
Rear Tray
1 sheet
233
Paper other than Genuine Canon Paper
Common Name
Plain Paper (including recycled paper)
Envelopes
Rear Tray
Approx. 100 sheets (Legal,
B-Oficio, M-Oficio, Foolscap,
Legal(India): 10 sheets)
10 envelopes
Cassette
Approx. 250 sheets
N/A
*1 Normal feeding at maximum capacity may not be possible with some types of paper, or under very high or low temperature or humidity. In this case, load half the amount of paper or less.
*2 Feeding from a loaded stack of paper may leave marks on the printed side or prevent efficient feeding.
In this case, load one sheet at a time.
Paper Load Limit of Paper Output Tray
Genuine Canon Paper
Paper for printing documents:
Media Name <Model No.>
Canon Red Label Superior <WOP111>
Canon Océ Office Colour Paper <SAT213>
High Resolution Paper <HR-101N>
Paper Output Tray
Approx. 75 sheets
Approx. 65 sheets
Paper other than Genuine Canon Paper
Common Name
Plain Paper (including recycled paper)
Paper Output Tray
Approx. 75 sheets (Legal: 10 sheets)
When continuing printing with paper other than the above, we recommend removing already printed paper from the paper output tray to avoid smearing or discoloration.
234
Unsupported Media Types
Do not use the following types of paper. Using such paper will cause not only unsatisfactory results, but also the printer to jam or malfunction.
• • Folded, curled, or wrinkled paper
• • Damp paper
• • Paper thinner than a postcard, including plain paper or notepad paper cut to a small size (when printing on paper smaller than A5)
• • Picture postcards
• • Postcards affixed with photos or stickers
• • Envelopes with a double flap
• • Envelopes with an embossed or treated surface
• • Envelopes whose gummed flaps are already moistened and adhesive
• • Any type of paper with holes
• • Paper that is not rectangular
• • Paper bound with staples or glue
• • Paper with an adhesive surface on the back such as label seal
• • Paper decorated with glitter, etc.
235
Handling Paper
• • Be careful not to rub or scratch the surfaces of any types of paper when handling.
• • Hold the paper as closely as possible to its edges and try not to touch the printing surface. The print quality may be degraded if the printing surface is smudged with sweat or oil that comes from your hands.
• • Do not touch the printed surface until the ink is dried. Even when the ink is dried, be careful not to touch the printed surface as much as possible when handling. Due to the nature of the pigment ink, the ink on the printed surface may be removed when being rubbed or scratched.
• • Take out only the necessary number of paper from the package, just before printing.
• • To avoid curling, when you do not print, put unused paper back into the package and keep it on a level surface. And also, store it avoiding heat, humidity, and direct sunlight.
236
Economy Mode
By setting print quality to economy, the consumption of ink can be reduced. More printing is available compared with when print quality is set to standard.
• • Number of printable sheets (A4 plain paper)
Number of printable sheets per pigment black ink bottle
Standard mode: 6,000 sheets
Economy mode: 9,000 sheets
Number of printable sheets per pigment color ink bottle
Standard mode: 14,000 sheets
Economy mode: 21,000 sheets
• • Measurement conditions
◦ ◦ Measurement images:
Color printing: A4 color document ISO/IEC24712
◦ ◦ Measurement method:
Canon original
◦ ◦ Paper type:
Plain paper
◦ ◦ Print driver setting:
Setting to the default for plain paper (setting Quality to Economy ).
*The number of printable sheets is calculated based on the ink bottle filled from the second time on, instead of the ink bottle filled when the printer is used for the first time.
237
Printing
Printing from Smartphone/Tablet
Printing Using Operation Panel
Using PIXMA/MAXIFY Cloud Link
238
Printing from Computer
Printing from Application Software (Windows Printer Driver)
Printing from Application Software (macOS AirPrint)
Printing Using Canon Application Software
Printing from Chrome OS
239
Printing from Application Software (Windows Printer Driver)
Basic Printing Setup
Basic
Main Controls (Basic Settings Tab)
Set Media Type, Quality, etc. (Media/Quality Tab)
Set the Layout of Printed Documents (Page Setup Tab)
Overview of the Printer Driver
Updating the Driver
240
Basic Printing Setup
In the Basic Settings tab , you can print in various ways according to your purpose.
1.
Check that printer is turned on
2.
printer driver's setup screen
3.
Select Profile (A)
Select the print settings according to your purpose in Profiles on the Basic Settings tab.
If you select a print setting, Paper Size and Media Type will change automatically.
Note
• When the paper size to be printed is selected from Printer Paper Size , the zoom level is automatically set according to the selected paper size.
To select a zoom level of your choice, add a checkmark to Zoom and enter a number.
4.
Select Media Type (B) According to Requirements
5.
Set Paper
6.
Click OK
241
Note
• For details about the paper information to be registered to the printer driver and on the printer, see the following:
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
242
Main Controls (Basic Settings Tab)
Basic Settings Tab Description
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
243
Basic Settings Tab Description
The Basic Settings tab is for registering commonly used print settings. When you select a registered setting, the printer automatically switches to the preset items.
•
•
•
•
Always print with current settings
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1-sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing
•
Profiles
The names and icons of frequently used printing profiles are registered. When you select a printing profile according to the purpose of the document, settings that match the purpose are applied.
244
You can also change a printing profile and register it under a new name. You can delete the registered printing profile.
Standard
These are the factory settings.
If Page Size , Orientation , and Copies were set from the application software, those settings have priority.
Business Document
Select this setting when printing a general document.
If Page Size , Orientation , and Copies were set from the application software, those settings have priority.
Paper Saving
Select this setting to save paper when printing a general document. Page Layout is set to 2 on 1 , and 1-sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing is set to 2-sided Printing .
If Page Size , Orientation , and Copies were set from the application software, those settings have priority.
Photo Printing
If you select this setting when printing a photo, the photo paper and photo size generally used are set.
If Orientation and Copies were set from the application software, those settings have priority.
Envelope
If you select this setting for printing an envelope, Media Type is set automatically to Envelope . In the Envelope Size Setting dialog box, select the size of the envelope to be used.
Greeting Card
When selected for printing a greeting card, the Media Type is automatically set to Inkjet Greeting
Card . Quality will be set to High .
Note
• You cannot change the order of print settings.
Add...
Displays the
Click this button when you want to save the information that you set on the Basic Settings , Media/
Quality , and Page Setup tabs to Profiles .
Delete
Deletes a registered printing profile.
Select the name of the setting to be deleted from Profiles , and click Delete . When a confirmation message is displayed, click OK to delete the specified printing profile.
Note
• Printing profiles that are registered in the initial settings cannot be deleted.
Settings Preview
The paper illustration shows how the original will be laid out on a sheet of paper.
You can check an overall image of the layout.
245
Preview before printing
Shows what the print result will look like before you actually print the data.
Check this check box to display a preview before printing.
Uncheck this check box if you do not want to display a preview.
Always print with current settings
Prints documents with the current settings starting from the next print execution.
When you select this function and then close the
, the information that you set on the Basic Settings , Media/Quality , and Page Setup tabs are saved and printing with the same settings is possible starting from the next print execution.
Important
• If you log on with a different user name, the settings that were set when this function was enabled are not reflected in the print settings.
• If a setting was specified on the application software, it has priority.
Page Size
Selects a page size.
Ensure that you select the same page size as you selected within the application.
If you select Custom...
, the
opens and allows you to specify any vertical and horizontal dimensions for the paper size.
Printer Paper Size
Selects the size of paper actually loaded into the printer.
Normally, it will appear as Same as Page Size , and the document is printed with no scaling.
If you select a paper size that is smaller than the Page Size , the document size will be reduced. If you select a paper size that is larger, the document size will be enlarged.
Also if you select Custom...
, the Custom Paper Size dialog box opens and allows you to specify any
vertical and horizontal dimensions for the paper size.
Media Type
Selects a type of printing paper.
Select a media type that matches the paper that is loaded in the printer. This ensures that printing is carried out properly for the specified paper.
Quality
Selects your desired printing quality.
Select one of the following to set the print quality level that is appropriate for the purpose.
High
Gives priority to print quality over printing speed.
Standard
Prints with average speed and quality.
Economy
Reduces the amount of ink used when printing.
Note
• Selecting Economy in Quality reduces ink consumption. This means that you can print more than if you have Standard selected.
For details on Economy Mode, see "
."
246
Paper Source
Shows the source from which paper is supplied.
You may be able to switch the paper source with the printer driver.
Automatically Select
Based on the paper settings in the printer driver and the paper information registered on the printer, the printer automatically determines the paper source and feeds paper.
Rear Tray
Paper is always supplied from the rear tray.
Cassette
Paper is always supplied from the cassette.
Rear Flat Tray
Paper is always supplied from the rear flat tray.
Important
• Depending on the media type and size, the Paper Source settings that can be selected may differ.
Copies
Specifies the number of copies you want to print. You can specify a value from 1 to 999.
Important
• When the application software that you used to create the document has the same function, specify the settings on the printer driver. However, if the print results are not acceptable, specify the function settings on the application software.
Collate
Check this check box to group together the pages of each copy when you want to print multiple copies.
Uncheck this check box when you want to print with all pages of the same page number grouped together.
Important
• When the application software that you used to create the document has the same function, give priority to the printer driver settings. However, if the print results are not acceptable, specify the function settings on the application software. When you specify the number of copies and the printing order with both the application and this printer driver, the number of copies may be multiplied numbers of the two settings or the specified printing order may not be enabled.
Orientation
Selects the printing orientation.
If the application used to create your document has a similar function, select the same orientation that you selected in that application.
Portrait
Prints the document so that its top and bottom positions are unchanged relative to the paper feed direction. This is the default setting.
Landscape
Prints the document by rotating it 90 degrees relative to the paper feed direction.
You can change the rotation direction by going to the
Custom
Settings dialog box, and then using Rotate 90 degrees left when orientation is [Landscape] check box.
247
To rotate the document 90 degrees to the left when printing, select the Rotate 90 degrees left when orientation is [Landscape] check box.
Grayscale Printing
This function converts the data to monochrome data when printing your document.
Page Layout
Selects the size of the document you want to print and the type of printing.
1 on 1 to 16 on 1
Multiple pages of document can be printed on one sheet of paper.
To change the page order, click Preferences...
. In the Page Layout Printing dialog box
that appears, specify Page Order .
Poster (1 x 2) to Poster (4 x 4)
This function enables you to enlarge the image data and divide the enlarged data into several pages to be printed. You can also glue together these sheets of paper to create large printed matter, such as a poster.
Preferences...
Opens the Poster Printing dialog box
.
Click this button to set details on tiling/poster printing.
Zoom
Specifies an enlargement or reduction ratio for the document you want to print.
1-sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing
1-sided Printing
Select when performing single-sided printing.
2-sided Printing
Select when performing duplex printing.
Automatic
Selects whether duplex printing is to be performed automatically or manually.
To perform duplex printing manually, uncheck this check box.
Booklet Printing
The booklet printing function allows you to print data for a booklet. Data is printed on both sides of the paper. This type of printing ensures that pages can be collated properly, in page number order, when the printed sheets are folded and stapled at the center.
Automatic
Selects whether duplex printing is to be performed automatically or manually.
To perform duplex printing manually, uncheck this check box.
Preferences...
Opens the Booklet Printing dialog box .
Click this button to set details on booklet printing.
Binding Location
Selects the stapling margin position. The printer analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings, and automatically selects the best stapling margin position. Check Binding Location , and select from the list to change it.
To specify the width of the binding margin, set it from the Page Setup tab.
248
Printer Media Information...
Displays
Printer Media Information dialog box .
You can check the printer settings and apply the checked settings to the printer driver.
Defaults
Restores all the settings you have changed to their default values.
Click this button to return all settings on the Basic Settings , Media/Quality , and Page Setup tabs to their default values (factory settings).
Add to Profiles dialog box
This dialog box allows you to save the information that you set on the Basic Settings , Media/Quality , and Page Setup tabs and add the information to the Profiles list on the Basic Settings tab.
Name
Enter the name for the printing profile you wish to save.
Up to 255 characters can be entered.
The name appears, with its associated icon, in the Profiles list on the Basic Settings tab.
Options...
Opens the Add to Profiles dialog box
.
Changes the details of printing profile to be saved.
Add to Profiles dialog box
Select the icons of the printing profiles to be registered to Profiles , and change the items to be saved in the printing profiles.
Icon
Select the icon for the printing profile you wish to save.
The selected icon appears, with its name, in the Profiles list on the Basic Settings tab.
Save the paper size setting
Saves the paper size to the printing profile in Profiles .
To apply the saved paper size when the printing profile is selected, check this check box.
If this check box is unchecked, the paper size is not saved, and consequently the paper size setting is not applied when the printing profile is selected. Instead the printer prints with the paper size specified with the application software.
Save the orientation setting
Saves the Orientation to the printing profile in Profiles .
To apply the saved print orientation when the printing profile is selected, check this check box.
If this check box is unchecked, the print orientation is not saved, and consequently the Orientation setting is not applied when the printing profile is selected. Instead the printer prints with the print orientation specified with the application software.
Save the copies setting
Saves the Copies setting to the printing profile in Profiles .
To apply the saved copies setting when the printing profile is selected, check this check box.
If this check box is unchecked, the copies setting is not saved, and consequently the Copies setting is not applied when the printing profile is selected. Instead the printer prints with the copies setting specified with the application software.
249
Custom Paper Size dialog box
This dialog box allows you to specify the size (width and height) of the custom paper.
Units
Select the unit for entering a user-defined paper size.
Paper Size
Specifies the Width and the Height of the custom paper. Measurement is shown according to the units specified in Units .
Page Layout Printing dialog box
1This dialog box allows you to select the number of document pages to be placed on one sheet of paper, the page order, and whether a page border line is to be printed around each document page. The settings specified in this dialog box can be confirmed in the settings preview on the printer driver.
Page Order
Specifies the document orientation to be printed on a sheet of paper.
Page Border
Prints a page border line around each document page. Check this check box to print the page border line.
Poster Printing dialog box
This dialog box allows you to select the size of the image to be printed. You can also make settings for cut lines and paste markers which are convenient for pasting together the pages into a poster.
The settings specified in this dialog box can be confirmed in the settings preview on the printer driver.
Print "Cut/Paste" in margins
Specifies whether to print the words "Cut" and "Paste" in the margins. These words serve as guidelines for pasting together the pages into a poster. Check this check box to print the words.
Note
• Depending on the environment of the printer driver you are using, this function may not be available.
Print "Cut/Paste" lines in margins
Specifies whether to print cut lines that serve as guidelines for pasting together the pages into a poster. Check this check box to print the cut lines.
Print page range
Specifies the printing range. Select All under normal circumstances.
Select Pages to specify a specific page or range.
Note
• If some of the pages have not been printed well, specify the pages that do not need to be printed by clicking them in the settings preview of the Page Setup tab. Only the pages shown on the screen will be printed this time.
250
Booklet Printing dialog box
This dialog box allows you to set how to bind the document as a booklet. Printing only on one side and printing a page border, can also be set in this dialog box.
The settings specified in this dialog box can be confirmed in the settings preview on the printer driver.
Preview Icon
Shows the settings made on the Booklet Printing dialog box.
You can check what the document will look like when printed as a booklet.
Margin for stapling
Specifies which side of the booklet is to be stapled.
Insert blank page
Selects whether to print the document on one side or both sides of the booklet.
Check this check box to print the document on one side of the booklet and select the side to be left blank from the list.
Margin
Specifies the width of the stapling margin.
The specified width becomes the stapling margin from the center of the sheet.
Page Border
Prints a page border line around each document page.
Check this check box to print the page border line.
Printer Media Information dialog box
This dialog box allows you to check the printer settings and apply the checked settings to the printer driver.
Paper Source
Check the setting or select a new paper source.
Media Type
Displays the Media Type that is currently set on the printer.
To apply the displayed setting to the printer driver, click Set .
Page Size
Displays the Page Size that is currently set on the printer.
To apply the displayed setting to the printer driver, click Set .
251
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media
Type)
When you use this printer, selecting a media type and
paper size that matches the print purpose will help
you achieve the best print results.
Depending on the media type you are using, specify the media type settings on the printer driver or the printer's operation panel as described below.
Canon genuine papers (Document Printing)
Media name <Model No.> Media Type in the printer driver
Plain Paper
Paper information registered on the printer
Plain paper Canon Red Label Superior <WOP111>
Canon Océ Office Colour Paper <SAT213> Plain Paper Plain paper
High Resolution Paper <HR-101N> High Resolution Paper High-Res Paper
Canon genuine papers (Photo Printing)
Media name <Model No.> Media Type in the printer driver
Paper information registered on the printer
Photo Paper Plus Glossy II <PP-201/PP-208/
PP-301>
Photo Paper Pro Luster <LU-101>
Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss <SG-201>
Glossy Photo Paper "Everyday Use" <GP-501/
GP-508>
Photo Paper Glossy <GP-701>
Matte Photo Paper <MP-101>
Photo Paper Plus Glossy II Plus Glossy II
Photo Paper Pro Luster Pro Luster
Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss Plus Semi-gloss
Glossy Photo Paper
Glossy Photo Paper
Matte Photo Paper
Glossy
Glossy
Matte
Canon genuine papers (Original Product)
Media name <Model No.>
Restickable Photo Paper <RP-101>
Media Type in the printer driver
Glossy Photo Paper
Paper information registered on the printer
Glossy
Removable Photo Stickers <PS-308R> Glossy Photo Paper
Magnetic Photo Paper <MG-101/PS-508> Glossy Photo Paper
Glossy
Glossy
Light Fabric Iron-on Transfers <LF-101> Light Fabric Iron-on Transfers LF Iron Transfers
252
Double sided Matte Paper <MP-101D> Matte Photo Paper Matte
Commercially available papers
Media name
Plain Paper (including recycled paper)
Media Type in the printer driver
Paper information registered on the printer
Plain Paper Plain paper
Hammermill Premium Color Copy Cover 58 lb
(216 g /m2)
Thick Paper Others
Mondi Canon Top Colour Zero 67 lb (250 g /m2)
Envelopes
Thick Paper
Envelope
Others
Envelope
Window envelope
Kraft Paper
Embossed Paper
Washi
Label Paper
Greeting Cards
Card Stock
Envelope
High Resolution Paper
High Resolution Paper
Washi
Label Paper
Inkjet Greeting Card
Card Stock
Envelope
High-Res Paper
High-Res Paper
Others
Others
Others
Card stock
Note
• When printing to cardboard, select Card Stock from Media Type on the printer driver, and then print from the rear tray.
• For information on Washi that can be used with the printer, see "Print Using Washi."
253
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper
Size)
When you use this printer, selecting a paper size that matches the print purpose will help you achieve the best print results.
You can use the following paper sizes on this printer.
A6
A5
A4
B5
Printer Paper Size in the printer driver
Letter 8.5"x11" 22x28cm
Legal 8.5"x14" 22x36cm
Executive 7.25"x10.5" 184.2x266.7mm
B-Oficio 8.5"x14" 216.0x355.0mm
M-Oficio 8.50"x13.43" 216.0x341.0mm
Foolscap/F4/Oficio2
Legal (India) 8.46"x13.58" 215x345mm
4"x6" 10x15cm
5"x7" 13x18cm
7"x10" 18x25cm
8"x10" 20x25cm
L 89x127mm
2L 127x178mm
Square 5"x5" 13x13cm
Hagaki 100x148mm
Hagaki 2 200x148mm
Envelope Com 10
Envelope DL
Nagagata 3 4.72"x9.25"
A6
A5
A4
B5
Paper information registered on the printer
Letter
Legal
Executive
B-Oficio
M-Oficio
FC/F4/Oficio2
Legal(India)
KG/4"x6"(10x15)
2L/5"x7"(13x18)
7"x10"(18x25cm)
8"x10"(20x25cm)
L(89x127mm)
2L/5"x7"(13x18)
Square 5"
Hagaki
Hagaki 2
Envelope Com 10
Envelope DL
Nagagata 3
254
Nagagata 4 3.54"x8.07"
Yougata 4 4.13"x9.25"
Yougata 6 3.86"x7.48"
Nagagata 4
Yougata 4
Yougata 6
Envelope C5 Envelope C5
Envelope Monarch 3.88"x7.5" 98.4x190.5mm Envelope Monarch
Card 2.17"x3.58" 55x91mm
Custom Size
Card 2.17"x3.58"
Others
255
Printing on Postcards
1.
Load postcard
2.
printer driver setup window
3.
Select commonly used settings
Display the Basic Settings tab, and for Profiles , select Standard .
4.
Select the paper size
For Printer Paper Size , select Hagaki 100x148mm or Hagaki 2 200x148mm .
Important
• Return postcards can be used only when you print them from the computer.
• When printing a return postcard, always set the paper size to Hagaki 2 200x148mm from your application software or the printer driver.
• Do not fold the return postcard. If a crease is formed, the printer will not be able to feed the postcard properly, and this condition will cause line shifts or a paper jam.
5.
Select the media type
Select the Hagaki you want to use from Hagaki in Media Type .
Important
• This printer cannot print on postcards that have photos or stickers attached.
• When you use the automatic duplex printing function to print a postcard, print the address side first and then print the message side.
• When printing on each side of a postcard separately, you will get cleaner printing if you print the message side first and then print the address side.
• The paper settings on the printer driver are different, depending on whether you are printing on the address side or the message side.
For details about the paper information to be registered to the printer driver and on the printer, see the following:
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
• When you use the automatic duplex printing function, register the paper information for the side to be printed first.
6.
Set the print orientation
To print the address horizontally, set Orientation to Landscape .
7.
Select the print quality
For Quality , select the quality according to your purpose.
8.
Click OK
256
When you perform printing, the data will be printed onto the postcard.
257
Setting Up Envelope Printing
1.
Load envelope
on the printer
2.
printer driver setup window
3.
Select the media type
Select Envelope from Profiles on the Basic Settings tab.
4.
Select the paper size
When the Envelope Size Setting dialog box is displayed, select the envelope size you want to use, and then click OK .
5.
Set the orientation
To print the addressee horizontally, select Landscape for Orientation .
Note
• If Envelope Com 10 , Envelope DL , Yougata 4 4.13"x9.25" , Yougata 6 3.86"x7.48" , Envelope
C5 , or Envelope Monarch 3.88"x7.5" 98.4x190.5mm
is selected for Printer Paper Size , the printer rotates the paper 90 degrees to the left to print, regardless of the Rotate 90 degrees left when orientation is [Landscape] setting for Custom Settings
6.
Select the print quality
For Quality , select the quality according to your purpose.
7.
Click OK
When you perform print, the information is printed on the envelope.
Important
• When you perform envelope printing, guide messages are displayed.
To hide the guide messages, check the Do not show this message again check box.
To show the guide again, click the View Printer Status button on the Maintenance tab, and start the
Canon IJ Status Monitor.
Then click Envelope Printing from Display Guide Message of the Option menu to enable the setting.
258
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile
You can register the frequently used printing profile to Profiles on the Basic Settings tab. Unnecessary printing profiles can be deleted at any time.
Registering a Printing Profile
1.
printer driver setup window
2.
Set the necessary items
From Profiles on the Basic Settings tab, select the printing profile to be used and if necessary, change each of the settings.
You can also register necessary items on the Media/Quality and Page Setup tabs.
3.
Click Add...
The Add to Profiles dialog box opens.
259
4.
Save the settings
Enter a name for the print settings to register in the Name field. If necessary, click Options...
, set the items, and then click OK .
In the Add to Profiles dialog box, click OK to save the print settings and return to the Basic Settings tab.
The name and icon are displayed in Profiles .
Important
• To save the page size, orientation, and number of copies that was set in each sheet, click Options...
, and check each item.
Note
• When you re-install the printer driver or upgrade the printer driver version, the print settings that are already registered will be deleted from Profiles .
Registered print settings cannot be saved and preserved. If a profile is deleted, register the print settings again.
Deleting Unnecessary Printing Profile
1.
Select the printing profile to be deleted
Select the printing profile you want to delete from the Profiles list on the Basic Settings tab.
2.
Delete the printing profile
Click Delete . When the confirmation message appears, click OK .
The selected printing profile is deleted from the Profiles list.
Note
• Printing profiles that are registered in the initial settings cannot be deleted.
260
Set Media Type, Quality, etc. (Media/Quality Tab)
Media/Quality Tab Description
Adjust Colors
Specifying Color Correction
Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
Printing with ICC Profiles
261
Media/Quality Tab Description
The Media/Quality tab allows you to create a basic print setup in accordance with the media type. You can also adjust the print quality and color tones.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Settings Preview
The paper illustration shows how the original will be laid out on a sheet of paper.
You can check an overall image of the layout.
The printer illustration shows how to load paper to match the printer driver settings.
Check whether the printer is set up correctly by looking at the illustration before you start printing.
Media Type
Selects a type of printing paper.
Select a media type that matches the paper that is loaded in the printer. This ensures that printing is carried out properly for the specified paper.
Paper Source
Shows the source from which paper is supplied.
You may be able to switch the paper source with the printer driver.
262
Automatically Select
Based on the paper settings in the printer driver and the paper information registered on the printer, the printer automatically determines the paper source and feeds paper.
Rear Tray
Paper is always supplied from the rear tray.
Cassette
Paper is always supplied from the cassette.
Rear Flat Tray
Paper is always supplied from the rear flat tray.
Important
• Depending on the media type and size, the Paper Source settings that can be selected may differ.
Quality
Selects your desired printing quality.
Select one of the following to set the print quality level that is appropriate for the purpose.
Important
• Depending on the Media Type settings, the same print results may be produced even if the
Quality is changed.
High
Gives priority to print quality over printing speed.
Standard
Prints with average speed and quality.
Economy
Reduces the amount of ink used when printing.
Note
• Selecting Economy in Quality reduces ink consumption. This means that you can print more than if you have Standard selected.
For details on Economy Mode, see " Economy Mode
."
Color/Intensity
Selects color adjustment method.
Auto
Cyan , Magenta , Yellow , Brightness , Contrast , and so on are adjusted automatically.
Manual
Select when you set the individual settings such as Cyan , Magenta , Yellow , Brightness ,
Contrast , etc. and Color Correction method.
Set...
Select Manual for Color/Intensity to enable this button.
In the Manual Color Adjustment dialog box, you can adjust individual color settings such as
Cyan , Magenta , Yellow , Brightness , and Contrast
, and select the
Color Correction
.
263
Note
• If you want to use an ICC profile to adjust colors, use the Manual Color Adjustment dialog box to set the profile.
Grayscale Printing
This function converts the data to monochrome data when printing your document.
Check this check box to print a color document in monochrome.
Preview before printing
Shows what the print result will look like before you actually print the data.
Check this check box to display a preview before printing.
Defaults
Restores all the settings you have changed to their default values.
Clicking this button restores all the settings on the current screen to their default values (factory settings).
Color Adjustment Tab
This tab allows you to adjust the color balance by changing the settings of the Cyan , Magenta , Yellow ,
Brightness , and Contrast options.
Preview
Shows the effect of color adjustment.
The color and brightness change when each item is adjusted.
Note
• The graphic is in monochrome when the Grayscale Printing check box is checked.
View Color Pattern
Displays a pattern for checking color changes produced by color adjustment.
If you want to display the preview image with a color pattern, check this check box.
Cyan / Magenta / Yellow
Adjusts the strengths of Cyan , Magenta , and Yellow .
Moving the slider to the right makes a color stronger, and moving the slider to the left makes a color weaker.
You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50.
This adjustment changes the relative amount of ink of each color used, which alters the total color balance of the document. Use your application if you want to change the total color balance significantly. Use the printer driver only if you want to adjust the color balance slightly.
Brightness
Adjusts the brightness of your print. You cannot change the levels of pure white and black. However, the brightness of the colors between white and black can be changed. Moving the slider to the right brightens (dilutes) the colors, and moving the slider to the left darkens (intensifies) the colors. You can also directly enter brightness values that are linked to the slider bar. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50.
Contrast
Adjusts the contrast between light and dark in the image to be printed.
Moving the slider to the right increases the contrast, moving the slider to the left decreases the
264
contrast.
You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50.
Matching Tab
Allows you to select the method for adjusting colors to match the type of document to be printed.
Color Correction
Allows you to select Driver Matching , ICM , or None to match the purpose of the print operation.
Driver Matching
With Canon Digital Photo Color, you can print sRGB data with color tints that most people prefer.
ICM
Adjusts the colors by using an ICC profile when printing.
Important
• If the application software is set so that ICM is disabled, ICM is unavailable for Color
Correction and the printer may not be able to print the image data properly.
None
Disables color adjustment with the printer driver. Select this value when you are specifying an individually created printing ICC profile in an application software to print data.
265
Set the Layout of Printed Documents (Page Setup Tab)
Page Setup Tab Description
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order
266
Page Setup Tab Description
The Page Setup tab allows you to determine how a document is to be arranged on the paper. Also, this tab allows you to set the number of copies and the order of printing. If the application which created the document has a similar function, set them with the application.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1-sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing
•
•
•
•
Settings Preview
The paper illustration shows how the original will be laid out on a sheet of paper.
You can check an overall image of the layout.
The printer illustration shows how to load paper to match the printer driver settings.
Check whether the printer is set up correctly by looking at the illustration before you start printing.
267
Page Size
Selects a page size.
Ensure that you select the same page size as you selected within the application.
If you select Custom...
, the
opens and allows you to specify any vertical and horizontal dimensions for the paper size.
Printer Paper Size
Selects the size of paper actually loaded into the printer.
The default setting is Same as Page Size to perform normal-sized printing.
If you select a paper size that is smaller than the Page Size , the document size will be reduced. If you select a paper size that is larger, the document size will be enlarged.
Also if you select Custom...
, the Custom Paper Size dialog box opens and allows you to specify any
vertical and horizontal dimensions for the paper size.
Copies
Specifies the number of copies you want to print. You can specify a value from 1 to 999.
Important
• If the application used to create your document has a similar function, specify the number of copies with the application without specifying it here.
Print from Last Page
Check this check box when you want to print from the last page in order. If you do this, you do not need to sort the pages into their correct order after printing.
Uncheck this check box to print your document in normal order, starting from the first page.
Collate
Check this check box to group together the pages of each copy when you want to print multiple copies.
Uncheck this check box when you want to print with all pages of the same page number grouped together.
Important
• When the application software that you used to create the document has the same function, give priority to the printer driver settings. However, if the print results are not acceptable, specify the function settings on the application software. When you specify the number of copies and the printing order with both the application and this printer driver, the number of copies may be multiplied numbers of the two settings or the specified printing order may not be enabled.
Orientation
Selects the printing orientation.
If the application used to create your document has a similar function, select the same orientation that you selected in that application.
Portrait
Prints the document so that its top and bottom positions are unchanged relative to the paper feed direction. This is the default setting.
Landscape
Prints the document by rotating it 90 degrees relative to the paper feed direction.
You can change the rotation direction by going to the
Custom
Settings dialog box, and then using Rotate 90 degrees left when orientation is [Landscape] check box.
268
To rotate the document 90 degrees to the left when printing, select the Rotate 90 degrees left when orientation is [Landscape] check box.
Rotate 180 degrees
Prints the document by rotating it 180 degrees against the paper feed direction.
The width of print area and the amount of extension that are configured in other application software will be reversed vertically and horizontally.
Page Layout
Selects the size of the document you want to print and the type of printing.
1 on 1 to 16 on 1
Multiple pages of document can be printed on one sheet of paper. To change the page order, click
Preferences...
. In the Page Layout Printing dialog box that appears, specify
Page Order .
Poster (1 x 2) to Poster (4 x 4)
This function enables you to enlarge the image data and divide the enlarged data into several pages to be printed.
You can also glue together these sheets of paper to create large printed matter, such as a poster.
Preferences...
Opens the Poster Printing dialog box
.
Click this button to set details on tiling/poster printing.
Zoom
Specifies an enlargement or reduction ratio for the document you want to print.
1-sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing
1-sided Printing
Select when performing single-sided printing.
2-sided Printing
Select when performing duplex printing.
Automatic
Selects whether duplex printing is to be performed automatically or manually.
To perform duplex printing manually, uncheck this check box.
Booklet Printing
The booklet printing function allows you to print data for a booklet. Data is printed on both sides of the paper. This type of printing ensures that pages can be collated properly, in page number order, when the printed sheets are folded and stapled at the center.
Automatic
Selects whether duplex printing is to be performed automatically or manually.
To perform duplex printing manually, uncheck this check box.
Preferences...
Opens the Booklet Printing dialog box . Click this button to set details on booklet printing.
Binding Location
Selects the stapling margin position.
The printer analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings, and automatically selects the best stapling margin position. Check Binding Location , and select from the list to change it. To specify the width of the binding margin, set it from the Page Setup tab.
Specify Margin...
Opens the Specify Margin dialog box
. You can specify the width of the margin.
269
Print Options...
Opens the Print Options dialog box .
Changes detailed printer driver settings for print data that is sent from applications.
Stamp/Background...
Opens the Stamp/Background dialog box
.
The Stamp function allows you to print a stamp text or a bitmap over or behind document data. It also allows you to print date, time and user name. The Background function allows you to print a light illustration behind the document data.
Depending on the environment, Stamp and Background may not be available.
Defaults
Restores all the settings you have changed to their default values.
Clicking this button restores all the settings on the current screen to their default values (factory settings).
Custom Paper Size dialog box
This dialog box allows you to specify the size (width and height) of the custom paper.
Units
Select the unit for entering a user-defined paper size.
Paper Size
Specifies the Width and the Height of the custom paper. Measurement is shown according to the units specified in Units .
Page Layout Printing dialog box
This dialog box allows you to select the number of document pages to be placed on one sheet of paper, the page order, and whether a page border line is to be printed around each document page.
The settings specified in this dialog box can be confirmed in the settings preview on the printer driver.
Page Order
Specifies the document orientation to be printed on a sheet of paper.
Page Border
Prints a page border line around each document page.
Check this check box to print the page border line.
Poster Printing dialog box
This dialog box allows you to select the size of the image to be printed. You can also make settings for cut lines and paste markers which are convenient for pasting together the pages into a poster.
The settings specified in this dialog box can be confirmed in the settings preview on the printer driver.
Print "Cut/Paste" in margins
Specifies whether to print the words "Cut" and "Paste" in the margins. These words serve as guidelines for pasting together the pages into a poster.
Check this check box to print the words.
270
Note
• Depending on the environment of the printer driver you are using, this function may not be available.
Print "Cut/Paste" lines in margins
Specifies whether to print cut lines that serve as guidelines for pasting together the pages into a poster.
Check this check box to print the cut lines.
Print page range
Specifies the printing range. Select All under normal circumstances.
Select Pages to specify a specific page or range.
Note
• If some of the pages have not been printed well, specify the pages that do not need to be printed by clicking them in the settings preview of the Page Setup tab. Only the pages shown on the screen will be printed this time.
Booklet Printing dialog box
This dialog box allows you to set how to bind the document as a booklet. Printing only on one side and printing a page border, can also be set in this dialog box.
The settings specified in this dialog box can be confirmed in the settings preview on the printer driver.
Preview Icon
Shows the settings made on the Booklet Printing dialog box.
You can check what the document will look like when printed as a booklet.
Margin for stapling
Specifies which side of the booklet is to be stapled.
Insert blank page
Selects whether to print the document on one side or both sides of the booklet.
Check this check box to print the document on one side of the booklet and select the side to be left blank from the list.
Margin
Specifies the width of the stapling margin.
The specified width becomes the stapling margin from the center of the sheet.
Page Border
Prints a page border line around each document page.
Check this check box to print the page border line.
Specify Margin dialog box
This dialog box allows you to specify the margin width for the side to be stapled. If a document does not fit on one page, the document is reduced when printed.
271
Margin
Specifies the width of the stapling margin.
The width of the side specified by Binding Location becomes the stapling margin.
Print Options dialog box
Makes changes to print data that is sent to the printer.
Depending on the environment, this function may not be available.
Disable ICM required from the application software
Disables the ICM function required from the application software.
When an application software uses Windows ICM to print data, unexpected colors may be produced or the printing speed may decrease. If these problems occur, checking this check box may resolve the problems.
Important
• Uncheck this check box under normal circumstances.
• This function does not work when ICM is selected for Color Correction on the Matching tab of the Manual Color Adjustment dialog box.
Disable the color profile setting of the application software
Checking this check box disables information in the color profile that was set on the application software.
When the information in the color profile set on the application software is output to the printer driver, the print result may contain unexpected colors. If this happens, checking this check box may resolve the problem.
Important
• Uncheck this check box under normal circumstances.
• Even when this check box is checked, only some of the information in the color profile is disabled, and the color profile can still be used for printing.
Disable the paper source setting of the application software
Disables the paper feed method that is set by the application.
With some applications such as Microsoft Word, the data may be printed with a feed method that differs from the printer driver setting. In this case, check this function.
Important
• When this function is enabled, normally the paper feeding method cannot be changed from the
Canon IJ Preview.
Ungroup Papers
Sets the display method of Media Type , Page Size , and Printer Paper Size .
To display the items separately, select the check box.
To display the items as a group, clear the check box.
Do not allow application software to compress print data
Compression of the application software print data is prohibited.
If the print result has missing image data or unintended colors, selecting this check box may improve the condition.
272
Important
• Uncheck this check box under normal circumstances.
Print after creating print data by page
The print data is created in page units, and printing starts after the processing of one page of print data is complete.
If a printed document contains unintended results such as streaks, selecting this check box may improve the results.
Important
• Uncheck this check box under normal circumstances.
Print barcodes clearly
If you add a checkmark, it might solve readability issues with barcodes.
Important
• 2D barcodes are not supported.
• Print speed might become slower.
• The desired effectiveness might not be achieved.
Improve bleeding and thickened black text/lines (plain paper)
If you add a checkmark, it may improve blurring in text and lines when printing on plain paper.
Prevention of Print Data Loss
You can reduce the size of the print data that was created with the application software and then print the data.
Depending on the application software being used, the image data may be cut off or may not be printed properly. In such cases, select On . If you will not be using this function, select Off .
Important
• When using this function, the print quality may drop depending on the print data.
Unit of Print Data Processing
Selects the processing unit of the print data to be sent to the printer.
Select Recommended under normal circumstances.
Important
• A large amount of memory may be used for certain settings.
Do not change the setting if your computer has a small amount of memory.
Specify print start position
Select this to make fine adjustments to the print start position.
Click Set...
to display the Print Start Position dialog box and configure the print start position.
Stamp/Background dialog box
Depending on the environment, Stamp and Background may not be available.
The Stamp/Background dialog box allows you to print a stamp and/or background over or behind the document pages. In addition to the pre-registered ones, you can register and use your original stamp or background.
273
Stamp
Stamp printing is a function that prints a stamp over a document.
Check this check box and select a title from the list to print a stamp.
Define Stamp...
Opens the Stamp Settings dialog box .
You can check the details of a selected stamp or save a new stamp.
Place stamp over text
Sets how the stamp is to be printed over the document.
Check the Stamp check box to enable this.
Check this check box to print a stamp over the printed document page. The printed data may be hidden behind the stamp.
Uncheck this check box to print the document data over the stamp. The printed data will not be hidden behind the stamp. However, the sections of the stamp that are overlapped by the document may be hidden.
Stamp first page only
Selects whether the stamp is to be printed on the first page only or on all pages when the document has two or more pages.
Check the Stamp check box to enable this.
Check this check box to print a stamp on the first page only.
Background
Background printing is a function that allows you to print an illustration or a similar object (bitmap) behind the document.
Check this check box to print a background and select a title from the list.
Select Background...
Opens the Background Settings dialog box .
You can register a bitmap as a background, and change layout method and intensity of the selected background.
Background first page only
Selects whether to print the background on the first page only or print on all pages when the document has two or more pages.
Check the Background check box to enable this.
Check this check box to print a background on the first page only.
Stamp Tab
The Stamp tab allows you to set the text and bitmap file (.bmp) to be used for a stamp.
Preview Window
Shows the status of the stamp configured in each tab.
Stamp Type
Specifies the stamp type.
Select Text to create a stamp with characters. Select Bitmap to create with a bitmap file. Select
Date/Time/User Name to display the creation date/time and user name of the printed document.
The setting items in the Stamp tab change depending on the selected type.
274
• For Text registration, the characters must already be entered in Stamp Text . If necessary, change the TrueType Font , Style , Size , and Outline settings. You can select the color of the stamp by clicking Select Color...
.
• For Bitmap , click Select File...
and select the bitmap file (.bmp) to be used. If necessary, change the settings of the Size and Transparent white area .
• For Date/Time/User Name , the creation date/time and user name of the printed object are displayed in Stamp Text . If necessary, change the settings of TrueType Font , Style , Size , and Outline . You can select the color of the stamp by clicking Select Color...
.
When Stamp Type is Text or Date/Time/User Name
Stamp Text
Specifies the stamp text string.
Up to 64 characters can be entered.
For Date/Time/User Name , the creation date/time and user name of the printed object are displayed in Stamp Text .
TrueType Font
Selects the font for the stamp text string.
Style
Selects the font style for the stamp text string.
Size
Selects the font size for the stamp text string.
Outline
Selects a frame that encloses the stamp text string.
If a large font size is selected for Size , characters may extend outside of the stamp border.
Color/Select Color...
Shows the current color for the stamp.
To select a different color, click Select Color...
to open the Color dialog box, and select or create a color you wish to use as a stamp.
When Stamp Type is Bitmap
File
Specifies the name of the bitmap file to be used as the stamp.
Select File...
Opens the dialog box to open a file.
Click this button to select a bitmap file to be used as a stamp.
Size
Adjusts the size of the bitmap file to be used as a stamp.
Moving the slider to the right increases the size, moving the slider to the left decreases the size.
Transparent white area
Specifies whether to make white-filled areas of the bitmap transparent.
Check this check box to make white-filled areas of the bitmap transparent.
275
Note
• Click Defaults to set Stamp Type to text, Stamp Text to blank, TrueType Font to Arial, Style to
Regular, Size to 36 points, Outline unchecked, and Color to gray with the RGB values (192, 192,
192).
Placement Tab
The Placement tab allows you to set the position where the stamp is to be printed.
Preview Window
Shows the status of the stamp configured in each tab.
Position
Specifies the stamp position on the page.
Selecting Custom from the list allows you to enter values for the X-Position and Y-Position coordinates directly.
You can also change the stamp position by dragging the stamp in the preview window.
Rotation
Specifies the angle of rotation for the stamp. The angle can be set by entering the number of degrees.
Negative values rotate the stamp clockwise.
Note
• Rotation is enabled only when Text or Date/Time/User Name is selected for Stamp Type on the Stamp tab.
Note
• Click Defaults to set the stamp position to Center and the rotation to "0."
Save settings Tab
The Save settings tab allows you to register a new stamp or delete an unnecessary stamp.
Title
Enter the title to save the stamp you created.
Up to 64 characters can be entered.
Note
• Spaces, tabs, and returns cannot be entered at the beginning or end of a title.
Stamps
Shows a list of saved stamp titles.
Specify a title to display the corresponding stamp in Title .
Save/Save overwrite
Saves the stamp.
Enter a title in Title , and then click this button.
Delete
Deletes an unnecessary stamp.
Specify the title of an unnecessary stamp from the Stamps list, and click this button.
276
Background Tab
The Background tab allows you to select a bitmap file (.bmp) to be used as a background or determine how to print the selected background.
Preview Window
Shows the status of the bitmap set on the Background tab.
File
Specifies the name of the bitmap file to be used as the background.
Select File...
Opens the dialog box to open a file.
Click this button to select a bitmap file (.bmp) to be used as the background.
Layout Method
Specifies how the background image is to be placed on the paper.
When Custom is selected, you can set coordinates for X-Position and Y-Position .
You can also change the background position by dragging the image in the preview window.
Intensity
Adjusts the intensity of the bitmap to be used as a background.
Moving the slider to the right increases the intensity, and moving the slider to the left decreases the intensity. To print the background at the original bitmap intensity, move the slider to the rightmost position.
Note
• Depending on the environment, this function may not be available.
• Click Defaults to set File to blank, Layout Method to Fill page , and the Intensity slider to the middle.
Save settings Tab
The Save settings tab allows you to register a new background or delete an unnecessary background.
Title
Enter the title to save the background image you specified.
Up to 64 characters can be entered.
Note
• Spaces, tabs, and returns cannot be entered at the beginning or end of a title.
Backgrounds
Shows a list of registered background titles.
Specify a title to display the corresponding background in Title .
Save/Save overwrite
Saves the image data as a background.
After inserting the Title , click this button.
277
Delete
Deletes an unnecessary background.
Specify the title of an unnecessary background from the Backgrounds list, and then click this button.
278
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order
You can also set the number of copies on the Basic Settings tab.
1.
printer driver setup window
2.
Specify the number of copies to be printed
For Copies on the Page Setup tab, specify the number of copies to be printed.
3.
Specify the print order
Check the Print from Last Page check box when you want to print from the last page in order, and uncheck the check box when you want to print from the first page.
Check the Collate check box when you are printing multiple copies of a document and want to print out all pages in each copy together. Uncheck this check box when you want to print all pages with the same page number together.
• Print from Last Page : / Collate :
• Print from Last Page : / Collate :
• Print from Last Page : / Collate :
• Print from Last Page : / Collate :
4.
Click OK
When you perform print, the specified number of copies will be printed with the specified printing order.
279
Important
• When the application software that you used to create the document has the same function, specify the settings on the printer driver. However, if the print results are not acceptable, specify the function settings on the application software. When you specify the number of copies and the printing order with both the application software and this printer driver, the number of copies may be multiplied numbers of the two settings or the specified printing order may not be enabled.
Note
• By setting both Print from Last Page and Collate , you can perform printing so that papers are collated one by one starting from the last page.
280
Page Layout Printing
The page layout printing function allows you to print more than one page image on a single sheet of paper.
1.
printer driver setup window
2.
Set page layout printing
Select a page layout number from 1 on 1 to 16 on 1 from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
3.
Select the print paper size
Select the size of the paper loaded in the printer from the Printer Paper Size list.
4.
Set the number of pages to be printed on one sheet and the page order
If necessary, click Preferences...
, specify the following settings in the Page Layout Printing dialog box, and click OK .
Page Order
To change the page arrangement order, select a placement method from the list.
Page Border
To print a page border around each document page, check this check box.
5.
Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you perform print, the specified number of pages will be arranged on each sheet of paper in the specified order.
281
Duplex Printing
You can also set duplex printing in the Basic Settings tab.
Performing Automatic Duplex Printing
You can perform the duplex printing without having to turn over the paper.
1.
printer driver setup window
2.
Set automatic duplex printing
Select 2-sided Printing for 1-sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing on the Page Setup tab. Confirm that
Automatic is checked.
3.
Select the layout
Select the layout you want to use from the Page Layout list.
4.
Specify the side to be stapled
The best Binding Location is selected automatically from the Orientation and Page Layout settings.
To change the setting, select another stapling side from the Binding Location list.
5.
Set the margin width
If necessary, click Specify Margin...
and set the margin width, and then click OK .
6.
Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you perform print, duplex printing will be started.
Performing Duplex Printing Manually
You can perform the duplex printing manually.
1.
printer driver setup window
2.
Set duplex printing
282
Select 2-sided Printing from 1-sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing on the Page Setup tab. Uncheck the
Automatic check box.
3.
Select the layout
Select the layout you want to use from the Page Layout list.
4.
Specify the side to be stapled
The best Binding Location is selected automatically from the Orientation and Page Layout settings.
To change the setting, select another stapling side from the Binding Location list.
5.
Set the margin width
If necessary, click Specify Margin...
and set the margin width, and then click OK .
6.
Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you perform print, the document is first printed on one side of a sheet of paper. After one side is printed, reload the paper correctly according to the message.
Then tap Start print on the printer operation panel to print the opposite side.
Important
• Automatic duplex printing can be performed only when one of the following paper sizes is selected from
Page Size on the Page Setup tab.
Letter 8.5"x11" 22x28cm , A5 , A4 , B5 , Hagaki 100x148mm
• After printing the front page, there is an ink drying wait time before starting to print the back page
(Operation stops temporarily). Do not touch the paper during this time. You can change the ink drying wait time at Custom Settings in the Canon IJ Printer Assistant Tool.
• When you use the automatic duplex printing function to print a postcard, print the address side first and then print the message side.
283
Overview of the Printer Driver
Canon IJ Printer Driver
Opening Printer Driver's Setup Screen
Canon IJ Status Monitor
Instructions for Use (Printer Driver)
284
Canon IJ Printer Driver
The Canon IJ printer driver (simply called printer driver below) is software that you install onto your computer so that it can communicate with the printer.
The printer driver converts the print data created by your application software into data that your printer can understand, and sends the converted data to the printer.
Because different models support different print data formats, you need a printer driver for the specific model you are using.
Installing the Printer Driver
To install the printer driver, install the driver from the Setup CD-ROM or our website.
Specifying the Printer Driver
To specify the printer driver, open the Print dialog box of the application software you are using, and select "Canon XXX" (where "XXX" is your model name).
Displaying the Manual from the Printer Driver
To display the description of a setup tab from the printer driver's setup screen, click Help on that tab.
Related Topic
Opening Printer Driver's Setup Screen
285
Opening Printer Driver's Setup Screen
You can display the printer driver's setup screen from your application software or by clicking the printer icon.
Displaying the Printer Driver's Setup Screen from Your Application
Software
Perform this procedure to set up the print settings during printing.
1.
Select print command from application software
The Print command can generally be found in the File menu.
2.
Select your printer model, and click Preferences (or Properties )
The printer driver's setup screen appears.
Note
• Depending on the application software you are using, the command and menu names, and the number of steps may vary. For details, refer to the operating instructions of your application software.
Displaying the Printer Driver's Setup Screen by Clicking the Printer Icon
From the setup screen you can perform printer maintenance operations such as print head cleaning, or set print settings to be shared by all application software.
1.
Select Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Devices and Printers
2.
Right-click the icon of your model. When the menu appears, select Printing preferences
The printer driver's setup screen appears.
Important
• Opening the printer driver setup window through Printer properties displays such tabs regarding the Windows functions as the Ports (or Advanced ) tab. Those tabs do not appear when opening through Printing preferences or application software. For tabs regarding Windows functions, refer to the user's manual for the Windows.
286
Canon IJ Status Monitor
The Canon IJ Status Monitor displays the printer status and the printing progress. The printer status is shown by the icons and messages in the status monitor.
Launching the Canon IJ Status Monitor
The Canon IJ Status Monitor launches automatically when print data is sent to the printer. When launched, the Canon IJ Status Monitor appears as a button on the task bar.
Click the button of the status monitor displayed on the task bar. The Canon IJ Status Monitor appears.
Note
• To open the Canon IJ Status Monitor when the printer is not printing, open the
printer driver setup window and click
View Printer Status on the Maintenance tab.
• The information displayed on the Canon IJ Status Monitor may differ depending on the country or region where you are using your printer.
When Errors Occur
The Canon IJ Status Monitor is automatically displayed if an error occurs (e.g., if the printer runs out of paper or if the ink is low).
In such cases, take the appropriate action as described.
Related Topic
Canon IJ Status Monitor Description
287
Instructions for Use (Printer Driver)
This printer driver is subject to the following restrictions. Keep the following points in mind when using the printer driver.
Restrictions on the Printer Driver
• Depending on the document type to be printed, the paper feed method specified in the printer driver may not operate correctly.
If this happens, open the printer driver setup window
from the Print dialog box of the application software, and check the setting in the Paper Source field on the Media/Quality tab.
• With some applications, the Copies setting in the Page Setup tab of the printer driver may not be enabled.
In this case, use the copies setting in the Print dialog box of the application software.
• If the selected Language in the About dialog box of the Maintenance tab does not match the operating system interface language, the printer driver setup window may not be displayed properly.
• Do not change the Advanced tab items of the printer properties. If you change any of the items, you will not be able to use the following functions correctly.
Also, if Print to file is selected in the Print dialog box of the application software and with applications that prohibit EMF spooling, the following functions will not operate.
◦ Preview before printing on the Media/Quality tab
◦ Prevention of Print Data Loss in the Print Options dialog box on the Page Setup tab
◦ Automatic when 2-sided Printing is selected from 1-sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing on the
Page Setup tab
◦ Booklet Printing in 1-sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing on the Page Setup tab
◦ Print from Last Page , Collate , Specify Margin...
, and Stamp/Background...
on the Page
Setup tab
• Since the resolution in the preview display differs from the printing resolution, text and lines in the preview display may appear different from the actual print result.
• With some applications, the printing is divided into multiple print jobs.
To cancel printing, delete all divided print jobs.
• If image data is not printed correctly, display the Print Options dialog box from the Page Setup tab and change the setting of Disable ICM required from the application software . This may solve the problem.
• If you are using a model that has a card slot, the card slot of the printer may become inaccessible. In such cases, restart the printer or turn it off and reconnect the USB cable.
Points to Note About Applications with Restrictions
• There are following restrictions in Microsoft Word (Microsoft Corporation).
◦ When Microsoft Word has the same printing functions as the printer driver, use Word to specify them.
◦ When a setting from 2 on 1 to 16 on 1 or Zoom is used for Page Layout on the Page Setup tab of the printer driver, the document may not print normally in certain versions of Word.
288
◦ When Page Size in Word is set to "XXX Enlarge/Reduce," the document may not print normally in certain versions of Word.
If this happens, follow the procedure below.
1. Open Word's Print dialog box.
2. Open the
printer driver setup window , and on the
Page Setup tab, set Page Size to the same paper size that you specified in Word.
3. Set Booklet Printing in Page Layout or 1-sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing according to your requirements.
4. Click OK to close the window.
5. Without starting printing, close the Print dialog box.
6. Open Word's Print dialog box again.
7. Open the printer driver setup window and click OK .
8. Start printing.
• If bitmap printing is enabled in Adobe Illustrator (Adobe Incorporated), printing may take time or some data may not be printed. Print after unchecking the Bitmap Printing check box in the Print dialog box.
289
Maintenance Tab Description
The Maintenance tab allows you to start the Canon IJ Printer Assistant Tool or check the status of the printer.
Maintenance and Preferences
Canon IJ Printer Assistant Tool is started.
You can perform printer maintenance or change the settings of the printer.
Custom Settings
Opens the Custom Settings dialog box .
Perform this function to change the settings of this printer.
Note
• If the printer is off or if communication between the printer and the computer is disabled, an error message may appear because the computer cannot collect the printer status.
If this happens, click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer.
View Printer Status
Starts the Canon IJ Status Monitor.
Perform this function when you want to check the printer status and how a print job is proceeding.
290
About
The version of the printer driver, plus a copyright notice, can be checked.
In addition, the language to be used can be switched.
Custom Settings dialog box
When you click Custom Settings , the Custom Settings dialog box is displayed.
If necessary, switch between various modes of printer operation.
Rotate 90 degrees left when orientation is [Landscape]
On the Page Setup tab, you can change the rotation direction of the Landscape in the Orientation .
To rotate the print data 90 degrees to the right during printing, uncheck this check box.
Important
• Do not change this setting while the print job is displayed in the print wait list. Otherwise, characters may be omitted or the layout may become corrupt.
Note
• If Envelope Com 10 , Envelope DL , Yougata 4 4.13"x9.25" , Yougata 6 3.86"x7.48" , Envelope
C5 , or Envelope Monarch 3.88"x7.5" 98.4x190.5mm
is selected for Page Size on the Page
Setup tab, the printer rotates the paper 90 degrees to the left to print, regardless of the Rotate
90 degrees left when orientation is [Landscape] setting.
Do not detect mismatched paper settings when printing from a computer
When you print documents from your computer, the paper settings in the printer driver and the paper information registered on the printer do not match, this setting disables the message display and allows you to continue printing.
To disable detection of paper setting mismatches, check this check box.
About dialog box
When you click About , the About dialog box is displayed.
This dialog box displays the version, copyright, and module list of the printer driver. You can select the language to be used and switch the language displayed in the setup window.
Modules
Lists the printer driver modules.
Language
Specifies the language you wish to use in the printer driver setup window
.
Important
• If the font for displaying the language of your choice is not installed in your system, the characters will be garbled.
291
Allow Google Analytics to send information
To stop sending information, uncheck this check box.
The check box appears only if a user with administrator privileges is logged on. If information is not provided, the check box will not appear.
292
Canon IJ Status Monitor Description
The Canon IJ Status Monitor displays the printer status and the printing progress. The printer status is shown by the icons and messages in the status monitor.
Features of the Canon IJ Status Monitor
The Canon IJ Status Monitor has the following functions:
Onscreen display of printer status
The status monitor displays the printer status in real-time.
You can check the progress of each document to be printed (print job).
Display of error content and correction procedure
The status monitor displays information on any errors that occur on the printer.
You can then immediately check what sort of action to perform.
Overview of the Canon IJ Status Monitor
The Canon IJ Status Monitor displays icons and messages related to printer status and ink.
During printing, you can check information about the document being printed and the print progress.
If an error occurs, the status monitor displays the error content and instructions on how to correct the error. Follow the message instructions.
Printer
Canon IJ Status Monitor shows an icon when a warning or error occurs to the printer.
: There is a warning.
: There has been an operator error.
: There is a notice about something other than a warning or an error.
: There has been an error which requires a service.
293
Document Name
Name of the document being printed.
Owner
Owner's name of the document being printed.
Printing Page
Page number of current page and the total page count.
Display Print Queue
The print queue, which controls the current document and documents waiting to be printed.
Cancel Printing
Cancels printing.
About Ink
Displays messages about ink.
Ink Model Number
You can look up the correct ink model number for your printer.
Estimated Maintenance Cartridge Usage
Displays icons to report that the available space in the maintenance cartridge is low or the cartridge is full.
Click (the disclosure triangle) to display a pictorial representation of the estimated usage amount in the maintenance cartridge.
Option Menu
If a printer message appears, select Enable Status Monitor to start the Canon IJ Status
Monitor.
Select Enable Status Monitor to use the following commands:
Always Display Current Job
Displays the Canon IJ Status Monitor whenever a document is being printed.
Always Display on Top
Displays the Canon IJ Status Monitor in front of other windows.
Display Guide Message
Displays guide messages for complicated paper setting operations.
Envelope Printing
Displays a guide message when envelope printing starts.
To hide this guide message, select the Do not show this message again check box.
To display the guide message again, open the Option menu, select Display Guide
Message , click Envelope Printing , and enable this setting.
Display Warning Automatically
When a Maintenance Cartridge Warning Occurs
When a maintenance cartridge remaining space warning occurs, the Canon IJ status monitor starts automatically and appears in front of all other windows.
Start when Windows is Started
Automatically starts the Canon IJ Status Monitor when Windows is started.
294
Remote UI menu
You are able to open the printer's Remote User Interface.
You are able to check the printer status and run maintenance functions on the printer when connected to and using it through a network.
Note
• When the printer is being used via USB connection Remote UI will not display.
Printer Information
Allows you check detailed information, such as the printer status, the print progress, and remaining ink levels.
Maintenance
Allows you to run printer maintenance and change printer settings.
Download Security Certificate
Displays the For secure communication window.
This window allows you to download the route certificate, register it to the browser, and disable warning displays.
Help Menu
Select this menu to display Help information for the Canon IJ Status Monitor including version and copyright information.
Related Topic
295
Updating the Driver
Drivers include a printer driver and MP Drivers. The MP Drivers include a printer driver, ScanGear (scanner driver), and fax driver.
By updating the Driver to the latest version of the Driver, unresolved problems may be solved.
Important
• Check the following if you want to install or delete drivers.
Log on as a user who has the administrator account.
Terminate all running applications.
•
•
Deleting the Unnecessary Driver
Installing the Driver
1.
Turn on the printer
2.
Start the installer
Double-click the icon of the downloaded file.
The installation program starts.
3.
Install the driver
Take the appropriate action as described on the screen.
4.
Complete the installation
Click Exit .
Depending on the environment you are using, a message prompting you to restart the computer may be displayed. To complete the installation properly, restart the computer.
Important
• You can download the driver for free, but any Internet access charges incurred are your responsibility.
Deleting the Unnecessary Driver
The printer driver which you no longer use can be deleted.
1.
Start the uninstaller
Select Control Panel -> Programs -> Programs and Features .
From the program list, select "Canon XXX MP Drivers" (where "XXX" is your model name) and then click Uninstall.
The confirmation window for uninstalling the model appears.
296
2.
Perform the uninstaller
Click Start . When the confirmation message appears, click Yes .
When all the files have been deleted, click Complete .
The deletion of the Driver is complete.
297
Printing from Application Software (macOS AirPrint)
Printing
Basic
Printing on Postcards
Adding Printer
How to Open Printer Settings Screen
Displaying the Printing Status Screen
Deleting the Undesired Print Job
Removing Printer That Is No Longer Required from List of Printers
298
Printing
This printer is compatible with the macOS standard printing system (AirPrint).
You can start printing right away after connecting this printer to your Mac without installing any special software.
Checking Your Environment
First, check your environment.
• • AirPrint Operation Environment
Mac running the latest version of OS
• • Requirement
The Mac and the printer must be connected by one of the following methods:
◦ Connected to the same network over a LAN
◦ Connected directly without wireless router (Direct Connection)
◦ Connected by USB
Print from a Mac
1.
Check that printer is turned on
Note
• If Auto power on is enabled, printer automatically turns itself on when receiving a print job.
2.
Load paper
in printer
3.
Select paper size and paper type from printer
Register the set paper size and paper type on the printer operation panel.
For instructions, see "
."
4.
Start printing from your application software
The Print dialog opens.
5.
Select printer
Select your model from the Printer list in the Print dialog.
299
Note
• Click Show Details to switch the setup window to the detailed display.
6.
Check print settings
Set items such as Paper Size to the appropriate size, as well as Feed from and Media Type from
Media & Quality of the pop-up menu.
Remove the Two-Sided check mark if you are not printing on both sides of the paper.
Important
• An error may occur if the paper size set in the print dialog is different from the paper size registered on the printer. Select the correct items on the print dialog and the printer that correspond to the paper being printed.
• If you selected Auto Select in Feed from , the feed position will be different. Only A4 , A5 , JIS
B5 , Executive , and US Letter plain paper can be fed from the cassette (main tray).
• If printing paper such as photo paper and postcards that cannot be printed on both sides, uncheck the Two-Sided checkbox.
300
Note
• Use the Print dialog to set general print settings such as the layout and the print sequence.
For information about print settings, refer to macOS help.
7.
Click Print
The printer prints according to the specified settings.
Important
• If you are performing large-format printing, make sure that there is plenty of remaining ink.
• If you set a custom paper size in Paper Size and set it to a length longer than the specified length, the data will be printed with the "Media Type: Plain Paper, Print Quality: Standard" setting.
Note
• It can take the Wi-Fi a few minutes to get connected after the printer turns on. Print after checking that the printer is connected to the network.
• You cannot print if Bonjour settings of printer are disabled. Check LAN settings of printer and enable
Bonjour settings.
• Refer to "Cannot Print Using AirPrint" for printing problems.
• The display of the settings screen may differ depending on the application software you are using.
Printing of Envelopes
For printing on the envelope from Mac, refer to the following.
Print result image
Orientation of print data Orientation of loading envelope
The print data is rotated by 180 degrees against the print result image.
Load the envelope in vertically with the address side facing up so that the folded flap of the envelope will be faced down on the right side.
301
Printing on Postcards
This section describes the procedure for printing on postcards.
1.
Load postcards
in printer
2.
Select paper size and paper type from the printer
Register Hagaki for paper size from the printer operation panel.
Also, register Ink Jet Hagaki , Hagaki K , or Hagaki for paper type, according to your purpose. When you print on the address side, register Hagaki .
3.
Select Paper Size and Media Type from the print dialog
Select Postcard for Paper Size from the print dialog.
Select the Hagaki you want to use for Media Type from the print dialog.
Important
• This printer cannot print on postcards that have photos or stickers attached.
4.
Uncheck Two-Sided
Important
• Two-sided printing is not possible for postcards, so remove the Two-Sided check mark. If you print with the Two-Sided check mark on, the printing result may not be as you intended.
• You will get cleaner printing if you print the message side first and then print the address side.
5.
Click Print
The printer prints according to the specified settings.
302
Adding Printer
This section describes the procedure for adding a printer to your Mac.
To re-add a printer that was deleted, open System Preferences -> Printers & Scanners , click + next to the printer list, and then perform the procedure described below.
If your printer is connected via USB, and you connect the USB cable to a Mac, the printer is automatically added. The below procedure is not necessary in this case.
1.
Check whether Default is selected in the displayed dialog
Note
• It may take a little time for your printer to appear.
2.
Select the printer
Select the printer listed as Bonjour Multifunction .
Note
• Check the following if printer does not appear.
Printer is on
Firewall function of the security software is off
In case of Wi-Fi connection: Printer is either connected to the wireless router or directly connected to the PC (Direct Connection)
In case of wired LAN connection: Printer is connected to the network device via LAN cable
3.
Select your printer or Secure AirPrint from Use
4.
Click Add
The printer is added to your Mac.
303
How to Open Printer Settings Screen
The settings screen of the printer can be displayed from your application software.
Opening the Page Setup Dialog
Use this procedure to set the page (paper) settings before printing.
1.
Select Page Setup...
from the File menu of the application software
The Page Setup dialog opens.
Opening the Print Dialog
Use this procedure to set the print settings before printing.
1.
Select Print...
from the File menu of the application software
The Print dialog opens.
304
Displaying the Printing Status Screen
Check the print progress according to the following procedure:
1.
Launch the printing status screen
The printing status screen opens automatically. To display the printing status screen, click the printer icon displayed on the Dock.
Open System Preferences , and select Printers & Scanners .
To display the printing status screen, select your printer model from the printer list, and then click
Open Print Queue...
.
2.
Check the printing status
You can check the name of the file being printed or ready for being printed.
Deletes the specified print job.
Stops printing the specified document.
Resumes printing the specified document.
Stops printing all documents.
Displayed only when printing of all documents is being stopped, and resumes printing all documents.
Important
• If an error occurs, an error message will appear on the printing progress confirmation screen.
• The content of the error message may differ depending on the OS version.
• The printer part names in the error message may differ from what is listed in this manual.
• If the content of the error message is difficult to understand, check the error message displayed on the printer operation panel.
305
Deleting the Undesired Print Job
If the printer does not start printing, canceled or failed print job data may be remaining.
Delete unnecessary print jobs from the print status check screen.
1.
Open System Preferences , and select Printers & Scanners
2.
Select your model, and then click Open Print Queue...
The print status check screen appears.
3.
Select the unnecessary print job and click (Delete)
The selected print jobs will be deleted.
306
Removing Printer That Is No Longer Required from List of
Printers
The printer that is no longer in use can be removed from the list of printers.
Before removing the printer, remove the cable connecting the printer and PC.
You cannot remove the printer if you are not logged on as the administrator. For information about an administrative user, see Users & Groups from System Preferences .
1.
Open System Preferences , and select Printers & Scanners
2.
Delete printer from list of printers
Select the printer you wish to remove from the list of printers and click .
Click Delete Printer when the confirmation message appears.
307
Printing Using Canon Application Software
Easy-PhotoPrint Editor Guide
308
Printing from Smartphone/Tablet
Printing from iPhone/iPad/iPod touch (iOS)
Printing from Smartphone/Tablet (Android)
309
Paper Settings
By registering the paper size and the media type, the message is displayed before printing starts when the paper size or the media type of the loaded paper differs from the paper settings.
After loading paper
• • When you loading paper in the rear tray
The screen to register the rear tray paper information is displayed.
If the page size and the media type on the LCD matches the size of the paper loaded in the rear tray, select OK .
If not, select Change to change the setting in accordance with the size and type of the loaded paper.
Note
• • See
when you want to hide the screen for confirming the setting of paper.
310
• • When you insert the cassette
Paper size is detected and set automatically in the printer.
Note
• • For more on the proper combination of paper settings you can specify by the printer driver (Windows) or on the LCD:
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
When the paper settings for printing/copying are different from the paper information registered to the printer
Ex:
• • Paper settings for printing/copying: A5
• • Paper information registered to the printer: A4
311
When you start printing/copying, a message is displayed.
Check the message and select Next , and then choose one of the following.
Print on set paper
Select if you want to print/copy on the paper loaded without changing the paper settings.
For example, when the paper setting for printing/copying is A5 and the paper information registered to the printer is A4, the printer starts printing/copying on the paper loaded in the rear tray or in the cassette without changing the paper size setting for printing/copying.
Replace paper
Select if you want to print after replacing the paper of the rear tray or the cassette.
For example, when the paper size setting for printing/copying is A5 and the paper information registered to the printer is A4, you load A5 sized paper in the rear tray or in the cassette before you start printing/copying.
The paper information registration screen is displayed after replacing the paper. Register the paper information according to the paper that you loaded.
Cancel print
Cancels printing.
Select when you change the paper settings specified for printing/copying. Change the paper settings and try printing/copying again.
312
Copying
Two-Sided Copying
Reducing/Enlarging Copies
Special Copy Menu
313
Making Copies
This section describes the basic procedure to perform standard copying.
1.
Check that printer is turned on.
2.
Load paper.
3.
Select Copy on the HOME screen.
The Copy standby screen is displayed.
4.
Load original on platen.
5.
Specify the number of copies using the button.
6.
Specify settings as necessary.
The print setting screen is displayed when you press the OK button.
7.
Press the Black button or the Color button.
The printer starts copying.
Remove the original on the platen after copying is complete.
Important completed.
314
Setting Items for Copying
You can change the copy settings such as magnification and intensity.
Note
• • The setting currently specified appears in the selected state.
• • Some setting items may not be able to be specified in combination with the setting of other setting items. is displayed in the setting item when setting that cannot be specified in the combined state is selected. Select the setting item, check the displayed message, and change the setting.
A: Number of copies
Specify the number of copies.
B: Paper source
Select a paper source.
C: Copy menu
• • Standard copy
You can copy images with the basic operations.
• • Frame erase
When copying thick originals such as books, you can make a copy without black margins around the image and gutter shadows.
Copying Thick Originals Such as Books
315
• • ID copy
You can copy both sides of a card sized original such as an ID card onto a single sheet of paper.
Copying ID Card to Fit onto Single Page
• • PaperboardCopy
You can copy by loading the paperboard on the rear flat tray.
Copying to Paperboard
D: Others
• • Two-Sided Copying
Select whether to perform duplex copying.
Two-Sided Copying
• • Layout
Select the layout.
Copying Two Pages onto Single Page
Copying Four Pages onto Single Page
• • Copy intensity
Change the intensity (brightness).
• • Enlarge/Reduce
Select the reduction/enlargement method.
Reducing/Enlarging Copies
• • Print quality
Specify the print quality.
Note
• • The Quality: Econ.
can be set when the paper type is normal paper.
316
Scanning
Scanning from Operation Panel
317
Scanning in Windows
Scanning According to Item Type or Purpose (IJ Scan Utility)
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Editing Password-Protected PDF Files
Scanning Using Application Software (ScanGear)
Scanning Tips
Positioning Originals (Scanning from Computer)
IJ Network Scanner Selector EX2 Menu and Setting Screen
Important
• Available functions and settings vary depending on your scanner or printer.
318
Scanning According to Item Type or Purpose (IJ Scan Utility)
IJ Scan Utility Features
Scanning Easily (Auto Scan)
Scanning Documents and Photos
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Editing Password-Protected PDF Files
319
IJ Scan Utility Features
Use IJ Scan Utility to scan and save documents, photos, or other items at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon.
Important
• Available functions, the displayed items, and available settings vary depending on your model.
Multiple Scanning Modes
Auto allows for one click scanning with default settings for various items. Document will sharpen text in a document or magazine for better readability, and Photo is best suited for scanning photos.
Note
• For details on the IJ Scan Utility main screen, see IJ Scan Utility Main Screen.
Save Scanned Images Automatically
Scanned images are automatically saved to a preset folder. The folder can be changed as needed.
Note
• • The default save folders are as follows.
Windows 11/Windows 10/Windows 8.1:
Documents folder
Windows 7:
My Documents folder
• To change folder, see Settings Dialog Box.
Application Integration
Scanned images can be sent to other applications. For example, display scanned images in your favorite graphics application, attach them to e-mails, or extract text from images.
320
Note
• To set the applications to integrate with, see Settings Dialog Box.
321
Scanning Easily (Auto Scan)
Auto Scan allows for automatic detection of the type of the item placed on the platen or ADF (Auto
Document Feeder).
Important
• This function is not supported depending on your model.
• • The following types of items may not be scanned correctly. In that case, adjust the cropping frames
(scan areas) in whole image view of ScanGear (scanner driver), and then scan again.
Photos with a whitish background
Items printed on white paper, hand-written text, business cards, and other unclear items
Thin items
Thick items
• When scanning two or more documents from the ADF, place documents of the same size.
1.
Make sure scanner or printer is turned on.
2.
Place items on platen or ADF.
Positioning Originals (Scanning from Computer)
3.
Start IJ Scan Utility.
4.
Click Auto in the IJ Scan Utility main screen.
Scanning starts.
Note
• To cancel the scan, click Cancel .
• Use the Settings (Scanning from a Computer) dialog box displayed by clicking where to save the scanned images and to make advanced scan settings.
• • To scan a specific item type, see the following pages.
Settings...
Scanning with Favorite Settings
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder)
to set
322
Scanning Documents and Photos
Scan items placed on the platen with settings suitable for documents or photos.
Save documents in formats such as PDF and JPEG, and photos in formats such as JPEG and TIFF.
1.
Place the item on the platen.
Positioning Originals (Scanning from Computer)
2.
Start IJ Scan Utility.
3.
To specify the paper size, resolution, PDF settings, etc., click Settings...
, and then set each item in the Settings (Scanning from a Computer) dialog box.
Note
• Once settings are made in the Settings dialog box, the same settings can be used for scanning from the next time.
• In the Settings dialog box, specify image processing settings such as slant correction and outline emphasis, set the destination of the scanned images, and more, as needed.
When setting is completed, click OK .
4.
Click Document or
Scanning starts.
Note
• To cancel the scan, click Cancel .
Photo in the IJ Scan Utility main screen.
323
Creating/Editing PDF Files
You can create PDF files by scanning items placed on the platen or ADF (Auto Document Feeder). Add, delete, rearrange pages or make other edits in the created PDF files.
Important
• You can create or edit up to 100 pages of a PDF file at one time.
• Only PDF files created or edited in IJ Scan Utility or IJ PDF Editor are supported. PDF files created or edited in other applications are not supported.
Note
• You can also create PDF files from images saved on a computer.
• Selectable file formats are PDF, JPEG, TIFF, and PNG.
• Images whose number of pixels in the vertical or horizontal direction is 10501 or more cannot be used.
• • When you select a password-protected PDF file, you must enter the password.
Editing Password-Protected PDF Files
1.
Place items on platen or ADF.
2.
Start IJ Scan Utility.
3.
Click PDF Editor in the IJ Scan Utility main screen.
IJ PDF Editor starts.
4.
To specify the paper size, resolution, and other settings, click Settings...
from the File menu, and then set each item in the Settings (Scanning from a Computer) dialog box.
Note
• Once settings are made in the Settings dialog box, the same settings can be used for scanning from the next time.
• In the Settings dialog box, specify image processing settings such as slant correction and outline emphasis.
When setting is completed, click OK .
5.
Click (Scan) on Toolbar.
Scanning starts.
Note
• To open a file saved on the computer, click Open...
from the File menu, and then select the file you want to edit.
324
6.
Add pages as needed.
When scanning and adding more items:
Place items, and then click (Scan) on the Toolbar.
When adding existing images or PDF files:
Click (Add Page) on the Toolbar. After the Open dialog box appears, select the image(s) or PDF file(s) you want to add, and then click Open .
Note
• You can also add images or PDF files from Add Page from Saved Data...
in the File menu.
7.
Edit pages as needed.
When changing page order:
Click the page you want to move, and then click (Page Up) or (Page Down) on the Toolbar to change the page order. You can also change the page order by dragging and dropping a page to the target location.
When deleting pages:
Click the page you want to delete, and then click
Note
(Delete Page) on the Toolbar.
8.
Select Save As...
in File menu.
The Save dialog box appears.
9.
Specify save settings.
Important
600 dpi or whose number of pixels in the vertical or horizontal direction is between 10201 pixels and 10500 pixels.
PDF Compression
Create a PDF file that supports keyword search
Correct slanted text originals
Detect the orientation of text original and rotate image
File Name
Enter a file name for the PDF file to be saved. When two or more pages have been created and you are saving each page separately, a sequential number is appended to the file names.
325
Save in
Set the folder in which to save PDF files. To change the folder, click Browse...
, and then specify the destination folder.
Save to a subfolder with current date
Select this checkbox to create a current date folder in the folder specified in Save in and save created or edited PDF files in it. The folder will be created with a name such as "20XX_01_01"
(Year_Month_Date).
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in .
File Type
Select the file format for saving PDF files.
Save each page as a separate PDF file.
PDF (Multiple Pages)
Save multiple pages in one PDF file.
Note
• PDF (Multiple Pages) appears when two or more pages have been created.
PDF Compression
Select the compression type for saving.
Standard
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Compresses the file size when saving. This will reduce the load on your network and server.
Important
• If you save PDF files with high compression repeatedly, images may degrade.
Create a PDF file that supports keyword search
Select this checkbox to convert text in images into text data and create PDF files that support keyword search.
Correct slanted text originals
Select this checkbox to detect the document orientation based on the text in images and correct the angle (within the range of -0.1 to -10 degrees or +0.1 to +10 degrees) for creating PDF files.
Important correctly.
Images in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary by line
Images containing both vertical and horizontal text
Images with extremely large or small fonts
Images with small amount of text
Images containing figures/images
Hand-written images
326
Detect the orientation of text original and rotate image
Select this checkbox to detect the page orientation based on the text in images and automatically rotate the images to the correct orientation for creating PDF files.
Important
• This function is available only for images (text documents) containing languages that can be selected from Document Language in the Settings (General Settings) dialog box of IJ Scan
Utility. This function is not available depending on the language in the image.
be detected correctly.
Images with small amount of text
Images containing text whose font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points
Images containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text
Images with patterned backgrounds
Set up password security
Select this checkbox to display the Password Security Settings dialog box for setting a password for opening the created PDF file or a password for printing/editing it.
Important passwords.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
10.
Click Save .
The PDF file is saved.
Note passwords in the Save dialog box.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
(Save) on the Toolbar.
327
Scanning Using Application Software (ScanGear)
What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)?
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Scanning in Basic Mode
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens
General Notes (Scanner Driver)
Important
• Available functions and settings vary depending on your scanner or printer.
328
What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)?
ScanGear (scanner driver) is software required for scanning documents. Use the software to specify the output size, image corrections, and other settings.
ScanGear can be started from IJ Scan Utility or applications that are compatible with the standard TWAIN interface. (ScanGear is a TWAIN-compatible driver.)
Features
Specify the document type, output size, and other settings when scanning documents and preview scan results. Make various correction settings or finely adjust the brightness, contrast, and other parameters to scan in a specific color tone.
Screens
There are two modes: Basic Mode and Advanced Mode.
Switch modes with the tabs on the upper right of the screen.
Note
• ScanGear starts in the last used mode.
• Settings are not retained when you switch modes.
Basic Mode
Use the Basic Mode tab to scan easily by following three simple on-screen steps ( , , and
).
329
Advanced Mode
Use the Advanced Mode tab to scan by specifying the color mode, output resolution, image brightness, color tone, and other settings.
330
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Use ScanGear (scanner driver) to make image corrections and color adjustments when scanning. Start
ScanGear from IJ Scan Utility or other applications.
Note
• If you have more than one scanner or have a network compatible model and changed the connection from USB connection to network connection, set up the network environment.
Starting from IJ Scan Utility
1.
Start IJ Scan Utility.
For how to start it, see Starting IJ Scan Utility.
2.
In IJ Scan Utility main screen, click ScanGear.
The ScanGear screen appears.
Starting from Application
The procedure varies depending on the application. For details, see the application's manual.
1.
Start application.
2.
On application's menu, select machine.
Note
• A machine connected over a network, will have "Network" displayed after the product name.
3.
Scan document.
The ScanGear screen appears.
331
Scanning in Basic Mode
Use the Basic Mode tab to scan easily by following these simple on-screen steps.
To scan multiple documents at one time from the Platen, see Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver).
When scanning from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder), preview is not available.
Important
• • The following types of documents may not be scanned correctly. In that case, click on the Toolbar to switch to whole image view and scan.
(Thumbnail)
Photos with a whitish background
Documents printed on white paper, hand-written text, business cards, and other unclear documents
Thin documents
Thick documents
• • The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly.
Documents smaller than 1.2 inches (3 cm) square
Photos that have been cut to irregular shapes
Note
• Both sides of a two sided document can be scanned simultaneously on models with ADF duplex scanning support.
1.
Place document on machine's Platen or ADF, and then start ScanGear (scanner driver).
Positioning Originals (Scanning from Computer)
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
2.
Set Select Source to match your document.
332
Important
• Some applications do not support continuous scanning from the ADF. For details, see the application's manual.
Note
• To scan magazines containing many color photos, select Magazine (Color) .
3.
Click Preview .
Preview image appears in the Preview area.
Important
• Preview is not available when scanning from the ADF.
Note
• Colors are adjusted based on the document type selected in Select Source .
4.
Set Destination .
Note
• Skip ahead to Step 7 if an ADF option is selected in Select Source .
5.
Set Output Size .
Output size options vary with the selected Destination .
6.
Adjust cropping frames (scan areas) as needed.
Adjust the size and position of the cropping frames on the preview image.
Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)
333
7.
Set Image corrections as needed.
8.
Click Scan .
Scanning starts.
Note
• Click (Information) to display a dialog box showing the document type and other details of the current scan settings.
• How ScanGear behaves after scanning is complete can be set from Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Related Topic
334
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens
Basic Mode Tab
Advanced Mode Tab
Preferences Dialog Box
335
Basic Mode Tab
Use the Basic Mode tab to scan easily by following these simple on-screen steps.
This section describes the settings and functions available on the Basic Mode tab.
(1) Settings and Operation Buttons
Note
• The displayed items vary by document type and view.
• Preview is not available when scanning from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder).
(1) Settings and Operation Buttons
Select Source
Photo (Color)
Scan color photos.
Magazine (Color)
Scan color magazines.
Document (Color)
Scan documents in color.
Document (Grayscale)
Scan documents in black and white.
Document (Color) ADF Simplex
Scan documents from the ADF in color.
Document (Grayscale) ADF Simplex
Scan documents from the ADF in black and white.
336
Document (Color) ADF Duplex (only for models supporting ADF duplex scanning)
Scan both sides of documents from the ADF in color.
Document (Grayscale) ADF Duplex (only for models supporting ADF duplex scanning)
Scan both sides of documents from the ADF in black and white.
Important
• Some applications do not support continuous scanning from the ADF. For details, see the application's manual.
Note
• When you select a document type, the unsharp mask function will be active.
• When you select an option other than the ADF types, the image adjustment function which adjusts images based on the document type will also be active.
• When you select Magazine (Color) , the descreen function will be active.
Display Preview Image
Preview
Performs a trial scan.
Note
• When using the machine for the first time, scanner calibration starts automatically. Wait a while until the preview image appears.
Destination
Select what you want to do with the scanned image.
Select this to print the scanned image on a printer.
Image display
Select this to view the scanned image on a monitor.
OCR
Select this to use the scanned image with OCR software.
337
"OCR software" is software that converts text scanned as an image into text data that can be edited in word processors and other programs.
Output Size
Select an output size.
Output size options vary by the item selected in Destination .
Flexible
Adjust the cropping frames (scan areas) freely.
In thumbnail view:
Drag the mouse over a thumbnail to display a cropping frame. When a cropping frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. When no cropping frame is displayed, each frame is scanned individually.
In whole image view:
When no cropping frame is displayed, the entire Preview area will be scanned. When a cropping frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned.
Paper Size (such as L or A4)
Select an output paper size. The portion within the cropping frame will be scanned at the size of the selected paper size. Drag the cropping frame to enlarge/reduce it while maintaining the aspect ratio.
Monitor Size (such as 1024 x 768 pixels)
Select an output size in pixels. A cropping frame of the selected monitor size will appear and the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. Drag the cropping frame to enlarge/reduce it while maintaining the aspect ratio.
Add/Delete...
Displays the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box for specifying custom output sizes. This option can be selected when Destination is Print or Image display .
In the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, multiple output sizes can be specified and then saved at one time. Saved items will be registered to the Output Size list and can be selected, along with the predefined items.
Adding:
Enter Output Size Name , Width , and Height , and then click Add . For Unit , select inches or mm if Destination is Print ; if it is Image display , only pixels can be selected. The name of the added size appears in Output Size List . Click Save to save the items listed in Output Size List .
338
Deleting:
Select the output size you want to delete in Output Size List , and then click Delete . Click Save to save the items listed in Output Size List .
Important
• Predefined output sizes such as A4 and 1024 x 768 pixels cannot be deleted.
Note
• Save up to 10 items.
• An error message appears when you enter a value outside the setting range. Enter a value within the setting range.
Note
• For details on whether or how the cropping frame initially appears on a preview image, see
Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in Preview tab of Preferences Dialog Box.
Invert aspect ratio
Available when Output Size is set to anything but Flexible .
Click this button to rotate the cropping frame. Click again to return it to the original orientation.
Adjust cropping frames
Adjust the scan area within the Preview area.
If an area is not specified, the document will be scanned at the document size (Auto Crop). If an area is specified, only the portion in the cropping frame will be scanned.
Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)
Image corrections
Correct the image to be scanned.
Important
• Apply Auto Document Fix and Correct fading are available when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Note
• Available functions vary by the document type selected in Select Source .
Apply Auto Document Fix
Sharpens text in a document or magazine for better readability.
Important
• Scanning may take longer than usual when this checkbox is selected.
• The color tone may change from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect the checkbox and scan.
• Correction may not be applied properly if the scan area is too small.
Correct fading
Corrects photos that have faded with time or have a colorcast.
339
Correct gutter shadow
Corrects shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets.
Important
• Be sure to see Gutter Shadow Correction for precautions and other information on using this function.
Color Pattern...
Adjust the image's overall color. Correct colors that have faded due to colorcast or other reasons and reproduce natural colors while previewing color changes.
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern
Important
• This setting is not available when Color Matching is selected on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Scan Image
Scan
Starts scanning.
Note
• When scanning starts, the progress appears. To cancel the scan, click Cancel .
Preferences...
Displays the Preferences dialog box for making scan/preview settings.
Close
Closes ScanGear (scanner driver).
(2) Toolbar
Adjust or rotate preview images. The buttons displayed on the Toolbar vary by view.
In thumbnail view:
In whole image view:
(Thumbnail) / (Whole Image)
Switches the view in the Preview area.
(Rotate Left)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
• The result will be reflected in the scanned image.
340
• The image returns to its original state when you preview again.
(Rotate Right)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise.
• The result will be reflected in the scanned image.
• The image returns to its original state when you preview again.
(Auto Crop)
Displays and adjusts the cropping frame automatically to the size of the document displayed in the
Preview area. The scan area is reduced every time you click this button if there are croppable areas within the cropping frame.
(Check All Frames)
Available when two or more frames are displayed.
Selects the checkboxes of the images in thumbnail view.
(Uncheck All Frames)
Available when two or more frames are displayed.
Deselects the checkboxes of the images in thumbnail view.
(Select All Frames)
Available when two or more frames are displayed.
Selects the images in thumbnail view and outlines them in blue.
(Select All Cropping Frames)
Available when two or more cropping frames are specified.
Turns the cropping frames into thick broken lines and applies the settings to all of them.
(Remove Cropping Frame)
Removes the selected cropping frame.
(Information)
Displays the version of ScanGear, along with the document type and other details of the current scan settings.
(Open Guide)
Opens this page.
(3) Preview Area
This is where a trial image appears after you click Preview . The results of image corrections, color adjustments, and other settings made in
(1) Settings and Operation Buttons are also reflected.
341
When (Thumbnail) is displayed on Toolbar:
Cropping frames are specified according to the document size, and thumbnails of scanned images appear. Only the images with the checkbox selected will be scanned.
Note
• • When multiple images are previewed, different outlines indicate different selection status.
Focus Frame (thick blue outline): The displayed settings will be applied.
Selected Frame (thin blue outline): The settings will be applied to the Focus Frame and Selected
Frames simultaneously. To select multiple images, click them while pressing the Ctrl key.
Unselected (no outline): The settings will not be applied.
• Double-click a frame to enlarge the image. Click (Frame Advance) at the bottom of the screen to display the previous or next frame. Double-click the enlarged frame again to return it to its original state.
When (Whole Image) is displayed on Toolbar:
Items on the Platen are scanned and appear as a single image. All portions in the cropping frames will be scanned.
342
Note
• • Create cropping frame(s) on the displayed image. In thumbnail view, one cropping frame can be created per image. In whole image view, multiple cropping frames can be created.
Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)
Related Topic
343
Advanced Mode Tab
This mode allows you to make advanced scan settings such as the color mode, output resolution, image brightness, and color tone.
This section describes the settings and functions available on the Advanced Mode tab.
(1) Settings and Operation Buttons
Important
• The displayed items vary depending on your model, document type, and view.
• The preview function is not available when scanning from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder).
(1) Settings and Operation Buttons
Favorite Settings
You can name and save a group of settings (Input Settings, Output Settings, Image Settings, and
Color Adjustment Buttons) on the Advanced Mode tab, and load it as required. It is convenient to save a group of settings if you will be using it repeatedly. You can also use this to reload the default settings.
Select Add/Delete...
from the pull-down menu to open the Add/Delete Favorite Settings dialog box.
344
Enter Setting Name and click Add ; the name appears in Favorite Settings List .
When you click Save , the item appears in the Favorite Settings list and can be selected, along with the predefined items.
To delete an item, select it in Favorite Settings List and click Delete . Click Save to save the settings displayed in Favorite Settings List .
Note
• You can set Add/Delete...
in Favorite Settings after preview.
• Save up to 10 items.
Input Settings
Specify the input settings such as the document type and size.
Output Settings
Specify the output settings such as the output resolution and size.
Image Settings
Enable/disable various image correction functions.
Color Adjustment Buttons
Fine corrections to the image brightness and color tones can be made including adjustments to the image's overall brightness or contrast and adjustments to its highlight and shadow values (histogram) or balance (tone curve).
Zoom
Zooms in on a frame, or zooms in on the image in the area specified with a cropping frame
(scan area). When zoomed in, Zoom changes to Undo . Click Undo to return the display to its non-magnified state.
In thumbnail view:
When multiple images are displayed in thumbnail view, clicking this button zooms in on the selected frame. Click frame.
(Frame Advance) at the bottom of the screen to display the previous or next
Note
• You can also zoom in on an image by double-clicking the frame. Double-click the enlarged frame again to return it to its original state.
In whole image view:
Rescans the image in the area specified with a cropping frame at higher magnification.
345
Note
• Zoom rescans the document and displays high-resolution image in Preview.
• (Enlarge/Reduce) on the Toolbar zooms in on the preview image quickly. However, the resolution of the displayed image will be low.
Preview
Performs a trial scan.
Scan
Starts scanning.
Note
• When scanning starts, the progress appears. To cancel the scan, click Cancel .
• When scanning is completed, a dialog box prompting you to select the next action may appear.
Follow the prompt to complete. For details, see Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning in
Scan tab of Preferences dialog box.
• It will take time to process the images if the total size of the scanned images exceeds a certain size. In that case, a warning message appears; it is recommended that you reduce the total size.
To continue, scan in whole image view.
Preferences...
Displays the Preferences dialog box for making scan/preview settings.
Close
Closes ScanGear (scanner driver).
(2) Toolbar
Adjust or rotate preview images. The buttons displayed on the Toolbar vary by view.
346
In thumbnail view:
In whole image view:
(Thumbnail) / (Whole Image)
Switches the view in the Preview area.
(Clear)
Deletes the preview image from the Preview area.
It also resets the Toolbar and color adjustment settings.
(Crop)
Allows you to specify the scan area by dragging the mouse.
(Move Image)
Allows you to drag the image until the part you want to see is displayed when an image enlarged in the Preview area does not fit in the screen. You can also move the image using the scroll bars.
(Enlarge/Reduce)
Allows you to zoom in on the Preview area by clicking the image. Right-click the image to zoom out.
(Rotate Left)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
• The result will be reflected in the scanned image.
• The image returns to its original state when you preview again.
(Rotate Right)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise.
• The result will be reflected in the scanned image.
• The image returns to its original state when you preview again.
(Auto Crop)
Displays and adjusts the cropping frame automatically to the size of the document displayed in the
Preview area. The scan area is reduced every time you click this button if there are croppable areas within the cropping frame.
(Check All Frames)
Available when two or more frames are displayed.
Selects the checkboxes of the images in thumbnail view.
347
(Uncheck All Frames)
Available when two or more frames are displayed.
Deselects the checkboxes of the images in thumbnail view.
(Select All Frames)
Available when two or more frames are displayed.
Selects the images in thumbnail view and outlines them in blue.
(Select All Cropping Frames)
Available when two or more cropping frames are specified.
Turns the cropping frames into thick broken lines and applies the settings to all of them.
(Remove Cropping Frame)
Removes the selected cropping frame.
(Information)
Displays the version of ScanGear, along with the document type and other details of the current scan settings.
(Open Guide)
Opens this page.
(3) Preview Area
This is where a trial image appears after you click Preview . The results of image corrections, color adjustments, and other settings made in
(1) Settings and Operation Buttons are also reflected.
When (Thumbnail) is displayed on Toolbar:
Cropping frames are specified according to the document size, and thumbnails of scanned images appear. Only the images with the checkbox selected will be scanned.
348
Note
• • When multiple images are previewed, different outlines indicate different selection status.
Focus Frame (thick blue outline): The displayed settings will be applied.
Selected Frame (thin blue outline): The settings will be applied to the Focus Frame and Selected
Frames simultaneously. To select multiple images, click them while pressing the Ctrl key.
Unselected (no outline): The settings will not be applied.
When (Whole Image) is displayed on Toolbar:
Items on the Platen are scanned and appear as a single image. All portions in the cropping frames will be scanned.
Note
• • Create cropping frame(s) on the displayed image. In thumbnail view, one cropping frame can be created per image. In whole image view, multiple cropping frames can be created.
Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)
Related Topic
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) in Advanced Mode
349
General Notes (Scanner Driver)
ScanGear (scanner driver) is subject to the following restrictions. Keep these points in mind when using it.
Scanner Driver Restrictions
• When using the NTFS file system, the TWAIN data source may not be invoked. This is because the
TWAIN module cannot be written to the winnt folder for security reasons. Contact the computer's administrator for help.
• Some computers (including laptops) connected to the machine may not resume correctly from standby mode. In that case, restart the computer.
• Do not connect two or more scanners or multifunction printers with scanner function to the same computer simultaneously. If multiple scanning devices are connected, you cannot scan from the operation panel or scanner buttons of the machine and also may experience errors while accessing the devices.
• Calibration may take time if the machine is connected via USB 1.1.
• • Scanning may fail if the computer has resumed from sleep or standby mode. In that case, follow these steps and scan again.
If your model has no power button, perform Step 2 only.
1. Turn off the machine.
2. Exit ScanGear, then disconnect the USB cable from the computer and reconnect it.
3. Turn on the machine.
If scanning still fails, restart the computer.
• ScanGear cannot be opened in multiple applications at the same time. Within an application,
ScanGear cannot be opened for the second time when it is already open.
• Be sure to close the ScanGear window before closing the application.
• When using a network compatible model by connecting to a network, the machine cannot be accessed from multiple computers at the same time.
• When using a network compatible model by connecting to a network, scanning takes longer than usual.
• Make sure that you have adequate disk space available when scanning large images at high resolutions. For example, at least 300 MB of free space is required to scan an A4 document at
600 dpi in full-color.
• ScanGear and WIA driver cannot be used at the same time.
• Do not enter the computer into sleep or hibernate state during scanning.
Applications with Restrictions on Use
• Some applications may not display the TWAIN user interface. In that case, refer to the application's manual and change the settings accordingly.
• Some applications do not support continuous scanning of multiple documents. In some cases, only the first scanned image is accepted, or multiple images are scanned as one image. For such applications, do not scan multiple documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder).
• To import scanned images into Microsoft Office 2000, first save them using IJ Scan Utility, then import the saved files from the Insert menu.
350
• When scanning Platen size images into Microsoft Office 2003 (Word, Excel, PowerPoint, etc.), click
Custom Insert in the Insert Picture from Scanner or Camera screen. Otherwise, images may not be scanned correctly.
• When scanning images into Microsoft Office 2007/Microsoft Office 2010 (Word, Excel, PowerPoint, etc.), use Microsoft Clip Organizer.
• Images may not be scanned correctly in some applications. In that case, increase the operating system's virtual memory and retry.
• When image size is too large (such as when scanning large images at high resolution), your computer may not respond or the progress bar may remain at 0 % depending on the application. In that case, cancel the action (for example by clicking Cancel on the progress bar), then increase the operating system's virtual memory or reduce the image size/resolution and retry. Alternatively, scan the image via IJ Scan Utility first, then save and import it into the application.
351
Scanning Tips
Positioning Originals (Scanning from Computer)
Network Scan Settings
IJ Network Scanner Selector EX2 Menu and Setting Screen
352
Positioning Originals (Scanning from Computer)
This section describes how to load originals on the platen or ADF (Auto Document Feeder) for scanning. If items are not placed correctly they may not be scanned correctly.
Important
• • Be sure to observe the following when loading the original on the platen. Failure to observe the following may cause the scanner to malfunction or the platen glass to break.
Do not place any objects weighing 4.4 lb (2.0 kg) or more on the platen glass.
Do not put any pressure of 4.4 lb (2.0 kg) or more on the platen glass, such as pressing down the original.
• Close the document cover when scanning.
• Do not touch the operation panel buttons or LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) when opening/closing the document cover. May result in unintended operation.
Placing Documents (ADF (Auto Document Feeder))
Placing Items (Platen)
Place items as described below to scan by detecting the item type and size automatically.
Important
• Depending on your model, the function to scan by automatically detecting the item type and size does not appear.
• When scanning by specifying the paper size in IJ Scan Utility or ScanGear (scanner driver), align an upper corner of the item with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the platen.
• Photos that have been cut to irregular shapes and items smaller than 1.2 inches (3 cm) square cannot be cropped accurately when scanning.
• Reflective disc labels may not be scanned as expected.
• If scanned by detecting the item type and size automatically, the response may differ. In that case, adjust the cropping frame (scan area) manually.
Photos, Postcards, Business Cards, and BD/DVD/CD
Magazines, Newspapers, and Documents
Single item:
Place the item face-down on the platen, with 0.4 inch (1 cm) or more space between the edges (diagonally striped area) of the platen and the item. Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.
Place the item face-down on the platen and align an upper corner of the item with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the platen.
Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.
353
Important
• Large items (such as A4 size photos) that cannot be placed away from the edges/arrow (alignment mark) of the platen may be saved as PDF files. To save in a format other than PDF, scan by specifying the data format.
Multiple items:
Allow 0.4 inch (1 cm) or more space between the edges (diagonally striped area) of the platen and items, and between items. Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.
Important
• For the portions in which items cannot be scanned, see Loading Originals.
: 0.4 inch (1 cm) or more
Note
• Place up to 12 items.
• Positions of slanted items (10 degrees or less) are corrected automatically.
Placing Documents (ADF (Auto Document Feeder))
Important
• Be careful not to let anything get inside the document output slot. It may cause damage.
• Place and align documents of the same size when scanning two or more documents.
• For supported document sizes when scanning from the ADF, see Supported Originals.
Note
• To scan a document at optimum quality, load it on the platen.
1.
Make sure any original has been removed from platen.
354
2.
Open document tray (A).
3.
Slide the document guide (B) all the way out.
Note
• The location and number of document guides may vary depending on your model.
4.
Load document with side to scan facing up in document tray.
Insert the document until it stops.
5.
Adjust document guide to match width of document.
Do not slide the document guide too hard against the document. The document may not be fed properly.
355
Note
• When scanning duplex documents, place the front sides facing up. They will not be scanned correctly if placed the other way around.
356
Network Scan Settings
You can connect your scanner or printer to a network to share it among multiple computers or scan images into a specified computer.
Important
• Multiple users cannot scan at the same time.
Note
• Complete the network settings of your scanner or printer beforehand by following the instructions on our website.
• With network connection, scanning takes longer than USB connection.
Complete the following settings to enable scanning over a network.
Specifying Your Scanner or Printer
Use IJ Network Scanner Selector EX to specify the scanner you want to use. By specifying the scanner, you can scan over a network from your computer or the operation panel.
Important
• • If the product you want to use is changed with IJ Network Scanner Selector EX, the product used for scanning with IJ Scan Utility changes as well. The product for scanning from the operation panel also changes.
If your scanner or printer is not selected in IJ Scan Utility, check that it is selected with IJ Network
Scanner Selector EX.
Refer to "IJ Network Scanner Selector EX2 Menu and Setting Screen" for details.
• To scan from the operation panel, specify your scanner or printer with IJ Network Scanner Selector
EX beforehand.
1.
Check that IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is running.
If IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is running, (IJ Network Scanner Selector EX2) appears in the notification area on the desktop. Click to check the hidden icons as well.
Note start.
Windows 11/Windows 10:
From the Start menu, click ( All apps >) Canon Utilities > IJ Network Scanner Selector
EX2 .
Windows 8.1:
Click IJ Network Scanner Selector EX2 on the Start screen.
357
If IJ Network Scanner Selector EX2 is not displayed on the Start screen, select the
Search charm, then search for "IJ Network Scanner Selector EX2".
Windows 7:
From the Start menu, click All Programs > Canon Utilities > IJ Network Scanner
Selector EX2 > IJ Network Scanner Selector EX2 .
The icon appears in the notification area on the desktop, and the Scan-from-PC Settings screen appears. In that case, skip ahead to Step 3.
2.
In the notification area on the desktop, right-click (IJ Network Scanner Selector EX2), then select Settings...
.
The Scan-from-PC Settings screen appears.
3.
Select your scanner or printer from Scanners .
Normally, the MAC address of your scanner or printer is already selected after the network setup. In that case, you do not need to select it again.
Important
• If multiple scanners exist on the network, multiple model names appear. In that case, you can select one scanner per model.
4.
Click OK .
Note
• The scanner selected in the Scan-from-PC Settings screen will be automatically selected in the
Scan-from-Operation-Panel Settings screen as well.
Setting for Scanning with IJ Scan Utility
To scan from IJ Scan Utility using a scanner or printer connected to a network, specify your scanner or printer with IJ Network Scanner Selector EX, then follow the steps below to change the connection status between it and the computer.
1.
Start IJ Scan Utility.
2.
Select "Canon XXX series Network" (where "XXX" is the model name) for Scanner .
3.
Click Settings...
to use another scanner connected to a network.
4.
Click (General Settings), then click Select in Product Name .
The Scan-from-PC Settings screen of IJ Network Scanner Selector EX appears.
Select the scanner you want to use and click OK .
358
5.
In the Settings (General Settings) dialog box, click OK .
The IJ Scan Utility main screen reappears. You can scan via a network connection.
Setting for Scanning from the Operation Panel
You can make the setting for scanning from the operation panel.
Important
• • Set IJ Scan Utility to use your scanner or printer via a network connection beforehand.
Setting for Scanning with IJ Scan Utility
1.
Check that IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is running.
If IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is running, (IJ Network Scanner Selector EX2) appears in the notification area on the desktop. Click to check the hidden icons as well.
Note start.
Windows 11/Windows 10:
From the Start menu, click ( All apps >) Canon Utilities > IJ Network Scanner Selector
EX2 .
Windows 8.1:
Click IJ Network Scanner Selector EX2 on the Start screen.
If IJ Network Scanner Selector EX2 is not displayed on the Start screen, select the
Search charm, then search for "IJ Network Scanner Selector EX2".
Windows 7:
From the Start menu, click All Programs > Canon Utilities > IJ Network Scanner
Selector EX2 > IJ Network Scanner Selector EX2 .
The icon appears in the notification area on the desktop, and the Scan-from-PC Settings screen appears. In that case, skip ahead to Step 3.
2.
In the notification area on the desktop, right-click (IJ Network Scanner Selector EX2), then select Settings...
.
The Scan-from-PC Settings screen appears.
3.
Click Scan-from-Operation-Panel Settings .
The Scan-from-Operation-Panel Settings screen appears.
4.
Select your scanner or printer from Scanners and click OK .
359
Select the MAC address of your scanner or printer.
Note
• When multiple scanners are connected via a network, you can select up to three scanners.
5.
In the Scan-from-PC Settings screen, click OK .
Note
• • If your scanner or printer does not appear, check the following, click OK to close the screen, then reopen it and try selecting again.
MP Drivers is installed
Network settings of your scanner or printer is completed after installing the MP Drivers
Network communication between your scanner or printer and computer is enabled
If the problem is still not solved, see Network Communication Problems.
360
Scanning in macOS
Scanning According to Item Type or Purpose (IJ Scan Utility Lite)
Scanning Tips
Positioning Originals (Scanning from Computer)
Important
• Available functions and settings vary depending on your scanner or printer.
361
Scanning According to Item Type or Purpose (IJ Scan Utility
Lite)
IJ Scan Utility Lite Features
Scanning Easily (Auto Scan)
Scanning Documents and Photos
Important
• Available functions and settings vary depending on your scanner or printer.
362
IJ Scan Utility Lite Features
Use IJ Scan Utility Lite to scan and save documents, photos, or other items at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon.
Important
• The displayed items and available functions vary depending on your scanner or printer.
Multiple Scanning Modes
Auto allows for one click scanning with default settings for various items. Document will sharpen text in a document or magazine for better readability, and Photo is best suited for scanning photos.
Note
• For details on the IJ Scan Utility Lite main screen, see IJ Scan Utility Lite Main Screen.
Save Scanned Images Automatically
Scanned images are automatically saved to a preset folder. The folder can be changed as needed.
Note
• The default save folder is the Pictures folder.
• For how to specify a folder, see Settings Dialog.
Application Integration
Scanned images can be sent to other applications. For example, display scanned images in your favorite graphics application, attach them to e-mails, or extract text from images.
363
Note
• To set the applications to integrate with, see Settings Dialog.
364
Scanning Easily (Auto Scan)
Auto Scan allows for automatic detection of the type of the item placed on the platen or ADF (Auto
Document Feeder).
Important
• • This function is not supported depending on your model.
• • The following types of items may not be scanned correctly. In that case, adjust the cropping frames
(selection boxes; scan areas) in the screen displayed by clicking Driver in the IJ Scan Utility Lite main screen, and then scan again.
Photos with a whitish background
Items printed on white paper, hand-written text, business cards, and other unclear items
Thin items
Thick items
• When scanning two or more documents from the ADF, place documents of the same size.
1.
Check that scanner or printer is turned on.
2.
Place items on platen or ADF.
Positioning Originals (Scanning from Computer)
3.
Start IJ Scan Utility Lite.
4.
Click Auto in the IJ Scan Utility Lite main screen.
Scanning starts.
Note
• To cancel the scan, click Cancel .
• Use the Settings (Scanning from a Computer) dialog to set where to save the scanned images and to make advanced scan settings.
• • To scan a specific item type, see the following pages.
Scanning with Favorite Settings
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder)
365
Scanning Documents and Photos
Scan items placed on the platen with settings suitable for documents or photos.
Save documents in formats such as PDF and JPEG, and photos in formats such as JPEG and TIFF.
1.
Place the item on the platen.
Positioning Originals (Scanning from Computer)
2.
Start IJ Scan Utility Lite.
3.
To specify the paper size, resolution, PDF settings, etc., click Settings...
, and then set each item in the Settings dialog.
Note
• Once settings are made in the Settings dialog, the same settings can be used for scanning from the next time.
• In the Settings dialog, specify image processing settings such as slant correction, set where to save the scanned images, and more, as needed.
When setting is completed, click OK .
4.
Click Document or
Scanning starts.
Note
• To cancel the scan, click Cancel .
Photo in the IJ Scan Utility Lite main screen.
366
Scanning Tips
Positioning Originals (Scanning from Computer)
367
Positioning Originals (Scanning from Computer)
This section describes how to load originals on the platen or ADF (Auto Document Feeder) for scanning. If items are not placed correctly they may not be scanned correctly.
Important
• • Be sure to observe the following when loading the original on the platen. Failure to observe the following may cause the scanner to malfunction or the platen glass to break.
Do not place any objects weighing 4.4 lb (2.0 kg) or more on the platen glass.
Do not put any pressure of 4.4 lb (2.0 kg) or more on the platen glass, such as pressing down the original.
• Close the document cover when scanning.
• Do not touch the operation panel buttons or LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) when opening/closing the document cover. May result in unintended operation.
• When using a personal scanner in the upright position, the item type may not be detected automatically.
In that case, specify the item type in IJ Scan Utility Lite and scan.
Placing Documents (ADF (Auto Document Feeder))
Placing Items (When Using Stand)
Placing Items (Platen)
Place items as described below to scan by detecting the item type and size automatically.
Important
• Depending on your model, the function to scan by automatically detecting the item type and size does not appear.
• When scanning by specifying the paper size, align an upper corner of the item with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the platen.
• Photos that have been cut to irregular shapes and items smaller than 1.2 inches (3 cm) square cannot be cropped accurately when scanning.
• Reflective disc labels may not be scanned as expected.
• If scanned by detecting the item type and size automatically, the response may differ. In that case, adjust the cropping frame (selection box) manually.
Photos, Postcards, Business Cards, and BD/DVD/CD
Magazines, Newspapers, and
Documents
Place the item face-down on the platen and align an upper corner of the item with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the platen. Portions placed on
368
Single item:
Place the item face-down on the platen, with 0.4 inch (1 cm) or more space between the edges (diagonally striped area) of the platen and the item. Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.
the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.
Important
• Large items (such as A4 size photos) that cannot be placed away from the edges/arrow (alignment mark) of the platen may be saved as PDF files. To save in a format other than PDF, scan by specifying the data format.
Multiple items:
Allow 0.4 inch (1 cm) or more space between the edges (diagonally striped area) of the platen and items, and between items. Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.
Important
• Inkjet All-In-One printer:
For the portions in which items cannot be scanned, see Loading Originals.
• Personal scanner:
For the portions in which items cannot be scanned, see Items You Can Place &
How to Place Items.
: 0.4 inch (1 cm) or more
Note
• In IJ Scan Utility Lite, place up to 12 items.
• Positions of slanted items (10 degrees or less) are corrected automatically.
Placing Documents (ADF (Auto Document Feeder))
Important
• Do not leave thick items on the platen when scanning from the ADF. May result in paper jam.
• Place and align documents of the same size when scanning two or more documents.
• For supported document sizes when scanning from the ADF, see Supported Originals.
369
1.
Make sure any original has been removed from platen.
2.
Open document tray (A).
3.
Slide the document guide (B) all the way out.
Note
• The location and number of document guides may vary depending on your model.
4.
Load document with side to scan facing up in document tray.
Insert the document until it stops.
5.
Adjust document guide to match width of document.
Do not slide the document guide too hard against the document. The document may not be fed properly.
370
Note
• When scanning duplex documents, place the front sides facing up. They will not be scanned correctly if placed the other way around.
Placing Items (When Using Stand)
1.
Place item on platen.
1.
Open the document cover.
2.
Place the item with the side to scan facing the platen, and then align it with the alignment mark.
Important
• If you open the document cover wide, the scanner may fall over.
(2.7 mm) from the front edge) cannot be scanned.
2.
Gently close document cover.
371
While scanning, hold the document cover gently with your hand to keep it closed.
Important
• Keep these points in mind when using the scanner in the upright position.
Do not subject the scanner to vibration during operation. The correct image results may not be obtained (for example, images may blur).
The item type may not be detected automatically. In that case, specify the item type in IJ
Scan Utility Lite and scan.
372
Frequently Asked Questions
Top 6
Network Connection Setup Guide
List of Support Codes for Printer Errors
Network Communication Problems
What to Do When Paper Is Jammed
Search by Category
Error
List of Support Codes for Printer Errors
is displayed
is displayed
1300 is displayed
Network
Solve Network Troubles with The Printer's Diagnostic Functions
Cannot Find Printer on Network (Windows/macOS)
Easy Understanding Network Connections
Cannot Proceed Beyond Printer Connection Screen (Cannot Find Printer Connected via USB)
Connecting with Wireless Direct
373
>
>
>
>
>
Printing
What to Do When Paper Is Jammed
Printout (Copy) Results Are Unsatisfactory
Lines Are Misaligned/Distorted
Scan
(Windows)
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start
(Windows)
IJ Scan Utility Error Messages (Windows)
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Error Messages (Windows)
Cannot Print (Scan) from Smartphone/Tablet
Other
Searching Printer by IP Address or Host Name During Setup
Failed to MP Drivers (Printer Driver) Installation (Windows)
Updating MP Drivers (Printer Driver) in Network Environment (Windows)
Replace Ink in Print Head
Repairing Your Printer
Questions not Listed Above
Error
374
Cannot Use Previous Applications
Disable notifications for
error
Network
Switching Printer's Connection to Network or Devices
Network Key (Password) Unknown
Cannot Remember Printer's Administrator Password
Printer Cannot Be Used After Replacing Wireless Router or Changed Router Settings
Message Appears on Computer During Setup
Checking Network Information of Printer
Restoring Printer's LAN Settings to Defaults
Updating Printer Firmware
Printing
Cannot Print Using AirPrint
Printing (Copying) Stops
Printer Does Not Pick Up or Feed the Paper/"No Paper" Error
Automatic Duplex Printing Problems
Paper Does Not Feed from Paper Source Specified in Printer Driver (Windows)
Printed Barcodes Are Not Recognized
The Print Position Shifts
Scan
Scan Results Are Unsatisfactory (Windows)
Scan Results Are Unsatisfactory (macOS)
Other
Maintenance
Printer Turns Off Unexpectedly or Repeatedly
Operation Problems
375
Network FAQ
Here are frequently asked questions on network. Select a connection method you are using, or you want to use.
Wi-Fi
Cannot Find Printer
Cannot Find Printer on Network
(Windows/macOS)
Cannot Proceed Beyond Printer Connection Screen (Cannot Find Printer Connected via USB)
Searching Printer by IP Address or Host Name During Setup
Switching Printer's Connection to Network or Devices
Cannot Print or Connect
Solve Network Troubles with The Printer's Diagnostic Functions
Printer Cannot Be Used After Replacing Wireless Router or Changed Router Settings
Connecting Printer and Wireless Router Using Easy Wireless (Easy WL) Connect
Cannot Connect Smartphone/Tablet to Wireless Router
WPS (Router Button) Connection
Switching Printer's Connection to Network or Devices
Cannot Find Printer on Network
(Windows/macOS)
LAN Setting Tips/Changing LAN Settings
Network Key (Password) Unknown
Cannot Remember Printer's Administrator Password
Checking Network Information of Printer
Restoring Printer's LAN Settings to Defaults
Checking Wireless Router SSID/Key
Checking Wireless Router Network Name (SSID) for Smartphone/Tablet
Privacy Separator/SSID Separator/Network Separation Function
Switching Printer's Connection to Network or Devices
Checking Status Code
Printing (Scanning) from Smartphone/Tablet
Connecting Printer and Wireless Router Using Easy Wireless (Easy WL) Connect
Cannot Connect Smartphone/Tablet to Wireless Router
Checking Wireless Router Network Name (SSID) for Smartphone/Tablet
376
Setting Up Using Smartphone/Tablet
Cannot Print (Scan) from Smartphone/Tablet
Downloading Canon PRINT Inkjet/SELPHY
Problems while Using Printer
Message Appears on Computer During Setup
Cannot Find Printer on Network
(Windows/macOS)
Wireless Direct
Cannot Print or Connect
Solve Network Troubles with The Printer's Diagnostic Functions
Cannot Find Printer on Network
(Windows/macOS)
LAN Setting Tips/Changing LAN Settings
Network Key (Password) Unknown
Cannot Remember Printer's Administrator Password
Checking Network Information of Printer
Restoring Printer's LAN Settings to Defaults
Switching Printer's Connection to Network or Devices
Checking Status Code
Printing (Scanning) from Smartphone/Tablet
Cannot Print (Scan) from Smartphone/Tablet
Downloading Canon PRINT Inkjet/SELPHY
Problems while Using Printer
Message Appears on Computer During Setup
Cannot Find Printer on Network
(Windows/macOS)
377
Network Communication Problems
Cannot Find Printer on Network (Windows/macOS)
Wireless Router Problems
Printer Settings/Smartphone/Tablet Troubles for Network
378
Cannot Find Printer on Network (Windows/macOS)
Cannot Find Printer on Network
Cannot Proceed Beyond Printer Connection Screen (Cannot Find Printer
Connected via USB)
Searching Printer by IP Address or Host Name During Setup
379
Cannot Find Printer on Network
In the following cases, set up the printer again.
• • When you buy a new computer or wireless router
• • When you change the settings on your wireless router
• • When the connection method (Wi-Fi / USB) of the printer is changed
• • When you forget the administrator password of the printer
When you forget the administrator password of the printer, select Settings on HOME screen and Device settings > Reset settings > Reset all > Yes and redo setup to restore to default administrator password.
For more on the setup procedure;
Set Up
In Other Cases Than Above:
If the printer suddenly stops working, even though you have not changed the settings of the device or network to which it is connected, or if you cannot find the printer during the setup process, check and solve the problem, using Wi-Fi Connection Assistant. After the condition improves, redo the setup of the printer.
Wi-Fi Connection Assistant is a powerful solution tool for network problems.
Step1
Check Basic Items for Network.
Step2
Solve Problems, Using Wi-Fi Connection Assistant.
Step3
If the Solution Tool Does Not Solve the Problem.
Step1 : Check Basic Items for Network.
Check1
Check power status.
Check your printer and the network device (wireless router, etc.) are turned on.
If you are in the process of setting up, interrupt it and check if the wireless router (modem) is turned on and then check if the printer is turned on.
If network devices are not turned on, turn on the power. If the network devices are on, turn them off and on again.
380
It may take a while for the network device to become ready for use once they are turned on.
Proceed once the network device such as router is ready for use.
If printer is not turned on, turn on the power. If the printer is on, turn it off and on again.
Proceed once you complete checking the power status above.
Check2
Check PC network connection.
If your computer and network devices (wireless router, etc.) are fully configured, your computer is ready to connect to the network.
Connect to the Internet and see if you can browse any web page. If you cannot view web pages on your computer, check wireless router network connection settings, such as IP address filtering, MAC address filtering, and DHCP function.
To check the network name (SSID) of the wireless router the printer is connected to, print the network settings.
Note
• • Depending on the wireless router, note that different network name (SSID) is assigned for a bandwidth (2.4 GHz or 5 GHz) or its usage (for PC or game machine), using alphanumeric characters at the end of network name (SSID).
• • For more on checking the settings of the wireless router, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the wireless router or contact the manufacturer.
If you use an encryption key, specify it for the network name (SSID) you are using. For details, see
.
For the procedures, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the computer, or contact the manufacturer.
Once you complete setting up the wireless router and your computer, configure the settings on your computer in order to view web pages, using the information of the wireless router.
Proceed once you complete checking the network connection above.
Check3
Check printer's network settings.
Make sure the (Wi-Fi) icon is displayed on the upper left corner of HOME screen.
381
If (Wi-Fi not connect) icon is displayed.
(Wi-Fi not connect) icon indicates that the wireless router and the printer are not connected. Check the setting of printer. Reconsider the location of the wireless router and the printer in the next check.
If Easy wireless connect button (Easy wireless connect) is on.
"Easy wireless connect" is waiting for setup. Connect a device to the printer with the application on computer, smartphone or tablet.
If only (Wi-Fi off) or
The printer is not set to use Wi-Fi.
(Wireless direct) icon is displayed.
Select Settings on HOME screen > Device settings > LAN settings > Wi-Fi in this order, and select Enable for
Advanced mode .
Check4
Check location of wireless router.
Make sure the printer is not placed too far away from the wireless router.
The printer can be up 50 m (164 ft.) from the wireless router indoors if unobstructed. Make sure the printer is close enough to the wireless router to be used.
Place the printer and wireless router where there are no obstacles between them. Wireless communication between different rooms or floors is generally poor. Wireless communication can be impeded by building materials containing metal or concrete. If the printer cannot communicate with the computer over a Wi-Fi due to a wall, place the printer and the computer in the same room.
In addition, if a device like a microwave oven that emits radio waves of the same frequency bandwidth as a wireless router is nearby, it may cause interference. Place the wireless router as far away from interference sources as possible.
Step2 : Solve Problems, Using Wi-Fi Connection Assistant.
Diagnose and repair the network connections using Wi-Fi Connection Assistant.
Download Wi-Fi Connection Assistant from the below page, and install it on your computer.
Checking Printer Connection Status Using Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
Refer to below in regard to starting up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant.
• • For Windows:
Starting Up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
• • For macOS:
Starting Up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
Step3 : If the Solution Tool Does Not Solve the Problem.
Check1
Make sure security software's firewall is off.
382
If your security software's firewall is on, a message may appear warning you that Canon software is attempting to access the network. If this warning message appears, set security software to always allow access.
If you are using any programs that switch between network environments, check their settings. Some programs use a firewall by default.
Check2
If printer is connected to AirPort Base Station via LAN, make sure you use alphanumeric characters for network name (SSID). (macOS)
If characters other than single-byte alphanumeric characters are used in the network name (SSID), you will not be able to connect correctly. Change the network name (SSID) to single-byte alphanumeric characters only.
Check3
Solve network troubles with the printer's diagnostic functions.
See below.
Solve Network Troubles with The Printer's Diagnostic Functions
383
Cannot Proceed Beyond Printer Connection Screen (Cannot Find
Printer Connected via USB)
If you cannot proceed beyond the Printer Connection screen, check the following.
Check1
Make sure USB cable is securely plugged in to printer and computer.
Connect the printer and the computer using a USB cable as the illustration below. The USB port is located at the back of the printer.
Important
• Check the orientation of the "Type-B" connector and connect to the printer. For details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the USB cable.
Check2
Follow procedure below to connect printer and computer again.
Important
• For macOS, make sure the lock icon is on the lower left of the Printers & Scanners screen.
If the icon (locked) is displayed, click the icon to unlock. (The administrator name and the password are necessary to unlock.)
Check3
Follow the steps below to install MP Drivers (Printer Driver) again.
384
After restarting, install the latest MP Drivers (Printer Driver) downloaded in step 1.
Important
To restart your computer, choose Restart instead of Shut down .
385
Wireless Router Problems
Network Key (Password) Unknown
Checking Wireless Router SSID/Key
Printer Cannot Be Used After Replacing Wireless Router or Changed Router
Settings
WPS (Router Button) Connection
Privacy Separator/SSID Separator/Network Separation Function
386
Network Key (Password) Unknown
Use the Wi-Fi Connection Assistant to diagnose and repair network status.
Select the link below to download Wi-Fi Connection Assistant and install it.
Checking Printer Connection Status Using Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
See below for starting up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
• • For Windows:
Starting Up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
• • For macOS:
Starting Up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
If the problem persists after diagnosis and repair with Wi-Fi Connection Assistant, check the following items.
WPA/WPA2/WPA3 Key Set for Wireless Router Unknown, Cannot Connect
WPA/WPA2/WPA3 Key Set for Wireless Router Unknown, Cannot
Connect
For more on setting up a wireless router, see the instruction manual provided with the wireless router or contact its manufacturer. Make sure your computer can communicate with the wireless router.
Setting an Encryption Key
Select the encryption containing WPA2.
Note
• The factory default of wireless router supporting WPA3 may be set to WPA3.
Make sure your computer can communicate with the wireless router using the settings you have selected.
For more on setting up a wireless router, see the instruction manual provided with the wireless router or contact its manufacturer.
• • Using WPA2/WPA3 (Windows)
The authentication method, Wi-Fi password, and dynamic encryption type must be identical among the wireless router, the printer, and your computer.
Enter the Wi-Fi password configured on the wireless router.
387
Either TKIP (basic encryption) or AES (secure encryption) is selected automatically as the dynamic encryption method.
For details, see If WPA/WPA2 Details Screen Appears.
Note
• This printer supports the following.
WPA-PSK (WPA-Personal)
WPA2-PSK (WPA2-Personal)
WPA3-SAE (WPA3-Personal)
• • Some printers support IEEE802.1X/EAP (WPA/WPA2/WPA3 Enterprise). To configure
IEEE802.1X/EAP (WPA/WPA2/WPA3 Enterprise), you also need to configure the authentication
(Radius) server.
Contact the network administrator for more information.
• • This web page contains information about several models. Depending on the specifications of the printer you are using, some of the features described (scanner/copy, etc.) may not apply.
For details about the functions of your printer, see Specifications .
388
Printer Cannot Be Used After Replacing Wireless Router or
Changed Router Settings
When you replace a wireless router, redo the network setup for the printer according to the replaced one.
Refer to Setup Guide to setup.
Note
• • Wi-Fi Connection Assistant allows you to diagnose and repair the network status.
Select the link below to download Wi-Fi Connection Assistant and install it.
Checking Printer Connection Status Using Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
See below for starting up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant.
For Windows:
Starting Up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
For macOS:
Starting Up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
If this does not solve the problem, see below.
Cannot Communicate with Printer After Enabling MAC/IP Address Filtering or Encryption Key on
With Encryption On, Cannot Communicate with Printer After Changing Encryption Type at Wireless
Cannot Communicate with Printer After Enabling MAC/IP Address
Filtering or Encryption Key on Wireless Router
Check1
Check wireless router setting.
To check the wireless router setting, see the instruction manual provided with the wireless router or contact its manufacturer. Make sure the computer and the wireless router can communicate with each other under this setting.
Check2
If filtering MAC addresses or IP addresses at wireless router, check that MAC addresses or IP addresses for computer, network device, and printer are registered.
389
Check3
If using WPA/WPA2/WPA3 key or a password, make sure encryption key for computer, network device, and printer matches key set for wireless router.
The length or format of the Wi-Fi password and authentication method must be identical among the wireless router, the printer, and your computer.
For details, see Setting an Encryption Key .
Note
(WPA/WPA2/WPA3 Enterprise), you also need to configure the authentication (Radius) server.
Contact the network administrator for more information.
you are using, some of the features described (scanner/copy, etc.) may not apply.
For details about the functions of your printer, see Specifications .
With Encryption On, Cannot Communicate with Printer After
Changing Encryption Type at Wireless Router
If the printer cannot communicate with the computer after you change the encryption type for the wireless router, make sure the encryption type and passkey or password for the computer matches that of the wireless router.
Cannot Communicate with Printer After Enabling MAC/IP Address Filtering or Encryption Key on
390
Printer Settings/Smartphone/Tablet Troubles for Network
Solve Network Troubles with The Printer's Diagnostic Functions
Checking Network Information of Printer
Checking Status Code
Printing Network Settings
Restoring Printer's LAN Settings to Defaults
Default Network Settings
Connecting with Wireless Direct
391
Solve Network Troubles with The Printer's Diagnostic
Functions
• • If the printer and wireless router are connected or the printer and computer are connected by
USB cable but you cannot print:
• • In other cases than above:
Cannot Find Printer on Network/Cannot Print
Cannot Connect to Printer through Wireless Direct
Cannot Find Printer on Network/Cannot Print
Printing Out Network Settings Information:
Follow the procedure below to print out the network settings information.
Step1
Check that printer and wireless router are turned on.
Turn the wireless router back on.
Wait about five minutes and then turn the printer back on.
Step2
Check your devices (e.g. computer/smartphone/tablet) are connected to
Internet.
Make sure that devices and the wireless router are connected to via Wi-Fi, and that the Internet can be used without problems.
Step3
Make sure the printer's Wi-Fi setting is enabled and the displayed.
icon is
Step4
Move the printer and device (computer/smartphone/tablet) closer to the wireless router.
Wireless communication quality deteriorates if the printer or devices are too far from the wireless router.
Step5
Print out network settings information
Print out the network settings information on your printer.
Note
• • For troubleshooting IEEE802.1X/EAP (WPA/WPA2/WPA3 Enterprise), refer to the following.
Setting Up IEEE802.1X/EAP (WPA/WPA2/WPA3 Enterprise)
392
Checking Printed Network Settings Information:
From the printed network settings information, check the entries in item "2-2"
C-0
It is connected correctly. If, nevertheless, the printer is not found on the network or printing is not possible, check the following items.
Note
• • If codes other than "C-0" are displayed at the same time in the item "2-2" see also the correspondence of the other codes.
Check1
Check that security software's firewall is off.
A message may appear warning you that Canon software is attempting to access the network. If this warning message appears, set the security software to always allow access.
Quit the security software and make sure that the printer is recognized and ready to use. If so, the cause is the firewall setting. Change the firewall settings so that the printer is recognized and ready to use. For details, contact the manufacturer of the security software.
If you are using any programs that switch between network environments, check their settings. Some programs use a firewall by default.
Check2
Does network name (SSID) of printer match network name (SSID) setting of wireless router that communicates?
Check the "3-2-6" item in the printed network settings information and the network name (SSID) of the wireless router you want to connect to. If they are not matched, check the SSID and password of the wireless router you want to connect to, and then setup manually.
Check3
Is privacy separator, SSID separator, or Network separation function enabled on wireless router?
If it is enabled, disable these functions before performing the setup. To check the settings of the wireless router, refer to the instruction manual provided with it or contact its manufacturer.
Check4
If MP Drivers (Printer Driver) are not installed, install them. (Windows)
Install the MP Drivers (Printer Driver).
Set Up
C-1
The printer's Wi-Fi setting is disabled. (You can also check if the Wi-Fi icon the printer's screen.)
Enable the Wi-Fi setting in the printer's settings screen.
does not appear on
C-3
No IP address is assigned. (You can also check that the item "3-2-12" in the printed network settings information is blank.)
393
Check the following items.
Check1
Is printer set to obtain an IP address automatically, or is wireless router requesting manual addressing?
Refer to the wireless router's manual to enable DHCP (auto-acquisition) settings on the wireless router or to set a valid IP address on the printer.
Check2
set.
When you set printer's IP address manually, correct IP address may not be
Check the network name (SSID) and the password of the wireless router you want to connect to, the IP address applicable range, and then enter the appropriate IP address on the printer side. If you are unsure, set the printer's IP address to automatic (DHCP).
C-5
Unable to connect to the specified network. Check the following items.
Check1
Check status of printer and network device (e.g. wireless router) and your computer/smartphone/tablet.
Communication with a wireless router must be tuned to either the 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz frequency band. The network name (SSID) of the 2.4 GHz frequency band and the network name (SSID) of the 5 GHz frequency band cannot be used in combination.
Check the network name (SSID) set for the printer, and match it with the network name (SSID) of the correct frequency band of the Wi-Fi router.
Check2
Password on your wireless router may not match password you entered.
Passwords are case sensitive.
Enter the password correctly.
Check3
Monitor signal status and move printer and wireless router as necessary.
• Place the printer and wireless router where there are no obstacles between them. Wireless communication between different rooms or floors is generally poor.
• Wireless communication can be impeded by building materials containing metal or concrete. If the printer cannot communicate with the computer over a Wi-Fi due to a wall, place the printer and the computer in the same room.
• After changing the installation location, print out the network settings information again and check the status of the signal. Compare with the value in section "3-2-1" in the printed network settings information to determine the installation location.
Check4
Check wireless channel number of Wi-Fi you are using on computer.
Make sure that the wireless channel number on the wireless router is included in the wireless channel number you checked. If the wireless channel number set for the wireless router is not included, change the wireless channel number of the wireless router.
394
Check5
In case of Wi-Fi connection, check if computer that can be accessed by wireless router is restricted.
The wireless router settings may be limiting the number of devices that can be connected at the same time.
Remove or relax the restrictions.
To check the settings of the wireless router, refer to the instruction manual provided with it or contact its manufacturer.
Note
• To check the MAC address or IP address of your computer, see Checking Computer IP Address or MAC
.
Check6
If problem occurs only when wireless router is in energy-saving mode, turn off energy-saving mode of wireless router.
If the problem seems to occur suddenly, it may be resolved by updating the wireless router firmware (e.g.
update interval of a key, problems of DHCP update interval, etc.). For details, refer to the wireless router's instruction manual.
Check7
If printer is connected to AirPort Base Station via LAN, make sure you use alphanumeric characters for network name (SSID). (macOS)
C-4
No default gateway is set.
When you set the IP address of the printer manually, enter a valid default gateway IP address. If you don't know the default gateway, set the IP address to automatic.
C-7
There may be a problem with the signal.
Check the following items.
Check
Monitor signal status and move printer and wireless router as necessary.
• Place the printer and wireless router where there are no obstacles between them. Wireless communication between different rooms or floors is generally poor.
• Wireless communication can be impeded by building materials containing metal or concrete. If the printer cannot communicate with the computer over a Wi-Fi due to a wall, place the printer and the computer in the same room.
• After changing the installation location, print out the network settings information again and check the status of the signal. Compare with the value in section "3-2-1" in the printed network settings information and place the printer in the location with a higher value.
Note
• In some cases, "C-7" and "C-9" are displayed at the same time. In that case, refer to both items.
C-8
Too many clients are connected.
395
Wireless Direct does not allow more than 5 devices to be connected.
If you want to connect additional devices to the printer, unplug any devices that are not in use before adding them.
C-9
The noise level is high and does not differ from the signal level due to various devices other than the printer.
• If devices (microwave oven, external hard disk drive, and other USB 3.0 devices) that emit radio waves of the same frequency bandwidth as a wireless router is nearby, it may cause interference. Place the printer and the wireless router as far away from interference sources as possible.
• After you change the location of the printer, check the signal quality. Compare the value of "3-2-2" in the network settings information and place the printer in the location with a higher value.
Note
• In some cases, "C-7" and "C-9" are displayed at the same time. In that case, refer to both items.
C-10
No IP address is assigned by the wireless router.
Check the following items.
Check1
Password on your wireless router may not match password you entered.
Passwords are case sensitive.
Enter the password correctly.
Check2
Set up printer again and reconnect to Wi-Fi.
Check3
Check DHCP on wireless router. If DHCP is off, set it on.
To check the settings of the wireless router, refer to the instruction manual provided with it or contact its manufacturer.
C-11
The network name (SSID) remains the default value (The network name (SSID) has not been set). Check the network name (SSID) of the wireless router.
Verify the network name (SSID) and password of the wireless router you want to connect to, and then set it up manually.
Note
• • Wi-Fi Connection Assistant allows you to diagnose and repair the network status.
Select the link below to download Wi-Fi Connection Assistant and install it.
Checking Printer Connection Status Using Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
See below for starting up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant.
For Windows:
Starting Up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
396
For macOS:
Starting Up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
Cannot Connect to Printer through Wireless Direct
Check1
tablet).
Check power status of printer and other devices (e.g. computer/smartphone/
Turn on the printer or devices.
If the power is already turned on, cycle the power switch.
Check2
Check settings of your device (e.g. computer/smartphone/tablet).
Make sure Wi-Fi is enabled on your device.
For details, refer to the device's instruction manual.
Check3
Print out network settings information.
See "Step1" to "Step5" in Cannot Find Printer on Network/Cannot Printing
.
In the printed network settings information, check if the item "2-2" is not "C-8". If this is the case, the number of connected printer is too many.
Wireless Direct does not allow more than 5 devices to be connected.
When you want to connect additional devices, disconnect any devices that are not in use before adding them.
Check4
Check that printer is selected as connection for various devices (e.g.
computer/smartphone/tablet).
Select the network name (SSID) for Wireless Direct specified for the printer as the connection destination for devices.
Check the destination on your device.
For details, refer to your device's instruction manual or visit the manufacturer's website.
To check the network name (SSID) for Wireless Direct specified for the printer, display it using the operation panel of the printer or print out the network settings information of the printer.
Check5
Check that Wireless Direct password set for printer is entered correctly.
To check the password specified for the printer, display it using the operation panel of the printer or print out the network settings information of the printer.
397
Check6
Check that printer is not placed too far away from device.
If the distance between the printer and the device is too far, wireless communication becomes poor. Place the printer and the device close to each other.
Note
• • Wireless Direct is set to disabled when you connect to and use an EAP router. Also, if you set
Wireless Direct to enable in this case, the wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) will be set to Disable .
• • When using IEEE802.1X/EAP (WPA/WPA2/WPA3 Enterprise), enable the Administrator mode so that the Wireless Direct settings cannot be changed.
398
Checking Network Information of Printer
Checking Printer IP Address or MAC Address
Checking Computer IP Address or MAC Address
Checking Communication Between the Computer, the Printer, and the Wireless Router
Checking Network Setting Information
Checking Printer IP Address or MAC Address
To check the printer's IP Address or MAC address, display it using the operation panel of the printer or print it out.
• • Display on the LCD.
• • Print the network settings.
For Windows, you can check the network setting information on the computer screen.
Canon Wi-Fi Connection Assistant Screen
Checking Computer IP Address or MAC Address
To check the IP Address or MAC address of your computer, follow the instructions below.
• • For Windows:
1.
Select Command Prompt from Start .
2.
Enter "ipconfig/all" and press Enter .
The IP address and MAC address of your computer appear. If your computer is not connected to a network, the IP address does not appear.
• • For macOS:
1.
Select System Preferences from Apple menu, and then click Network .
2.
Make sure network interface used by computer is selected, and then click Advanced .
Make sure Wi-Fi is selected as network interface.
3.
Click TCP/IP to check the IP address, or click Hardware to check the MAC address.
399
Checking Communication Between the Computer, the Printer, and the
Wireless Router
Perform a ping test to check if communication is taking place.
• • For Windows:
1.
Select Command Prompt from Start .
2.
Type the ping command and press Enter .
The ping command is as follows: ping XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
"XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX" is the IP address of the target device.
If communication is taking place, a message like the one shown below appears.
Reply from XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX: bytes=32 time=10ms TTL=255
If Request timed out appears, communication is not taking place.
• • For macOS:
1.
Start Network Utility as shown below.
Select Computer from Go menu of Finder, double-click Macintosh HD > System > Library >
CoreServices > Applications > Network Utility .
2.
Click Ping .
3.
Make sure Send only XX pings (XX are numbers) is selected.
4.
Enter IP address of target printer or target wireless router in Enter the network address to ping .
5.
Click Ping .
"XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX" is the IP address of the target device.
A message such as the following appears.
64 bytes from XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX: icmp_seq=0 ttl=64 time=3.394 ms
64 bytes from XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX: icmp_seq=1 ttl=64 time=1.786 ms
64 bytes from XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX: icmp_seq=2 ttl=64 time=1.739 ms
--- XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX ping statistics ---
3 packets transmitted, 3 packets received, 0% packet loss
If "100% packet loss" appears, communication is not taking place. Otherwise, computer is communicating with target device.
400
Checking Network Setting Information
To check the printer's network settings information, display it using the operation panel of the printer or print it out.
Display on the LCD.
Print the network settings.
401
Printing Network Settings
Use the operation panel to print the printer's current network settings.
Important
• • The network settings printout contains important information about your network. Handle it with care.
1.
Check that printer is turned on.
2.
Load three or more sheets of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper.
3.
Select Settings on HOME screen and press OK button.
4.
Select LAN settings and press OK button.
5.
Select Print details and press OK button.
6.
Select Yes and press OK button.
7.
Check the message is displayed and press OK button.
1-2
1-3
2
2-1
8.
When the confirmation screen for printing passwords appears, select ON or OFF and press
OK button.
The printer starts printing the network setting information.
The following information on the printer's network setting is printed out. (Some setting values are not displayed depending on the printer settings.)
Item Number
Item Description Setting
1
1-1
Product Information
Product Name
Product information
Product name
–
XXXXXXXX
ROM Version
Serial Number
Network Diagnostics
Diagnostic Result
ROM version
Serial number
Network diagnostics
Diagnostic result
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
–
XXXXXXXX
402
2-2
2-3
3
3-2
3-2-1
3-2-2
3-2-3
3-2-4
3-2-5
3-2-6
3-2-7
3-2-8
3-2-10
3-2-11
3-2-12
3-2-13
3-2-14
3-2-15
3-2-16
3-2-17
3-2-18
3-2-19
3-2-20
Result Codes
Result Code Details
Wireless LAN
Infrastructure
Signal Strength
Link Quality
Frequency
MAC Address
Connection
SSID
Channel
Encryption
Authentication
TCP/IPv4
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
TCP/IPv6
Link Local Address
Link Local Prefix
Length
Stateless Address1
Stateless Prefix
Length1
Stateless Address2
Result codes
Result code details
Wireless LAN
Infrastructure
Signal strength
Link quality
Frequency
MAC address
Connection status
SSID
Channel
XXXXXXXX
See
Solve Network Troubles with The Printer's Diagnostic
to check details on the diagnostic result and result codes.
Enable/Disable
Enable/Disable
0 to 100 [%]
0 to 100 [%]
2.4/5 (GHz)
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
Active/Inactive
Wireless LAN network name (SSID)
XXX (1 to 13, 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64, 100, 104, 108,
112, 116, 120, 124, 128, 132, 136, 140, 149, 153, 157, 161,
165) none/TKIP/AES Encryption method
Authentication method none/auto/open/shared/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK/WPA3-SAE/
WPA-EAP/WPA2-EAP/WPA3-EAP
TCP/IPv4
IP address
Enable
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Subnet mask
Default gateway
TCP/IPv6
Link local address
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Enable/Disable
XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
Link local prefix length XXX
Stateless address 1 XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
Stateless prefix length
1
XXX
Stateless address 2 XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
403
3-2-25
3-2-26
3-3
3-3-1
3-3-2
3-3-3
3-3-4
3-3-5
3-3-6
3-3-7
3-3-8
3-3-9
3-2-21
3-2-22
3-2-23
3-2-24
3-2-27
3-2-28
3-2-29
3-2-33
3-2-34
3-2-35
Stateless Prefix
Length2
Stateless Address3
Stateless Prefix
Length3
Stateless Address4
Stateless Prefix
Length4
Default Gateway1
Default Gateway2
Default Gateway3
Stateless prefix length
2
XXX
Stateless address 3 XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
Stateless prefix length
3
XXX
Stateless address 4 XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
Stateless prefix length
4
XXX
Default gateway 1
Default gateway 2
XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
Default gateway 3 XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
Default Gateway4
SSID
Password
Channel
Encryption
Authentication
TCP/IPv4
IP Address
Default gateway 4
IPsec
Security Protocol
Wireless LAN DRX
IPsec setting
Security method
Discontinuous reception (wireless LAN)
Wireless Direct/Access
Point Mode
Operation mode for
Wireless Direct
MAC Address
Connection
MAC address
Connection status
XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
Active/Inactive
ESP/ESP & AH/AH/Blank (Not selected)
Enable/Disable
Enable/Disable
SSID
Password
Channel
Encryption method
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
Active/Inactive
Wireless Direct network name (SSID)
Wireless Direct password
3,6,36,40
AES
Authentication method WPA2-PSK
TCP/IPv4 Enable
IP address XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
404
5
5-1
5-2
3-3-14
3-3-15
3-3-16
3-3-17
3-3-18
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-14
5-15
5-16
3-3-10
3-3-11
3-3-12
3-3-13
5-17
5-18
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
TCP/IPv6
Link Local Address
Subnet mask
Default gateway
TCP/IPv6
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Enable/Disable
Link local address XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
Link local prefix length XXX Link Local Prefix
Length
IPsec
Security Protocol
Wireless LAN DRX
Frequency
Other Settings
Printer Name
Wireless Direct Dev-
Name
WSD Printing
WSD Timeout
LPD Printing
RAW Printing
Primary Server
Secondary Server
IPsec setting
Security method
Discontinuous reception (wireless direct)
Wireless Direct frequency
Other settings
Printer name
Device name for wireless direct
WSD printing setting
Timeout
LPD printing setting
RAW printing setting
Active/Inactive
ESP/ESP & AH/AH/Blank (Not selected)
Disable
2.4/5 (GHz)
–
Printer name
Device name for wireless direct
Enable/Disable
1/5/10/15/20 [min]
Enable/Disable
Enable/Disable
Bonjour Bonjour setting Enable/Disable
Bonjour Service Name Bonjour service name Bonjour service name
LLMNR
SNMP
LLMNR setting
SNMP setting
Enable/Disable
Enable/Disable
DNS Server Obtain DNS server address automatically
Auto/Manual
Primary server address XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Secondary server address
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Proxy Server
Proxy Address
Proxy server setting
Proxy address
Enable/Disable
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
405
5-19
5-20
5-21
7
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
Proxy Port Proxy port specification 1 to 65535
Cert. Fingerprt(SHA-1) Certificate fingerprint(SHA-1) xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
Cert. Fingerprt(SHA-256)
Certificate fingerprint(SHA-256) xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
Web Services
Unsent Usage Logs
Web Services
Number of unsent usage logs
-
0 to 200
Usage Log Last Sent
Web Service Status
Log Transmission Status
Last date when usage log was sent
Registration status
XXXXXXXX
Transmission result
Not set/Disabled/Registration pending/Registered
Not activated/Processing/Server error/Connection error/Timeout error/Error/Awaiting server response/Active
("XX" represents alphanumeric characters.)
406
Restoring Printer's LAN Settings to Defaults
Important
• • Initialization erases all network settings on the printer, making printing/scanning operation from a computer over a network impossible. To use the printer over a network again after restoring it to the factory defaults, refer to Setup Guide and redo setup.
• • If LCD, RMT UI, tools is set as the scope for the administrator password, the administrator password must be entered.
Initialize the network setting using the printer's operation panel.
407
Default Network Settings
LAN Connection Defaults
Item Default
Network name(SSID)
Wi-Fi security
IP address ( IPv4 )
IP address ( IPv6 )
BJNPSETUP
Disable
Auto setup
Auto setup
Set printer name *
Enable/disable IPv6
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Enable
Enable/disable WSD Enable
Timeout setting (WSD) 15 min.
Enable/disable Bonjour Enable
Bonjour service name
LPR protocol setting
RAW protocol
LLMNR
Wi-Fi DRX setting
2.4GHz/5GHz Switch
Canon GX3000 series
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
2.4GHz
("XX" represents alphanumeric characters.)
* Default value depends on printer. To check value, use operation panel.
Wireless Direct Defaults
Item
Network name(SSID)
Default
DIRECT-abXX-GX3000series *1
408
Password
Security method
YYYYYYYYYY *2
WPA2-PSK (AES)
Confirm connection request Displayed
*1 "ab" is specified at random and "XX" represents last two digits of printer's MAC address. (The value is specified when the printer is turned on for the first time.)
*2 The password is specified automatically when the printer is turned on for the first time.
409
Connecting with Wireless Direct
You can connect devices (e.g. computer, smartphone, or tablet) to the printer by two methods below.
• • Wireless connection (connecting devices via a wireless router)
• • Direct wireless connection (connecting devices directly without a wireless router)
This section describes Wireless Direct, which allows you to print by connecting the devices to the printer directly.
• • Connecting
Connecting a smartphone/tablet/computer to the printer
• • Changing settings
Changing Wireless Direct Setting
Important
• • You can connect up to 5 devices to the printer at the same time with Wireless Direct.
• • Check the usage restrictions and connect the printer to the Wireless Direct.
• • Some printers support IEEE802.1X/EAP (WPA/WPA2/WPA3 Enterprise). If you enable Wireless Direct while IEEE802.1X/EAP (WPA/WPA2/WPA3 Enterprise) is enabled, IEEE802.1X/EAP (WPA/WPA2/
WPA3 Enterprise) is disabled.
When IEEE802.1X/EAP (WPA/WPA2/WPA3 Enterprise) is enabled, enable Administrator mode so that the Wireless Direct settings cannot be changed.
Connecting a smartphone/tablet/computer to the printer
1.
Enable Wi-Fi function on smartphone/tablet/computer.
Enable Wi-Fi in the Settings menu on your smartphone/tablet/computer.
For instructions on enabling the Wi-Fi function, refer to the instruction manual for your smartphone/ tablet/computer.
2.
Select Settings on HOME screen and press OK button.
3.
Select LAN settings and press the OK button.
4.
Select Wireless Direct and press the OK button.
410
5.
Select Connect to smartphone and press the OK button.
6.
To connect with an iPhone/iPad, select iPhone/iPad . To connect with an Android device, select Android device . To connect with a non-iPhone/iPad, select Others .
• iPhone/iPad
1. Select QR code and press the OK button.
The iPhone/iPad is connected to the printer.
Note
• If the QR code cannot be read, press the Back button and connect the printer from
Connect to smartphone > Others .
• Android device
1. Select QR code and press the OK button.
◦ Select network and Wi-Fi on the setting of Android device. Select QR code icon to the right of the Add network at the bottom of the list of Wi-Fi connections and scan the QR code.
The Android device is connected to the printer.
Note with the Android standard camera.
• If the QR code cannot be read, press the Back button and connect the printer from
Connect to smartphone > Others .
• Others
1. Select Next and press the OK button.
Network name(SSID) and Password are displayed.
Note
• To show the password, select ON . To hide the password, select OFF .
smartphone/tablet/computer.
3. Enter Password on smartphone/tablet/computer.
411
The smartphone/tablet/computer is connected to the printer.
Note
• If the printer is set to display a confirmation screen in Confirm connection request of
Changing Wireless Direct Setting , when the wireless direct compatible device connects
to the printer, a confirmation screen asking for permission to connect is displayed on the LCD.
Make sure the name on the LCD is the same as that of your wireless communication device and select Yes .
You can print from your smartphone or tablet by installing Canon PRINT Inkjet/SELPHY. Download it from
App Store and Google Play.
For iOS device
For Android device
Changing Wireless Direct Setting
Change the settings for the Wireless Direct following the procedure below.
Note
• • To change the Wireless Direct settings, you need to enable Wireless Direct in advance.
1.
Make sure the printer is turned on.
2.
Select Settings on HOME screen and press OK button.
3.
Select LAN settings and press the OK button.
4.
Select Wireless Direct and press the OK button.
Note
Select Advanced mode on the menu screen displayed when selecting Wireless Direct and enable Wireless Direct.
5.
Select a setting item.
Press the button to scroll down if necessary.
• Show setting info
The setting values for using the printer with Wireless Direct are displayed.
• Change network name (SSID)
Change the identifier (SSID) for Wireless Direct.
The identifier (SSID) is the printer's name (device name) displayed on a Wi-Fi Direct compatible device.
412
Follow the procedure below to change the identifier (SSID).
1. Select Change manually and press OK button.
2. Select Next and press OK button.
4. When you have finished making changes, select OK and press OK button.
1. Select Auto update and press OK button.
2. Select Yes and press OK button.
You can check the updated setting.
Note the password at the same time. To display the password, select ON . To not display the password, select OFF .
• Change password
Change the password for Wireless Direct.
1. Select Change manually and press OK button.
2. Select Next and press OK button.
Change using the keyboard that appears.
4. When you have finished making changes, select OK and press OK button.
1. Select Auto update and press OK button.
2. Select Yes and press OK button.
You can check the updated setting.
Note the password at the same time. To display the password, select ON . To not display the password, select OFF .
• Confirm connection request
Change the confirmation screen setting when a Wi-Fi Direct compatible device is connecting to the printer.
If you want the printer to display the screen to inform you a Wi-Fi Direct compatible device is connecting to the printer, select ON .
413
Important the confirmation screen.
Note
• • If you change the Wireless Direct setting of the printer, also change the wireless router setting of the device.
414
Problems While Printing (Scanning) from Smartphone/Tablet
Cannot Print (Scan) from Smartphone/Tablet
415
Cannot Print (Scan) from Smartphone/Tablet
If you cannot Print (Scan) from your smartphone/tablet, it is possible that your smartphone/tablet cannot communicate with the printer.
Check the cause of your problem according to the connection method.
Cannot Communicate with Printer via Wi-Fi
Cannot Communicate with Printer while It Is in Wireless Direct
Note
• • For problems on printing with other connection methods or more on performing settings of each connection method:
Using PIXMA/MAXIFY Cloud Link
Printing from iOS Device (AirPrint)
Cannot Communicate with Printer via Wi-Fi
If your smartphone/tablet cannot communicate with the printer, check the following.
Check1
Check power status of printer, network devices (e.g. wireless router), and your smartphone/tablet.
• Turn on the printer or your device.
• If the power is already turned on, cycle the power switch.
• It may be necessary to resolve wireless router problems (e.g. update interval of a key, problems of DHCP update interval, energy saving mode) or to update the wireless router firmware.
For details, contact the manufacturer of your wireless router.
Check2
Check settings of your smartphone/tablet.
Make sure Wi-Fi is enabled on your device.
For details, refer to your device's instruction manual.
Check3
Is printer connected to wireless router?
router.
If the icon is not displayed, Wi-Fi is disabled. Turn on wireless communication on the printer.
are identical with those of the wireless router.
To check the settings of the wireless router, refer to the instruction manual provided with it or contact its manufacturer.
416
To check the current network settings of the printer, display it using the operation panel of the printer or print it out.
Note
status.
Select the link below to download Wi-Fi Connection Assistant and install it.
Checking Printer Connection Status Using Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
See below for starting up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant.
For Windows:
Starting Up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
For macOS:
Starting Up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
Check4
router?
Are network settings of your smartphone/tablet identical with those of wireless
Make sure the network settings of the printer (e.g. network name (SSID) or network key password) are identical with those of the wireless router.
To check the settings of your smartphone/tablet, refer to the instruction manual provided with it.
If the network settings of your smartphone/tablet are not identical with those of the wireless router, change the network settings of it to match with those of the wireless router.
Check5
Check that printer is not placed too far away from wireless router.
If the distance between the printer and wireless router is too far, wireless communication becomes poor. Place the printer and wireless router close to each other.
Check6
Check that wireless signal is strong. Monitor signal status and move printer and wireless router as necessary.
Place the printer and wireless router where there are no obstacles between them. Wireless communication between different rooms or floors is generally poor. Wireless communication can be impeded by building materials containing metal or concrete. If the printer cannot communicate with the computer over a Wi-Fi due to a wall, place the printer and the computer in the same room.
In addition, if a device like a microwave oven that emits radio waves of the same frequency bandwidth as a wireless router is nearby, it may cause interference. Place the wireless router as far away from interference sources as possible.
Check the signal strength on the LCD.
417
Cannot Communicate with Printer while It Is in Wireless Direct
If your smartphone/tablet cannot communicate with the printer in the Wireless Direct, check the following.
Check1
Check power status of printer and device (e.g. smartphone/tablet).
Turn on the printer or your device.
If the power is already turned on, cycle the power switch.
Check2
printer.
Check if the icon is displayed on the top of the HOME screen of the
If it is not displayed, Wireless Direct is disabled. Please turn on the Wireless Direct.
Check3
Check settings of device (e.g. smartphone/tablet).
Make sure Wi-Fi is enabled on your device.
For details, refer to your device's instruction manual.
Check4
tablet).
Check that printer is selected as connection for devices (e.g. smartphone/
Select the network name (SSID) for Wireless Direct specified for the printer as the connection destination for devices.
Check the destination on your device.
For details, refer to your device's instruction manual or visit the manufacturer's website.
To check the network name (SSID) for Wireless Direct specified for the printer, display it using the operation panel of the printer or print it out.
Check5
Check that wireless direct password set for printer is entered correctly.
To check the password specified for the printer, display it using the operation panel of the printer or print it out.
Check6
Check that printer is not placed too far away from devices.
418
If the distance between the printer and devices is too far, wireless communication becomes poor. Place the printer and devices close to each other.
Check7
Check that 5 devices are already connected.
Wireless Direct does not allow more than 5 devices to be connected.
Note
• • Some printers support IEEE802.1X/EAP (WPA/WPA2/WPA3 Enterprise). Note that when
IEEE802.1X/EAP (WPA/WPA2/WPA3 Enterprise) is set to Enable , Wireless Direct is set to Disable .
• • Depending on the specifications of the printer you are using, some of the features described (scanner/ copy, etc.) may not apply.
For details about the functions of your printer, see Specifications .
419
Printing Problems
Printer Does Not Print
Printer Does Not Pick Up or Feed the Paper/"No Paper" Error
Printout (Copy) Results Are Unsatisfactory
Change to Offline (Windows)
420
Printer Does Not Print
Check1
Make sure printer is turned on.
If not, make sure the printer is securely plugged in and press ON button to turn on.
The ON lamp flashes while the printer is initializing. Wait until the ON lamp stops flashing and remains lit.
Note
• If you are printing large data such as photos or other graphics, printing may take longer to start. The ON lamp flashes while the computer is processing data and sending it to the printer. Wait until printing starts.
Check2
Make sure that the cassette is correctly inserted.
If there is an object under the printer, the cassette cannot be correctly inserted and paper may not be correctly fed.
Make sure there are no objects under the printer and push the cassette flatly into the printer until it stops.
Loading Plain Paper in Cassette
Check3
Make sure printer is properly connected to computer.
If you are using a USB cable, make sure it is securely connected to both the printer and the computer. When the
USB cable is securely plugged in, check the following: computer, and retry the printing. If printing starts normally, there is a problem with the relay device. Contact the vendor of the relay device.
If you use the printer with a network connection, make sure the printer is correctly set up for network use.
Cannot Find Printer on Network (Windows/macOS)
Note
Select the link below to download Wi-Fi Connection Assistant and install it.
Checking Printer Connection Status Using Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
See below for starting up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant.
For Windows:
Starting Up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
421
For macOS:
Starting Up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
Check4
flat tray.
Make sure paper settings match information set for rear tray, cassette or rear
If the paper settings do not match the information set for the rear tray, cassette or rear flat tray, an error message appears on the LCD. Follow the instructions on the LCD to solve the problem.
Note
To change the message view setting when printing using the printer's operation panel:
To change the message view setting when printing using the printer driver:
Changing the Printer Operation Mode
(Windows)
Changing the Printer Operation Mode
(macOS)
Check5
If printing from a computer, delete unnecessary print jobs.
• • For Windows:
Deleting the Undesired Print Job
• • For macOS:
Deleting the Undesired Print Job
Check6
Is your printer's printer driver selected when printing?
The printer will not print properly if you are using a printer driver for a different printer.
• • For Windows:
Make sure "Canon XXX series" (where "XXX" is your printer's name) is selected in the Print dialog box.
Note selected by default.
Default Printer Keeps Changing (Windows)
• • For macOS:
Make sure your printer's name is selected in Printer in the Print dialog.
Note
• If multiple printers are registered to your computer, select Set as Default Printer from System
Preferences > Printers & Scanners for a printer to make the one selected by default.
Check7
Are you trying to print a large data file? (Windows)
422
If you are trying to print a large data file, it takes a long time to start printing.
If the printer does not start printing after a certain period of time, select On for Prevention of Print Data Loss on the Print Options dialog box.
For details, refer to
Important
• Selecting On for Prevention of Print Data Loss may reduce print quality.
• After printing is completed, select Off for Prevention of Print Data Loss .
Check8
If printing from your computer, restart the computer.
Restart the computer and try printing again.
Important
To restart your computer, choose Restart instead of Shut down .
423
Printer Does Not Pick Up or Feed the Paper/"No Paper" Error
Check1
Make sure paper is loaded in the specified rear tray, cassette or rear flat tray.
Check2
When loading paper, consider the following.
limit.
However, paper may not feed correctly at the maximum capacity, depending on the type of paper or environmental conditions (very high or low temperature and humidity). In such cases, reduce the amount of paper you load at a time to less than half of the paper load limit.
guides with the paper stack.
paper guides with the paper stack.
Check3
Is paper too thick or curled?
Check4
When loading envelopes, consider the following.
When printing on envelopes, see Loading Envelopes in Rear Tray
, and prepare the envelopes before printing.
Once you have prepared the envelopes, load them in portrait orientation. If the envelopes are placed in landscape orientation, they will not feed properly.
Check5
Make sure media type and paper size settings match with loaded paper.
Check6
Make sure that there are not any foreign objects in the rear tray.
If the paper tears in the rear tray, see
What to Do When Paper Is Jammed
to remove it.
If a foreign object is inside the rear tray, remove it according to the following procedure.
424
Insert the paper so that your hand does not directly touch the part in the center of the rear tray when removing the foreign object.
Put your hand between the paper you inserted and the rear tray to remove the foreign object.
425
Important
Check7
Clean Paper Feed Roller.
Note
Check8
cassette.
If two or more sheets of paper feed from cassette at once, clean inside of
Cleaning Cassette Pads
Check9
Are transport unit attached properly?
See Rear View for the positions of the transport unit.
If the measures above do not solve the problem, contact your nearest Canon service center to request a repair.
Important
• Do not tilt the printer when moving it since the ink may leak out.
• When transporting the printer for repairing it, see Repairing Your Printer.
426
Printout (Copy) Results Are Unsatisfactory
If the print results are unsatisfactory due to white streaks, misaligned/distorted lines, or uneven colors, check the paper and print quality settings first.
Check1
Make sure that
Print target for plain paper
is set to
Text and photos
.
Select Settings on HOME screen, select Device settings > Print settings and make sure that Print target for plain paper is set to Text and photos .
If Print target for plain paper is set to Text only , change it to Text and photos .
Check2
Do page size and media type settings match size and type of loaded paper?
If these settings do not match, it is not possible to obtain the proper result.
If you are printing a photograph or an illustration, an incorrect paper type setting may reduce the quality of the printout color.
Also, if you print with an incorrect paper type setting, the printed surface may be scratched.
The method for checking the paper and print quality settings differs depending on what you are using your printer for.
• • Printing from printer
Check the settings using the LCD.
• • Printing from your computer
Check the settings using the printer driver.
• • Printing from your smartphone/tablet using Canon PRINT Inkjet/SELPHY
Check the settings on Canon PRINT Inkjet/SELPHY.
Print Photos from Your Smartphone
Check3
Make sure appropriate print quality is selected (see list above).
Select a print quality suited to the paper and to what you are printing. If you notice blurs or uneven colors, increase the print quality setting and retry the printing.
Check4
If problem is not resolved, click on illustration that corresponds to problem.
427
Ink Does Not Come
Out
Blurry or Fuzzy Inaccurate or
Bleeding Colors
Streaks
Printed in Black and
White
Lines Are
Misaligned/Distorted
Paper Is Smudged/
Printed Surface Is
Scratched
Ink Blots/Paper Curl
428
Images Incomplete/
Cannot Complete
Printing
Lines Incomplete or
Missing (Windows)
Back of Paper Is
Smudged
Uneven Colors
Streaked Colors
Printed Barcodes
Are Not Recognized
The Print Position
Shifts
Note
• • Depending on the specifications of the printer you are using, some of the features described (scanner/ copy, etc.) may not apply.
For details about the functions of your printer, see Specifications .
429
Ink Does Not Come Out/Blurry or Fuzzy/Inaccurate or Bleeding
Colors/Streaks
Ink Does Not Come Out Blurry or Fuzzy Inaccurate or Bleeding
Colors
Streaks
Note
• • If printouts are blank, black does not print, is faint, or has a blue or red tint, refer to this web page.
Check1
Check paper and print quality settings.
Printout (Copy) Results Are Unsatisfactory
Check2
Are the print head nozzles clogged?
Print the nozzle check pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles.
Step1 Print the nozzle check pattern.
After printing the nozzle check pattern, examine the pattern.
Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern
◦ For Windows:
Printing a Nozzle Check Pattern
◦ For macOS:
Printing a Nozzle Check Pattern
If the pattern is not printed correctly, go to the next step.
Step2 Clean the print head.
After cleaning the print head, print the nozzle check pattern and check the result.
430
◦ For Windows:
Clean the print head
◦ For macOS:
If it still does not improve, go to the next step.
Step3 Clean the print head again.
After cleaning the print head again, print the nozzle check pattern and check the result.
If it still does not improve, go to the next step.
Step4 Clean the print head deeply.
After cleaning the print head deeply, print the nozzle check pattern and check the result.
◦ For Windows:
Clean the print head deeply
◦ For macOS:
If it does not improve, turn off the printer, wait for more than 24 hours without unplugging the power supply, and go to the next step.
Step5 Clean the print head deeply again.
After cleaning the print head deeply again, print the nozzle check pattern and check the result.
For details on printing the nozzle check pattern, print head cleaning, and print head deep cleaning, see
.
Check3
When using paper with one printable surface, check the correct printable side of the paper.
Printing on the wrong side of such paper may cause unclear prints or prints with reduced quality.
When you load paper on the rear tray or rear flat tray, load paper with the printable side facing up. When you load paper in the cassette, load paper with the printable side facing down.
Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the paper for detailed information on the printable side.
• • When copying, see also the sections below:
Check4
Is platen glass dirty?
Clean the platen glass.
Cleaning Platen and Document Cover
Check5
Make sure original is properly loaded on platen.
When you load the original on the platen, load it with the side to be copied facing down.
431
Check6
Is copy source a printed paper by printer?
If you use a printout done by this printer as the original, print quality may be reduced depending on the condition of the original.
Print from the printer directly, or reprint from the computer if you can reprint from it.
Check7
If the ink still does not come out.
Replace Ink in Print Head
Note printed correctly.
432
Printed in Black and White
If the ink used by the printer is set to Black only , printouts from a computer etc. will be printed in black and white.
To print in color, select Settings on HOME screen, select Device settings > Other device settings and set
Force ink tank selection to All ink tanks .
Note
• If you print from the printer's operation panel, the printer prints in color, regardless of the ink settings used by the printer.
433
Lines Are Misaligned/Distorted
Note
• • For the case of misaligned or distortion, refer to this web page.
Check1
Check paper and print quality settings.
Printout (Copy) Results Are Unsatisfactory
Check2
Perform print head alignment.
If printed lines are misaligned/distorted or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory, adjust the print head position.
Note manually.
Adjusting the Print Head Manually
Check3
Increase print quality and try printing again.
Increasing the print quality using operation panel or from computer may improve the print result.
434
Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched/Ink Blots/Paper
Curl
Check1
Check paper and print quality settings.
Printout (Copy) Results Are Unsatisfactory
Check2
Check paper type.
Make sure you are using the right paper for what you are printing. To print data with high color saturation such as photographs or images with dark colors, we recommend that you use Photo Paper Plus Glossy II or other Canon specialty paper.
Check3
Correct curl before loading paper.
When using Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss, even if the sheet is curled, load one sheet at a time as it is. Rolling this paper in the opposite direction to flatten it may crack the paper surface and reduce the print quality.
We recommend putting unused paper back into the package and storing it flat.
• • Plain Paper
Turn the paper over and reload it to print on the other side.
• • Other Paper such as envelope
If the paper corners curl more than 0.1 in. / 3 mm (A) in height, the paper may smudge or may not feed properly. Follow the instructions below to correct the paper curl.
435
We recommend printing curl-corrected paper one sheet at a time.
Note
Follow the instructions below to curl the paper outward up to 0.1 in. / 3 mm (C) in height before printing.
This may improve the print result.
(B) Print side
We recommend feeding paper that has been curled outward one sheet at a time.
Check4
Set printer to prevent paper abrasion.
Adjusting the setting to prevent paper abrasion will widen the clearance between the print head and the paper.
If you notice abrasion even with the media type set correctly to match the paper, set the printer to prevent paper abrasion using the operation panel or the computer.
This may reduce the print speed.
* Once you have finished printing, undo this setting. Otherwise, it will apply to subsequent print jobs.
Select Settings on HOME screen > Device settings > Print settings and set Prevent paper abrasion to ON .
Changing Settings from Operation Panel
Check5
If ink bleeds, make sure that
Improve bleeding and thickened black text/ lines (plain paper)
is checked. (Windows)
It may be possible to improve the bleeding of characters and lines when printing on plain paper.
Set it at Print Options dialog box on Page Setup sheet in the printer driver.
Restore the setting after printing.
436
Check6
If brightness is set low, increase brightness setting and try printing again.
If you are printing with a low brightness setting on plain paper, the paper may absorb too much ink and become wavy, causing paper abrasion.
Check the brightness setting in the printer driver.
Check7
Is platen glass dirty?
Clean the platen glass.
Cleaning Platen and Document Cover
Check8
Is paper feed roller dirty?
Clean paper feed roller.
Note
Check9
Is inside of printer dirty?
During duplex printing, ink may stain the inside of the printer, smudging the printout.
Perform bottom plate cleaning to clean inside of printer.
Cleaning Inside the Printer (Bottom Plate Cleaning)
Note
Check10
Set longer ink drying time.
This allows the printed surface to dry, preventing smudges and scratches.
• • For Windows:
Set the waiting time using Canon IJ Printer Assistant Tool.
Changing the Printer Operation Mode
• • For macOS:
Set the waiting time using Remote UI.
Opening Remote UI for Maintenance
437
Images Incomplete/Cannot Complete Printing
If the printing of photos, images, stops in the middle of printing and cannot be printed to the end, check the following items.
Check1
Select setting not to compress printing data. (Windows)
If you select the setting not to compress the printing data with an application software you are using, the printing result may be improved.
Click Print Options on Page Setup sheet of the printer driver. Select the Do not allow application software to compress print data check box and click OK .
Important
Check2
Are you trying to print a large data file? (Windows)
If you are trying to print a large data file, printing may not be performed properly due to missing print data.
Select On for Prevention of Print Data Loss on the Print Options dialog box of the printer driver.
For details, refer to
Important
• Selecting On for Prevention of Print Data Loss may reduce print quality.
• After printing is completed, select Off for Prevention of Print Data Loss .
Check3
Your hard disk may not have sufficient free space to store job.
Delete unnecessary files to free up disk space.
438
Lines Incomplete or Missing (Windows)
Check1
Are you using Page Layout Printing or Binding Margin function?
When the Page Layout Printing or Binding margin function is in use, thin lines may not be printed. Try thickening the lines in the document.
Check2
Are you trying to print a large data file? (Windows)
If you are trying to print a large data file, printing may not be performed properly due to missing print data.
Select On for Prevention of Print Data Loss on the Print Options dialog box of the printer driver.
For details, refer to
Important
• Selecting On for Prevention of Print Data Loss may reduce print quality.
• After printing is completed, select Off for Prevention of Print Data Loss .
439
Back of Paper Is Smudged
Check1
Check paper and print quality settings.
Printout (Copy) Results Are Unsatisfactory
Check2
Perform bottom plate cleaning to clean inside of printer.
Cleaning Inside the Printer (Bottom Plate Cleaning)
Note
440
Uneven or Streaked Colors
Check1
Increase print quality and try printing again.
Increasing the print quality using the operation panel or the printer driver may improve the print result.
Check2
Perform print head alignment.
Note alignment manually.
Adjusting the Print Head Manually
441
Change to Offline (Windows)
If the printer cannot communicate with the computer, an error message "Offline" may be displayed when printing. To bring the printer back online, try the following.
1.
Check the connection (USB/Wi-Fi).
For USB connection:
Make sure that the USB-connected printer is recognized by the computer.
For Wi-Fi connections:
Make sure that icon appears on the printer's LCD.
2.
Turn off printer and then turn it on again.
Confirm that the offline mode has been disabled. If the printer is still offline, proceed to the next step.
3.
Check the name of the printer driver.
Check the names of the printer and printer driver match and set the using printer as default.
Default Printer Keeps Changing (Windows)
Confirm that the offline mode has been disabled. If the printer is still offline, proceed to the next step.
4.
Make sure that printer is not set to Use Printer Offline mode.
For Windows 11:
Press the Windows key and I key together, then click About (or Version Information) in the System dialog to display System version.
If the version is 22H2 or later proceed to the next step, if it is 21H2 check the followings.
Select Start > Settings > Bluetooth & devices > Printers & scanners . Select your printer and select Open print queue . Under Printer , make sure that Use Printer Offline is not selected.
Note
• For Windows 10:
Select Start > Settings > Devices > Printers & scanners . Select your printer and select
Open queue . Under Printer , make sure that Use Printer Offline is not selected.
442
• For Windows 8/Windows 8.1:
From the Control Panel , select View devices and printers or Devices and Printers . Select your printer from Printers , then select See what's printing from the toolbar. Under Printer , make sure that Use Printer Offline is not selected.
Confirm that the offline mode has been disabled. If the printer is still offline, proceed to the next step.
5.
For Wi-Fi connections, use Wi-Fi Connection Assistant to change settings.
Diagnose and repair the network connections using Wi-Fi Connection Assistant.
Download Wi-Fi Connection Assistant from the below page, and install it on your computer.
Checking Printer Connection Status Using Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
Refer to below in regard to starting up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant.
Starting Up Wi-Fi Connection Assistant
Confirm that the offline mode has been disabled. If the printer is still offline, proceed to the next step.
6.
Uninstall printer driver and reinstall printer driver.
If your printer driver version is old or not installed correctly, you may not be able to print.
Confirm that the offline mode has been disabled. If the printer is still offline, proceed to the next step.
7.
Restart computer.
The computer may be unstable for some reason. Restart the computer and try to print.
Important
• When restarting the computer, choose Restart instead of Shut down .
443
Scanning Problems (Windows)
Scanning Problems
444
Scanning Problems
Scanner Does Not Work
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start
445
Scanner Does Not Work
Check 1
Make sure that your scanner or printer is turned on.
Check 2
Check for any printererrors.
For messages, see When Error Occurred.
Check 3
Connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer.
Check 4
If the USB cable is connected to a USB hub, remove it from the USB hub and connect it to a USB port on the computer.
Check 5
needed.
With network connection, check the connection status and reconnect as
Check 6
Restart the computer.
Check 7
Reinstall MP Drivers from the Setup CD-ROM or our website.
446
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start
Check 1
Make sure MP Drivers is installed.
If not installed, install MP Drivers from the Setup CD-ROM or our website.
Check 2
Select your scanner or printer on the application's menu.
Important
• If your scanner or printer name is displayed multiple times, select the one that does not include WIA.
Note
• The operation may differ depending on the application.
Scanning with WIA Driver
Check 3
Make sure that the application supports TWAIN.
You cannot start ScanGear (scanner driver) from applications not supporting TWAIN.
Check 4
Scan and save images with IJ Scan Utility and open the files in your application.
447
Scanning Problems (macOS)
Scanning Problems
448
Scanning Problems
Scanner Does Not Work
Scanner Driver Does Not Start
449
Scanner Does Not Work
Check 1
Check that your scanner or printer is turned on.
Check 2
Check for any printer errors.
For messages, see When Error Occurred.
Check 3
needed.
With network connection, check the connection status and reconnect as
Check 4
computer.
With USB connection, connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the
Check 5
If the USB cable is connected to a USB hub, remove it from the USB hub and connect it to a USB port on the computer.
Check 6
Restart the computer.
Check 7
To scan from the printer's operation panel with USB connection, click
Scanfrom-Operation-Panel Settings
in the
Settings (General Settings)
dialog, and then check that the following checkboxes are selected.
• Your scanner or printer
• Enables scanning from the operation panel
450
Scanner Driver Does Not Start
Check 1
Make sure the application software supports AirPrint.
Check 2
Select your scanner or printer on the application's menu.
Note
• The operation may differ depending on the application.
Check 3
Scan and save images with IJ Scan Utility Lite and open the files in your application.
Check 4
Your scanner may be locked. (Personal scanners only)
If IJ Scan Utility Lite or the application is running, exit it. Slide the scanner lock switch to the release position
( ), then reconnect the USB cable.
451
Mechanical Problems
Printer Does Not Turn On
Printer Turns Off Unexpectedly or Repeatedly
USB Connection Problems
Switching Printer's Connection to Network or Devices
Wrong Language Appears in LCD
452
Printer Does Not Turn On
Check1
Press
ON
button.
Check2
Make sure power plug is securely connected to printer, and then turn on again.
Check3
on again.
Unplug printer, leave it for at least 2 minutes, and then plug it back in and turn
If this does not solve the problem, contact your nearest Canon service center to request a repair.
453
Printer Turns Off Unexpectedly or Repeatedly
Check
If printer is set to turn off automatically after a certain time, disable this setting.
If you have set the printer to turn off automatically after a specified time, the power will shut off by itself once that time has elapsed.
2. Select Settings on HOME screen and press OK button.
3. Select ECO settings and press OK button.
4. Select PwrControl settings and press OK button.
5. Select Auto pwr control ON and press OK button.
6. Select Auto power off: OFF and press OK button.
7. Select OFF and press the OK button.
The setting to shut off the power automatically is disabled and return to HOME screen.
Note
• You can use the scheduling function of the Remote UI to turn the printer on or off at a specified time.
454
USB Connection Problems
If the printer connected to the computer via USB is not recognized, check the following items.
The following problems may occur even though the USB connection is recognized.
• Printing (scanning) is slow.
• Hi-Speed USB connection does not work.
• A message such as " This device can perform faster " appears. (Windows)
If the above is the case, check the following.
USB Connection Does Not Work Properly
Note
• If your system environment does not support Hi-Speed USB, the printer operates at the slower speed of Full-Speed or Low-Speed. In this case, the printer works properly but printing (scanning) speed may slow down due to the communication speed.
USB Connection Not Recognized
Check1
Check that printer is turned on.
Check2
again.
Unplug the USB cable from the printer and the computer, and then connect it
As the illustration below, the USB port is at the back of the printer.
Important
• Check the orientation of the "Type-B" connector and connect to the printer. For details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the USB cable.
455
Check3
Check that
Enable bidirectional support
is selected in
Ports
sheet of
Printer properties
dialog box. (Windows)
If not, select it to enable bidirectional support.
Opening Printer Driver's Setup Screen
USB Connection Does Not Work Properly
Check
Check following to make sure your system environment supports Hi-Speed
USB connection.
cable connection of the printer.
What Is USB Cable?
Be sure to use a certified Hi-Speed USB cable. We recommend that the USB cable be no longer than 10 feet / 3 meters or so.
Make sure the latest Hi-Speed USB driver is working properly and install the latest version of the
Hi-Speed USB driver for your computer, if necessary.
Important
456
Wrong Language Appears in LCD
Follow the instructions below to select your language.
1.
Press HOME button twice.
2.
Press button 3 times on HOME screen and press OK button.
3.
Press button 1 time and press OK button.
4.
Press button 3 times and press OK button.
5.
Select a language using button and press OK button.
6.
Press OK button.
457
Installation and Download Problems
Failed to MP Drivers (Printer Driver) Installation (Windows)
Cannot Proceed Beyond Printer Connection Screen (Cannot Find Printer
Connected via USB)
Updating MP Drivers (Printer Driver) in Network Environment (Windows)
Disable Function to Send Usage Information of Printer
458
Failed to MP Drivers (Printer Driver) Installation (Windows)
If the MP Drivers (Printer Driver) were not installed correctly, make sure that all Windows Updates have been applied. If all Windows Updates have not been applied, apply all Windows Updates .
After confirming Windows Update , perform the following operations to install the MP Drivers (Printer
Driver).
1.
Open screen to uninstall MP Drivers (Printer Driver).
For Windows 11:
Select Settings > Apps .
Select Apps & features .
For Windows 10:
Select Settings > Apps .
For Windows 8.1 / Windows 7:
Select Control Panel > Programs and Features .
2.
Check if there is " Canon XXX series Driver " or " Canon XXX series Printer Driver " you want to install in list.
"XXX" is the model name.
3.
If you find MP Drivers (Printer Driver) for printer you want to install, uninstall it.
If not found, proceed to the next step.
4.
Restart computer.
After restarting, install the latest MP Drivers (Printer Driver).
Important
To restart your computer, choose Restart instead of Shut down .
459
Cannot Proceed Beyond Printer Connection Screen (Cannot Find
Printer Connected via USB)
If you cannot proceed beyond the Printer Connection screen, check the following.
Check1
Make sure USB cable is securely plugged in to printer and computer.
Connect the printer and the computer using a USB cable as the illustration below. The USB port is located at the back of the printer.
Important
• Check the orientation of the "Type-B" connector and connect to the printer. For details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the USB cable.
Check2
Follow procedure below to connect printer and computer again.
Important
• For macOS, make sure the lock icon is on the lower left of the Printers & Scanners screen.
If the icon (locked) is displayed, click the icon to unlock. (The administrator name and the password are necessary to unlock.)
Check3
Follow the steps below to install MP Drivers (Printer Driver) again.
460
After restarting, install the latest MP Drivers (Printer Driver) downloaded in step 1.
Important
To restart your computer, choose Restart instead of Shut down .
461
Updating MP Drivers (Printer Driver) in Network Environment
(Windows)
Download the latest MP Drivers (Printer Driver) in advance.
Download the latest MP Drivers (Printer Driver) for your model on the download page of the Canon website.
After the download is completed, overwrite and install the new version of the MP Drivers (Printer Driver) according to the specified installation procedure.
Note
• The network settings on the printer are not affected, so the printer can be used on the network without redoing settings.
462
Errors and Messages
When Error Occurred
Message Is Displayed
463
When Error Occurred
If an error occurs while printing, for example, if the paper runs out or jams, a troubleshooting message is displayed automatically. For some errors, a support code (error number) is also displayed.
Take the appropriate action described in the message.
When a Support Code and a Message are displayed on the Computer
Screen (Windows):
When a Support Code and a Message are displayed on the Printer's
LCD:
464
For details on how to resolve errors with Support Codes, see
List of Support Codes for Printer Errors .
For details on how to resolve errors without Support Codes, see Message Is Displayed
.
465
Message Is Displayed
This section describes some of the messages.
If a message is displayed on the printer's LCD, see below.
Message Is Displayed on Printer's LCD
If a message is displayed on the computer, see below.
Error Regarding Automatic Duplex Printing Is Displayed
Error Regarding Power Cord Being Unplugged Is Displayed (Windows)
Writing Error/Output Error/Communication Error (Windows)
Other Error Messages (Windows)
Message Is Displayed on Printer's LCD
Check the message and take appropriate action.
• • Power was not turned off correctly the last time. Press when turning power off.
The printer may have been unplugged while the power was still on.
Press the printer's OK button to cancel the error.
See
Unplugging the Printer to unplug the printer correctly.
• • Cannot connect to the server. Please wait a while and try again.
The printer cannot connect to the server due to a communication error.
Press the printer's OK button to cancel the error and try again after a while.
Error Regarding Automatic Duplex Printing Is Displayed
Check
See Automatic Duplex Printing Problems and take the appropriate action.
Error Regarding Power Cord Being Unplugged Is Displayed (Windows)
The printer may have been unplugged while it was on.
Check the error message displayed on the computer and click OK .
The printer starts printing.
See
Unplugging the Printer to unplug the printer correctly.
Writing Error/Output Error/Communication Error (Windows)
Check 1
If the
ON
lamp is off, make sure printer is plugged in and turn on.
The ON lamp flashes while the printer is initializing. Wait until the ON lamp stops flashing and remains lit.
Check 2
Make sure printer is properly connected to computer.
466
If you are using a USB cable, make sure it is securely connected to both the printer and the computer. When the USB cable is securely plugged in, check the following:
• If you are using a relay device such as a USB hub, disconnect it, connect the printer directly to the computer, and retry the printing. If printing starts normally, there is a problem with the relay device.
Contact the vendor of the relay device.
• There could also be a problem with the USB cable. Replace the USB cable and retry the printing.
If you use the printer over a LAN, make sure the printer is correctly set up for network use.
Check 3
Make sure MP Drivers are installed correctly.
Refer to
to uninstall unnecessary drivers and install the latest drivers.
Check 4
When printer is connected to your computer with a USB cable, check device status from your computer.
Follow the procedure below to check the device status.
1. Select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Device Manager .
Note
• If the User Account Control screen is displayed, select Yes .
2. Open USB Printing Support Properties .
Double-click Universal Serial Bus controllers and USB Printing Support .
Note
• • If the USB Printing Support Properties screen is not displayed, make sure the printer is correctly connected to the computer.
Check 2 Make sure printer is properly connected to computer.
3. Click General tab and check for a device problem.
If a device error is shown, see Windows Help to resolve it.
Other Error Messages (Windows)
Check
If an error message is displayed somewhere other than printer status monitor, check the following:
• " Could not spool successfully due to insufficient disk space "
Delete any unnecessary files to increase the amount of free space on the disk.
• " Could not spool successfully due to insufficient memory "
Close other applications to increase the available memory.
If you still cannot print, restart your computer and retry the printing.
• " Printer driver could not be found "
467
to uninstall unnecessary drivers and install the latest drivers.
• " Could not print Application name - File name"
Try printing again once the current job is complete.
468
List of Support Codes for Printer Errors
Support codes are displayed on the printer's LCD and your computer screen when errors occur.
A "support code" is an error number, and is displayed along with an error message.
When an error occurs, check the support code and take the appropriate action in response.
Support Codes Displayed on Printer's LCD and Computer Screen
• • 1000 to 1ZZZ
1015 1070 1071 1072 1073
1215 1263 1264 1265
1266 1267 1268 1300 1303 1304 1309 1310 1313 1369 136A
1403 1405 140B 1434 147C 147D
15A1 15A2 1643
1831 1871
• • 2000 to 2ZZZ
2120 2123 21F0
2500 2700
• • 3000 to 3ZZZ
3405 3407 3412 3413 3414 3415 3416 3417 3418 3419 3420
3421 3422 3423 3424 3438 3440 3441 3442 3443 3444 3445 3446
3447 3454 3455
• • 4000 to 4ZZZ
4104 4109 495A
• • 5000 to 5ZZZ
5011 5012 5050
5207 5400 5C00 5C02 5C03 5C30
• • 6000 to 6ZZZ
6005 6006 6500 6503 6700 6701 6800 6801 6830 6831 6832
6833 6900 6901 6902 6910 6930 6931 6932 6933 6936 6937 6938
6940 6941 6942 6943 6944 6945 6946 6D01
469
• • 7000 to 7ZZZ
7500 7600 7700 7800
• • A000 to ZZZZ
B506 B508 B509 C000 C001 C100 C101
Note
• If no support code is displayed but the paper is not fed or output normally, see What to Do If Paper Is
Not Fed/Output Normally.
470
What to Do When Paper Is Jammed
If a paper jam occurs during printing (when the support code 1300/1303/1304/1313 is displayed), follow the procedure below.
Note
• If the paper is not jammed (no support code displayed) but the paper is not fed or output normally, see
What to Do If Paper Is Not Fed/Output Normally.
Important
• When checking the paper output slot / feed slot or removing any foreign objects, do not turn the printer upside down or tilt it. The ink may leak out.
Check 1
size?
Did you try to print on a small paper size such as
4"x6" 10x15cm
or
Card
What to Do When Small Paper Sizes Are Jammed
Check 2
Did you try to print from the rear flat tray (A)?
Removing Jammed Paper through Feed Slot of Rear Flat Tray
Check 3
Is the jammed paper visible in the paper output slot (B)?
471
Removing Jammed Paper through Paper Output Slot
Check 4
Are there any foreign objects in the feed slot of the rear tray (C)?
What to Do If Paper Is Not Fed/Output Normally
Check 5
Is the jammed paper visible in the feed slot of the rear tray (C)?
Remove any paper other than the jammed paper on the rear tray, and then check if the jammed paper is visible in the feed slot of the rear tray.
Removing Jammed Paper through Feed Slot of Rear Tray
Check 6
Is the jammed paper visible in the feed slot of the cassette (D)?
Retract the paper output tray, and then check if the jammed paper is visible in the feed slot of the cassette.
472
Removing Jammed Paper through Feed Slot of Cassette
Check 7
If the jammed paper is not visible in the paper output slot or the feed slot.
Removing Jammed Paper inside Printer
Removing Jammed Paper through Feed Slot of Rear Flat Tray
1.
Press printer's Stop button.
2.
Hold jammed paper firmly with both hands and pull it out slowly.
Slowly pull out the paper so as not to tear it.
3.
Redo printing.
All jobs in the print queue are canceled. Redo the printing.
473
Important paperboard.". An error also occurs if the paper is not loaded in the correct position.
Refer to Loading Paperboard in Rear Flat Tray
and follow the messages displayed on the printer's LCD.
If the measures above do not solve the problem, contact your nearest Canon service center to request a repair.
Important
• Do not tilt the printer when moving it since the ink may leak out.
• When transporting the printer for repairing it, see Repairing Your Printer.
Removing Jammed Paper through Paper Output Slot
1.
Hold jammed paper firmly with both hands and pull it out slowly.
Slowly pull out the paper so as not to tear it.
Note be ejected automatically.
Press the printer's Stop button to stop printing, and then turn off the printer.
jammed paper inside the printer.
Removing Jammed Paper inside Printer
2.
Press printer's OK button.
The printer resumes printing. Reprint the page you were printing if it was not printed properly due to the paper jam.
If you turned off the printer in step 1, all jobs in the print queue are canceled. Redo the printing.
474
Note
• When reloading the paper, make sure you are using suitable paper and loading it correctly.
• We recommend using paper sizes other than A5 to print documents with photos or graphics. A5 paper may curl and jam as it leaves the printer.
If the measures above do not solve the problem, a bit of paper may remain in the printer. See
.
Removing Jammed Paper through Feed Slot of Rear Tray
1.
Hold jammed paper firmly with both hands and pull it out slowly.
Slowly pull out the paper so as not to tear it.
Note unit and then pull out the jammed paper from the feed slot of the rear tray.
Removing Jammed Paper from Rear Side
2.
Load paper in rear tray.
Loading Photo Paper / Plain Paper in Rear Tray
Loading Envelopes in Rear Tray
Note
• Make sure you are using suitable paper and loading it correctly.
• We recommend using paper sizes other than A5 to print documents with photos or graphics. A5 paper may curl and jam as it leaves the printer.
3.
Press printer's OK button.
The printer resumes printing. Reprint the page you were printing if it was not printed properly due to the paper jam.
475
If the measures above do not solve the problem, a bit of paper may remain in the printer. See
.
Removing Jammed Paper through Feed Slot of Cassette
1.
Hold jammed paper firmly with both hands and pull it out slowly.
Slowly pull out the paper so as not to tear it.
Note jammed paper from the rear side.
Removing Jammed Paper from Rear Side
2.
Load paper in cassette.
Loading Plain Paper in Cassette
Note
• The loadable paper in the cassette is A4, Letter, A5, B5 or Executive size plain paper.
3.
Press printer's OK button.
The printer resumes printing. Reprint the page you were printing if it was not printed properly due to the paper jam.
If the measures above do not solve the problem, a bit of paper may remain in the printer. See
.
476
Removing Jammed Paper inside Printer
1.
Press printer's Stop button.
2.
Turn off printer and unplug it.
3.
Open scanning unit / cover.
Important
If you soil or scratch this part by touching it with paper or your hand, it could damage the printer.
4.
Check if jammed paper is under print head holder.
If the jammed paper is under the print head holder, move the print head holder to the far right or left, whichever makes it easier to remove the paper.
When moving the print head holder, hold the print head holder and slide it slowly to the far right or left.
477
5.
Hold jammed paper firmly with both hands.
If the paper is rolled up, pull it out and grasp the edges of the paper.
6.
Slowly pull out jammed paper so as not to tear it.
Pull out the paper at an angle of about 45 degrees.
478
7.
Make sure all jammed paper is removed.
If the paper tears when you pull out it, a bit of paper may remain in the printer. Check the following and remove any remaining paper.
• Any paper left under the print head holder?
• Any small bits of paper left in the printer?
• Any paper left in the left and right empty spaces (D) in the printer?
8.
Close scanning unit / cover.
To close the scanning unit / cover, lift it up slightly and then lower it gently.
479
9.
Plug printer back in and turn printer back on.
10.
Load paper.
Loading Photo Paper / Plain Paper in Rear Tray
Loading Envelopes in Rear Tray
Loading Plain Paper in Cassette
Note
• Make sure you are using suitable paper and loading it correctly.
• We recommend using paper sizes other than A5 to print documents with photos or graphics. A5 paper may curl and jam as it leaves the printer.
11.
Redo printing.
All jobs in the print queue are canceled. Redo the printing.
If the measures above do not solve the problem, see Removing Jammed Paper from Rear Side .
480
Removing Jammed Paper from Rear Side
1.
Press printer's Stop button.
2.
Turn off printer and unplug it.
3.
Retract paper support and paper output tray.
4.
Turn printer so that rear side of printer faces toward you.
Important
• When changing the orientation of the printer, do not turn the printer upside down or tilt it. The ink may leak out.
5.
Detach transport unit cover.
Pull out the transport unit cover.
481
6.
Hold jammed paper firmly with both hands and pull it out slowly.
If the paper is rolled up, pull it out and grasp the edges of the paper.
Note
• Do not touch the inner parts of the printer.
If you are unable to remove the jammed paper, follow the steps below to detach the transport unit and then remove the paper.
1.
Detach transport unit.
Lift up the transport unit and pull it out.
482
2.
Slowly pull out jammed paper.
Note
• Do not touch the inner parts of the printer.
3.
Make sure all jammed paper is removed.
4.
If parts (A) are raised, tip them toward you.
Important
• If you replace the transport unit without lowering parts (A) toward you, it could damage the printer.
483
5.
Replace transport unit.
Insert the transport unit until it reaches the back of the printer.
7.
Attach transport unit cover.
Insert the projections of the right side of the transport unit cover into the printer, and then push the left side of the transport unit cover until it is closed completely.
484
8.
Plug printer back in and turn printer back on.
9.
Load paper.
Loading Photo Paper / Plain Paper in Rear Tray
Loading Envelopes in Rear Tray
Loading Plain Paper in Cassette
Note
• Make sure you are using suitable paper and loading it correctly.
• We recommend using paper sizes other than A5 to print documents with photos or graphics. A5 paper may curl and jam as it leaves the printer.
10.
Redo printing.
All jobs in the print queue are canceled. Redo the printing.
Note
• If the 1300 error recurs, check the feed slot of the rear tray again. If a foreign object is in the rear tray, refer to Check 1 in What to Do If Paper Is Not Fed/Output Normally and take appropriate action.
If the measures above do not solve the problem, contact your nearest Canon service center to request a repair.
485
Important
• Do not tilt the printer when moving it since the ink may leak out.
• When transporting the printer for repairing it, see Repairing Your Printer.
486
1000
Cause
Possible causes include the following.
• There is no paper in the rear tray.
• Paper is not loaded in the rear tray properly.
• There are any foreign objects in the rear tray.
What to Do
• • After loading the paper in the rear tray correctly, follow the messages displayed on the printer's LCD.
Loading Photo Paper / Plain Paper in Rear Tray
Loading Envelopes in Rear Tray
• If a foreign object is in the rear tray, refer to Check 1 in What to Do If Paper Is Not Fed/Output
Normally and take appropriate action.
487
1003
Cause
Possible causes include the following.
• There is no paper in the cassette.
• Paper is not loaded in the cassette properly.
What to Do
After loading the paper in the cassette correctly, follow the messages displayed on the printer's LCD.
Loading Plain Paper in Cassette
Note
• • This error may occur if the transport unit is not installed correctly. Refer to the following page to check the transport unit.
Removing Jammed Paper from Rear Side
488
1200
Cause
Scanning unit / cover is open.
What to Do
Close the scanning unit / cover and wait for a while.
Make sure to close the scanning unit / cover after refilling ink or other operations.
489
1401
Cause
Print head may be damaged.
What to Do
Turn off the printer and turn it back on.
If this does not solve the problem, contact your nearest Canon service center to request a repair.
Important
• Do not tilt the printer when moving it since the ink may leak out.
• When transporting the printer for repairing it, see Repairing Your Printer.
490
1496
Cause
The maintenance cartridge cannot be recognized.
The maintenance cartridge may not be installed properly or may not be compatible with this printer.
What to Do
Remove the maintenance cartridge, and then reinstall it correctly.
Refer to Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge for details on removing and installing the maintenance
cartridge.
491
1723
Cause
The maintenance cartridge is not installed.
What to Do
Install the maintenance cartridge.
Refer to Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge for details on installing the maintenance cartridge.
492
1724
Cause
The currently installed maintenance cartridge cannot be used.
This printer cannot use maintenance cartridges that have been installed in other printers.
What to Do
Replace with a new maintenance cartridge.
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
493
1725
Cause
The maintenance cartridge cannot be recognized.
The maintenance cartridge may not be installed properly or may not be compatible with this printer.
What to Do
Remove the maintenance cartridge, and then reinstall it correctly.
Refer to Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge for details on removing and installing the maintenance
cartridge.
494
1726
Cause
The maintenance cartridge is full.
What to Do
Replace the maintenance cartridge.
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
The condition of the maintenance cartridge when this error is displayed will depend on where and how the printer is used.
When this message is displayed, you must replace the maintenance cartridge.
495
1727
Cause
The maintenance cartridge is almost full.
What to Do
The printer will not be able to print with a full maintenance cartridge.
Press the printer's OK button to cancel the error and then prepare a new maintenance cartridge.
For details on the maintenance cartridge, see
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge .
496
Cassette Is Not Installed (1876)
Cause
Possible causes include the following.
• The cassette is not installed.
• The cassette is not pushed all the way into the printer.
What to Do
After loading the paper in the cassette and installing the cassette in the printer, and then follow the messages displayed on the printer's LCD.
Important
• • Align the paper guides of the cassette with both edges of the paper.
Push the cassette all the way into the printer.
Load the paper correctly and install the cassette correctly, referring to Loading Plain Paper in
497
2110
Cause
An incompatible print setting combination has been specified for the paper loaded in the cassette.
Note
•
To disable notifications for this error, disable the function to detect paper setting mismatch.
What to Do
To specify the appropriate print settings for the paper loaded in the cassette and retry printing, follow the steps below.
1.
Press printer's OK button.
2.
Select Cancel print with printer's buttons and press OK button.
3.
Reinstall cassette into printer.
498
4.
Check paper information (paper size and media type).
The paper information is used in the print settings that you specify when you redo the printing in step
5.
After checking the paper information (paper size and media type), select OK with the printer's buttons and press the OK button.
5.
Redo printing.
Note
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
Other Measures
Load paper specified in print settings
To replace the paper in the cassette with paper suitable for the print settings and continue printing, follow the steps below.
1.
Check print settings, and press printer's OK button.
499
2.
Select Replace paper with printer's buttons and press OK button.
3.
Load paper specified in print settings into cassette.
4.
Register paper information (paper size and media type) in printer.
Select Change with the printer's buttons and press the OK button, and then register the paper information (paper size and media type) of the paper loaded in the cassette to the printer correctly.
500
Print without changing paper and print settings
For example, to continue printing with a mismatch between the paper loaded in the cassette and the paper information registered in the printer, follow the steps below.
Important
• The printed result may not be the intended color or size.
1.
Press printer's OK button.
2.
Select Print on set paper with printer's buttons and press OK button.
Note
• Depending on your printer's settings, Print on set paper may not be displayed.
Disable notifications for 2110 error
To disable the function to detect paper setting mismatch, follow the steps below.
1.
Use printer's press OK button.
buttons to scroll printer's HOME screen and select Settings , and
501
2.
Select Feed settings and press OK button.
3.
Select Detect paper setting mismatch and press OK button.
4.
Select Disable and press OK button.
502
2113
Cause
The print settings specified at the start of printing are not suitable for either the paper loaded in the rear tray or the paper loaded in the cassette.
Note
•
To disable notifications for this error, disable the function to detect paper setting mismatch.
What to Do
To specify the appropriate print settings for the paper loaded in the printer and retry printing, follow the steps below.
1.
Press printer's OK button.
2.
Select Cancel print with printer's buttons and press OK button.
3.
Reload paper.
503
4.
Check paper information (paper size and media type).
The paper information is used in the print settings that you specify when you redo the printing in step
5.
After checking the paper information (paper size and media type), select OK with the printer's
buttons and press the OK button.
504
After checking the paper information (paper size and media type), select OK with the printer's
buttons and press the OK button.
5.
Redo printing.
Note
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
Other Measures
Load paper specified in print settings
To replace the paper in the rear tray / cassette with paper suitable for the print settings and continue printing, follow the steps below.
1.
Check print settings, and press printer's OK button.
2.
Select Replace paper with printer's buttons and press OK button.
505
3.
Load paper specified in print settings into rear tray / cassette.
4.
Register paper information (paper size and media type) in printer.
506
Select Change with the printer's buttons and press the OK button, and then register the paper information (paper size and media type) of the paper loaded in the rear tray to the printer correctly.
Select Change with the printer's buttons and press the OK button, and then register the paper information (paper size and media type) of the paper loaded in the cassette to the printer correctly.
Print without changing paper and print settings
For example, to continue printing with a mismatch between the paper loaded in the rear tray and the paper information registered in the printer, follow the steps below.
Important
• The printed result may not be the intended color or size.
1.
Press printer's OK button.
2.
Select Print on set paper with printer's buttons and press OK button.
Note
• Depending on your printer's settings, Print on set paper may not be displayed.
507
Disable notifications for 2113 error
To disable the function to detect paper setting mismatch, follow the steps below.
1.
Use printer's press OK button.
buttons to scroll printer's HOME screen and select Settings , and
2.
Select Feed settings and press OK button.
3.
Select Detect paper setting mismatch and press OK button.
508
4.
Select Disable and press OK button.
509
2114
Cause
An incompatible print setting combination has been specified for the paper loaded in the rear tray.
Note
•
To disable notifications for this error, disable the function to detect paper setting mismatch.
What to Do
To specify the appropriate print settings for the paper loaded in the rear tray and retry printing, follow the steps below.
1.
Press printer's OK button.
2.
Select Cancel print with printer's buttons and press OK button.
3.
Reload paper in rear tray.
510
4.
Check paper information (paper size and media type).
The paper information is used in the print settings that you specify when you redo the printing in step
5.
After checking the paper information (paper size and media type), select OK with the printer's buttons and press the OK button.
5.
Redo printing.
Note
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
Other Measures
Load paper specified in print settings
To replace the paper in the rear tray with paper suitable for the print settings and continue printing, follow the steps below.
511
1.
Check print settings, and press printer's OK button.
2.
Select Replace paper with printer's buttons and press OK button.
3.
Load paper specified in print settings into rear tray.
4.
Register paper information (paper size and media type) in printer.
Select Change with the printer's buttons and press the OK button, and then register the paper information (paper size and media type) of the paper loaded in the rear tray to the printer correctly.
512
Print without changing paper and print settings
For example, to continue printing with a mismatch between the paper loaded in the rear tray and the paper information registered in the printer, follow the steps below.
Important
• The printed result may not be the intended color or size.
1.
Press printer's OK button.
2.
Select Print on set paper with printer's buttons and press OK button.
Note
• Depending on your printer's settings, Print on set paper may not be displayed.
Disable notifications for 2114 error
To disable the function to detect paper setting mismatch, follow the steps below.
1.
Use printer's press OK button.
buttons to scroll printer's HOME screen and select Settings , and
513
2.
Select Feed settings and press OK button.
3.
Select Detect paper setting mismatch and press OK button.
4.
Select Disable and press OK button.
514
2200
Cause
An internal part will need replacing soon.
What to Do
Press the printer's OK button to cancel the error.
You cannot replace the internal parts of the printer yourself. Contact your nearest Canon service center to request a repair as soon as possible.
Important
• Do not tilt the printer when moving it since the ink may leak out.
• When transporting the printer for repair, see Repairing Your Printer.
515
3252
Cause
The maintenance cartridge is almost full.
What to Do
The printer will not be able to print with a full maintenance cartridge.
Press the printer's OK button to clear the error message.
516
4103
Cause
Cannot perform printing with current print settings.
What to Do
Press the printer's Stop button to cancel printing.
Change the print settings specified when printing and retry printing.
517
5100
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
What to Do
Cancel printing and turn off the printer.
Check the following:
• • Make sure print head holder motion is not impeded by protective material, jammed paper, etc.
Remove any impediment.
Important
• • When clearing an impediment to print head holder motion, be careful not to touch clear film (A), white belt (B), or tubes (C).
If you soil or scratch this part by touching it with paper or your hand, it could damage the printer.
Turn the printer back on.
If this does not solve the problem, contact your nearest Canon service center to request a repair.
Important
• Do not tilt the printer when moving it since the ink may leak out.
• When transporting the printer for repairing it, see Repairing Your Printer.
518
5200
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
What to Do
1.
Turn off printer and unplug it.
2.
Wait about 10 minutes and then plug in printer again and turn it back on.
3.
Perform Replace Ink in Print Head .
Replace Ink in Print Head
If the error recurs after taking the above actions, contact your nearest Canon service center to request a repair.
Important
• Do not tilt the printer when moving it since the ink may leak out.
• When transporting the printer for repairing it, see Repairing Your Printer.
519
6000
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
What to Do
Turn off the printer and unplug it.
Plug in the printer again and turn it back on.
If this does not solve the problem, contact your nearest Canon service center to request a repair.
Important
• Do not tilt the printer when moving it since the ink may leak out.
• When transporting the printer for repairing it, see Repairing Your Printer.
520
advertisement